Citroen 2012 C4 Aircross User Manual

On-line owner's handbook

Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you

access to the latest information available, easily identiﬁ ed by

the bookmarks, associated with this pictogram:

If the heading "MyCitroën" is not available on the public website for

your country, you can ﬁ nd your handbook at the following address:

http://service.citroen.com

Select:

You can ﬁ nd your handbook on the CITROËN website, under the

heading "MyCitroën".

This personal space provides you with information on your products

and services, a direct and special contact with CITROËN and

becomes a space tailored for you.

the link in "Private customer access",

the language,

the model,

the edition date appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.

You will ﬁ nd your handbook, presented in the same way as the paper

version.

We draw

y

our attention to the followin

g

...

Ke

y

sa

f

et

y

warnin

g

add

iti

o

n

a

l inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n

contributes to the protection of the environment

refer to the pa

g

e indicated

Your vehicle is fitted with onl

y

some of the

e

quipment described in this document,

dependin

g

on the trim level, version and the

s

peci

f

ications

f

or the countr

y

in which it is sold.

The fittin

g

of electrical equipment or

accesso

ri

es

whi

c

h

a

r

e

n

o

t r

eco

mm

e

n

ded

by

C

ITR

OËN

ma

y

result in a

f

ailure o

f

y

our

ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s e

l

ectron

i

c s

y

stem.

Pl

ease note t

hi

s

peci

f

ic warnin

g

and contact a

C

ITR

OËN

dea

l

e

r t

o

be

s

h

o

wn th

e

r

eco

mm

e

n

ded

e

quipment and accessories.

C

ITR

O

Ë

N

has a presence on ever

y

continent,

a complete product ran

g

e,

brin

g

in

g

to

g

ether technolo

gy

and a permanent spirit o

f

innovation,

f

or a modern and creative approach to mobilit

y

.

We thank

y

ou and con

g

ratulate

y

ou on

y

our choice.

H

app

y

motor

i

n

g!

A

t the wheel o

f

y

our new vehicle,

g

ettin

g

to know each s

y

stem,

each control, each settin

g

,

makes

y

our trips,

y

our

j

ourne

y

s

more com

f

ortable and more en

j

o

y

able.

Contents

Instrument panel 2

4

Warnin

g

and indicator lamps

2

5

Instrument panel screen 3

1

Trip computer 4

3

Di

s

t

a

n

ce

r

eco

r

de

r 4

3

Tri

p

distance recorder 4

3

Se

rvi

ce

in

d

i

ca

t

o

r

4

Adj

ust

i

n

g

ve

hi

c

l

e sett

i

n

g

s

4

8

A

UDIO-CD s

y

stem screen 5

4

C

olour screen

5

6

L

i

g

htin

g

dimmer 5

9

Monitoring

Familiarisation

R

emote control ke

y

6

0

"

Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem 64

Doo

r

s

7

0

B

oo

t

7

1

Al

a

rm

7

3

Elec

tr

ic

w

i

n

do

w

s

7

6

Pa

n

o

r

a

mi

c

su

nr

oof

7

8

Access

F

r

o

nt

sea

t

s

7

9

Rea

r

sea

t

s

8

3

M

irrors

8

5

S

teerin

g

wheel ad

j

ustment 8

7

Ventilation

8

M

anual heatin

g

/ air conditionin

g

9

0

Automatic air conditioning

9

2

Rea

r

sc

r

ee

n

de

mi

s

t -

def

r

os

t

9

7

Interior

ﬁ

ttin

g

s

9

8

Boot

ﬁ

ttin

g

s 1

0

4

Comfort

S

tartin

g

- stoppin

g

the en

g

ine with the ke

y

1

0

6

S

tartin

g

- stoppin

g

the en

g

ine with

the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

s

y

stem 10

7

Parkin

g

brake

11

0

M

anual gearbox 1

1

Gea

r

s

hi

f

t in

d

i

ca

t

o

r 1

1

2

C

VT

g

earbox 1

1

3

H

ill

s

t

a

rt

ass

i

s

t 1

1

8

S

top & Start

(

Auto Stop & Go

)

function 1

1

9

Four wheel drive s

y

stem

12

2

C

ruise control 1

2

4

Parking sensors 12

7

R

eversin

g

camera 1

3

0

Driving

Li

g

htin

g

controls 1

3

1

Da

y

time runnin

g

lamps 13

4

A

utomatic illumination o

f

headlamps 13

4

M

anual

g

uide-me-home li

g

htin

g

1

3

5

Welcome li

g

htin

g

13

6

H

eadlamp ad

j

ustment

13

7

Wi

p

er controls 1

3

8

A

utomatic rain sensitive wi

p

ers 14

0

C

ourtes

y

lamps 14

2

Boot lamp 14

4

Panoramic roof li

g

htin

g

144

Visibility

Eco-driving

Contents

Dir

ec

ti

o

n in

d

i

ca

t

o

r

s

14

5

H

azard warnin

g

lamps

1

4

5

Ho

rn

14

5

Brakin

g

assistance s

y

stems 14

6

Tra

j

ector

y

control s

y

stems 1

4

8

Fr

o

nt

sea

t

be

lt

s

1

5

0

A

irba

g

s 15

4

C

hild seats 1

5

9

I

SO

FIX child seats 1

6

4

C

hild lock 16

9

Safety

Temporar

y

puncture repair kit 1

7

0

C

han

g

in

g

a wheel 1

7

4

C

han

g

in

g

a bulb 18

0

C

han

g

in

g

a fuse 1

8

6

12

V batter

y

19

2

A

utomatic power cut-off to accessories 19

5

C

hanging a wiper blade 19

5

R

ecoverin

g

the vehicle 1

9

6

Towin

g

a trailer 19

9

Fittin

g

roo

f

bars 2

0

1

A

ccessories 2

0

2

Practical information

Bonnet 2

0

5

P

etrol en

g

ines

20

6

D

iesel en

g

ines

20

7

F

uel tank 2

0

8

Runnin

g

out o

f

uel

(

Diesel

)

2

1

0

C

heckin

g

levels 2

1

C

hecks 21

4

Checks

P

etrol en

g

ines 2

1

7

P

etrol wei

g

hts 21

8

D

iesel en

g

ines 2

1

9

D

iesel wei

g

hts 2

2

0

D

im

e

n

s

i

o

n

s

22

1

Identiﬁ cation markin

g

s 22

2

Technical data

A

UDI

O

-TELEMATIC s

y

stem 2

2

3

A

UDI

O

-CD s

y

stem 28

3

Audio and telematics

Alphabetical index

Visual search

4

Familiarisation

Electronic ke

y

: Ke

y

less Entr

y

a

nd Startin

g

This s

y

stem allows

y

ou to lock, unlock and

s

tart t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e w

hil

e

k

eep

i

n

g

t

h

e

k

e

y

on

y

our

p

erson and in the de

f

ined zone.

6

4

Welcome lighting

Thi

s a

ddi

t

i

ona

l

exter

i

or an

d

i

nter

i

or

ligh

t

i

n

g

,

c

ontrolled remotely, makes your approach to

the vehicle easier when the li

g

ht is poor.

13

6

Exterior

Sto

p

& Start function

(

Auto Stop & Go

)

Thi

s system puts t

h

e eng

i

ne temporar

il

y

i

nto

s

tandby during stops in the tra

ff

ic

(

tra

ff

ic

li

g

hts, traffic

j

ams, etc...

)

. The en

g

ine restarts

automaticall

y

as soon as

y

ou want to move

off. The Stop & Start s

y

stem reduces fuel

c

onsumption and exhaust emissions, as well as

n

o

i

se

l

eve

l

s w

h

en stat

i

onar

y

.

119

Th

e

doo

r

s

ill fini

s

h

e

r

s

h

ou

l

d

n

o

t

be

used

as a step.

.

5

Familiarisation

Temporar

y

puncture repair kit

This kit is a complete s

y

stem, consistin

g

of a

c

ompressor and a sealant cartrid

g

e, for the

temporar

y

repair o

f

a t

y

re.

170

Panoramic sunroof

This large glazed area provides incomparable

visibilit

y

and li

g

ht in the passen

g

er

c

ompartment.

7

8

Reversin

g

camera

This system is activated automatically on

e

n

g

a

g

in

g

reverse and provides an ima

g

e in the

co

l

ou

r

sc

r

ee

n.

13

0

Exterior

F

ront an

d

rear par

ki

n

g

sensors

This s

y

stem warns

y

ou o

f

the presence o

f

obs

t

ac

l

es

in

f

r

o

nt

of

o

r

be

hin

d

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

wh

e

n

m

anoeuvring

f

orwards or backwards.

1

27

6

Familiarisation

Opening

A.

Foldin

g/

un

f

oldin

g

the ke

y

.

B.

Unlocking the vehicle.

C

.

Lockin

g

the vehicle.

Remote control

65

Unlockin

g

With the electronic ke

y

on

y

our person and in

o

n

e

o

f th

e

de

fin

ed

z

o

n

es

A

, press one of the

bu

tt

o

n

s

B

or

C

to unlock the vehicle, then pull

o

n the handle to open the door.

Lockin

g

With the electronic ke

y

on

y

our person and in

o

n

e

o

f th

e

de

fin

ed

z

o

n

es

A

, press one of the

bu

tt

o

n

s

B

or

C

t

o

l

oc

k th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

s

y

stem

60

64

.

7

Familiarisation

Opening

Boot

Openin

g

A

fter unlockin

g

the vehicle with the remote

c

ontrol or the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

sy

stem, press t

h

e

h

an

dl

e

A

.

Closin

g

P

u

ll th

e

h

a

n

d

l

e

B

do

wnw

a

r

ds

.

Fuel tank

A.

O

penin

g

the

f

iller

f

lap.

7

1

2

0

8

B

.

Removin

g

the

f

iller cap.

C

.

Hookin

g

the filler cap.

Capacit

y

of the fuel tank: approximatel

y

60 litres.

Bonnet

A

.

Int

e

ri

o

r r

e

l

ease

l

e

v

e

r.

B

.

Exterior safet

y

catch.

C.

Bonnet sta

y

.

205

8

Familiarisation

Interior

4-wheel drive s

y

stem with

electronic control

*

This s

y

stem allows the selection of a

transmission mode, accordin

g

to the drivin

g

co

n

di

t

io

n

s

.

CVT

g

earbox

This s

y

stem offers drivin

g

combinin

g

a full

y

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

a

n

d

a

m

a

n

ua

l m

ode

.

Di

g

ital air conditionin

g

This automatic air conditionin

g

s

y

stem maintains

the desired comfort level and adequate ai

r

c

irculation in the passen

g

er compartment.

Audio and communication

s

y

stems

These s

y

stems benefit from the followin

g

technolo

g

ies: radio,

C

D pla

y

er, U

S

B pla

y

er,

Bl

uetoot

h

s

y

stem, sate

lli

te nav

ig

at

i

on s

y

stem

w

i

t

h

co

l

our screen, aux

ili

ar

y

soc

k

ets.

AUDIO-TELEMATIC system

122

113

9

2

28

3

22

3

AUDIO-CD s

y

stem

*

Dependin

g

on version.

.

9

Familiarisation

Instruments and controls

D

oo

r mirr

o

r

co

ntr

o

l

s

.

El

ec

tri

c

win

do

w

co

ntr

o

l

s

.

2.

B

o

nn

e

t r

e

l

ease

.

3.

F

usebo

x.

4.

M

anua

l

h

ea

dl

amp

h

e

igh

t a

dj

ustment.

S

ide switch panel.

5

.

S

ide ad

j

ustable air vent.

6

.

Instrument

p

anel.

7

.

Li

g

htin

g

and direction indicator control

s

t

a

lk.

8.

Steerin

g

wheel ad

j

ustment control.

9.

Controls for Bluetooth s

y

stem or telephone.

1

0

.

C

ontrols for Audio-

C

D and Audio-telematic

sy

stems.

11.

D

r

i

ver

'

s a

i

r

b

a

g

.

Ho

rn.

1

2

.

C

ruise control switches.

1

3

.

Parkin

g

brake.

10

Familiarisation

Instruments and controls

1.

H

ea

t

ed

sea

t

co

ntr

o

l.

2.

Gear lever, CVT

g

earbox.

3.

Steerin

g

lock and i

g

nition.

4.

Wiper / screenwash control stalk.

5.

S

teerin

g

mounted control paddles

f

or the

C

VT

g

earbox.

6

.

Wi

n

d

screen

d

em

i

st

i

n

g

vent.

7

.

Passenger's airbag.

8.

G

love box.

Passen

g

er's airba

g

deactivation switch.

Back-up startin

g

unit

(

with the "Ke

y

less

Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

9.

Front door

g

lass demistin

g

vent.

.

11

Familiarisation

Centre console

A.

Rear view mirror

,

manual or automatic.

B.

Courtes

y

lamp / Map readin

g

lamps.

C.

Microphone

f

or Audio-

C

D et Audio-

te

l

emat

i

c s

y

stems.

D.

C

ontrol

f

or

p

anoramic sunroo

f

blind.

E

.

S

unshine

/

rain sensor.

1.

C

entral ad

j

ustable air vents.

2.

S

creen

f

or the Audio-

C

D s

y

stem or colou

r

s

creen

f

or the Audio-telematic s

y

stem.

3.

Ignition switch.

S

TART/

S

TOP button

(

with "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

4.

Audio-CD s

y

stem or Audio-telematic

sy

s

t

em.

5

.

Central switch panel.

6.

T

emperature sensor.

7.

Manual or di

g

ital heatin

g

/

air conditionin

g

co

ntr

ols

.

8.

G

ear lever, manual or

C

VT gearbox.

9.

C

i

g

arette li

g

hter

/

12 V accessor

y

socket.

10

.

Portable ashtra

y

.

11

.

Control for 4 wheel drive s

y

stem.

12

.

Cup holder.

13

.

Fr

o

nt

a

rmr

es

t.

12

Familiarisation

Sitting comfortably

Front seat

7

9

Manual ad

j

ustments

1.

Seat forwards-backwards ad

j

ustment.

2.

Driver's seat cushion hei

g

ht ad

j

ustment.

3.

Seat backrest an

g

le ad

j

ustment.

4.

H

ea

d

restra

i

nt a

dj

ustment.

Electric ad

j

ustments

1.

Seat forwards-backwards ad

j

ustment.

2.

Driver's seat cushion hei

g

ht and an

g

le

a

d

j

ustment.

3.

Seat backrest an

g

le ad

j

ustment.

80

.

13

Familiarisation

Sitting comfortably

Front armrest

8

2

Steerin

g

wheel ad

j

ustment

1

.

R

e

l

ease

.

2.

Ad

j

ust for hei

g

ht and reach.

3.

L

oc

k.

For

y

our comfort, the front armrest is ad

j

ustable

lon

g

itudinall

y

.

8

7

It also has two stora

g

e spaces; these can be

fitted with accessor

y

sockets.

1

0

1

As a safet

y

precaution, these

operations must onl

y

be carried out

when stationar

y

.

14

Familiarisation

Sitting comfortably

A.

Selection of the mirror to ad

j

ust.

B.

Ad

j

ustin

g

the position of the mirror

g

lass in

f

ou

r

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

s

.

C.

Foldin

g

/ Unfoldin

g

.

8

5-8

6

Rear view mirror

Manual da

y

/ni

g

ht model

1

.

S

election o

f

the "da

y

" position o

f

the mirror.

2

.

Ad

j

ustment of the mirror.

Automatic da

y/

ni

g

ht model

8

7

A

.

Bri

g

htness detection in automatic da

y

/ni

g

ht

m

ode

.

B.

Ad

j

ustment o

f

the mirror.

1.

Fastenin

g

the buckle.

2.

Hei

g

ht ad

j

ustment.

Front seat belts

15

0

.

15

Familiarisation

Seeing clearly

Li

g

htin

g

Rin

g

A

Rin

g

B

Wi

p

ers

13

1

Control A: windscreen wi

p

ers

1

38

Control B: rear wi

p

e

r

14

1

Dipped

/

main beam headlamps.

S

idelam

p

s.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Li

g

htin

g

off.

Front and rear fo

g

lamps.

Wash-wipe.

I

nterm

i

ttent w

i

pe.

Pa

r

k

.

Switchin

g

On / Off "AUTO"

)

Push

t

he

s

t

alk

do

wnw

a

r

ds

a

n

d

r

elease

i

t.

1

40

16

Familiarisation

Ventilation

we recommend use of automatic operation b

y

pressin

g

the

"

AUTO"

bu

tt

o

n.

R

ecommen

d

e

d

i

nter

i

or sett

i

n

g

s

I re

q

uire..

.

Manual Air Conditionin

g

Ai

r

di

str

ib

ut

i

on

A

ir flo

w

Air recirculation

/

I

ntake of outside air

T

emperatur

e

Manual A/C

H

O

T

COLD

D

EMISTING

D

EFROSTIN

G

.

17

Familiarisation

Monitoring

A.

Speedometer dial.

B.

I

nstrument pane

l

screen.

C.

Re

v

cou

nt

e

r

dial

.

D.

Ligh

t

i

n

g

di

mmer.

E.

INF

O

button.

Used to c

y

cle throu

g

h the di

ff

erent

information in the instrument panel screen.

Instrument

p

anel

A

.

Passen

g

er's airba

g

deactivation warnin

g

lamp.

Central switch

p

anel

1

55

1

.

With the i

g

nition on, the oran

g

e and red

warnin

g

lamps come on.

2

.

With the en

g

ine runnin

g

, these warnin

g

l

amps should

g

o off.

If warnin

g

lamps remain on, refer to the pa

g

e

co

n

ce

rn

ed

.

25

2

4

Warnin

g

lamps

1

45

1

5

1

B.

Hazard warnin

g

lamps.

C.

Front passen

g

er's seat belt not

f

astened or

u

n

fas

t

e

n

ed

.

18

Familiarisation

Monitoring

M

anua

l

h

ea

dl

amp a

dj

ustment.

Side switch

p

anel

1

3

7

1

.

O

pen the

g

love box.

2

.

Insert the ke

y

.

3.

S

elect the position:

"

OFF"

(

deactivation

)

, with "rear facin

g

"

child

seat,

"

ON"

(

activation

)

, with front passen

g

er o

r

"f

orwards

f

acing" child seat.

4.

Remove the ke

y

keepin

g

the switch in the

new pos

i

t

i

on

.

Passen

g

er's front airba

g

1

5

B.

Deactivation of the ASC/TCL s

y

stem.

1

27

C

.

Deactivation o

f

the parkin

g

sensors.

1

48

Passenger safety

1

20

D.

Deactivation of the Stop & Start

(

Auto

S

top

&

G

o

)

f

unction.

Starting

- P

os

iti

o

n 1:

L

OCK

- P

os

iti

o

n 2: A

CC

- P

os

iti

o

n

3

: O

N

- P

os

iti

o

n 4:

S

TAR

T

Each press on the START/STO

P

button,

without action on the pedals, chan

g

es the

mode

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

-

Fi

rst press: ACC mod

e

-

S

econd press: O

N

m

o

de

-

Thi

r

d

press:

O

FF mod

e

10

6

10

7

I

g

nition switch

START/STOP button

.

19

Familiarisation

Driving safely

This six-speed

g

earbox o

ff

ers the choice o

f

the

e

ase o

f

automatic operation or the pleasure o

f

m

anua

l

g

ear c

h

an

gi

n

g

.

1.

G

ear lever.

2.

"-" steerin

g

mounted control paddle.

3.

"+" steerin

g

mounted control paddle.

CVT

g

earbox

Di

sp

l

a

y

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

The drivin

g

mode selected and

/

or the

g

ea

r

en

g

a

g

e

d

appear

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen

.

P

.

P

a

rk.

R

.

R

e

v

e

r

se

.

N

.

N

eu

tr

a

l.

D.

Drive

(

Automated mode

)

.

+

/

-

.

Manual mode with sequential

g

ear

c

han

g

es.

Movin

g

off

From position

P

, with the parking brake applied:

P

)

Press the brake pedal

f

irml

y

.

)

S

tart the en

g

ine.

)

Th

en se

l

ect

p

os

i

t

i

on

R

,

D

or

+

/

-

.

)

Release the parking brake.

)

Pro

g

ressivel

y

take

y

our

f

oot o

ff

the brake

p

edal, the vehicle moves off on its own.

11

3

20

Familiarisation

Driving safely

Stop & Start

(

Auto Stop &

G

o

)

function

En

g

ine

g

oin

g

into STOP mode

11

9

Th

e

"

AS&G" warnin

g

lamp comes on in

the instrument panel or the instrument

panel screen and the en

g

ine is put into

standb

y

a

f

ter a

f

ew seconds:

En

g

ine

g

oin

g

into START mode

Deactivation

/

Reactivation

You can deactivate the system at any time

b

y

pressin

g

the

"

AS&G OFF" button; the

c

orrespondin

g

warnin

g

lamp comes on in the

instrument panel or the instrument panel screen.

1

20

120

Th

e s

y

stem

i

s react

i

vate

d

automat

i

ca

lly

e

ver

y

t

i

me

y

ou start t

h

e en

gi

ne w

i

t

h

t

h

e

k

e

y

or w

i

t

h

t

h

e

S

TART/

S

TO

P

bu

tt

o

n.

Th

e

"AS&G" warnin

g

lamp

g

oes off

and the en

g

ine restarts automaticall

y

:

-

w

ith a manual

g

earbox

;

when

y

ou

f

ull

y

depress the clutch pedal.

-

w

i

t

h

a manua

l

g

ear

b

ox

;

w

i

t

h

t

he

v

ehicle

stationar

y

and

y

our

f

oot on the brake pedal,

w

h

en

y

ou put t

h

e

g

ear

l

ever

i

nto neutra

l

a

n

d

re

l

ease t

h

e c

l

utc

h

p

e

d

a

l

.

In certain condition, START mode ma

y

en

g

a

g

e

automaticall

y

; the

"

AS&G" warnin

g

lamp

flashes then

g

oes off.

In certain circumstances the ST

O

P mode ma

y

n

ot be available; the

"

AS&G" warnin

g

lamp

flashes for a few seconds then

g

oes off.

.

21

Familiarisation

Driving safely

Thr

ee

tr

a

n

s

mi

ss

i

o

n m

odes

a

r

e

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

a

n

d

s

electable manuall

y

b

y

the driver accordin

g

to

requirements:

A

.

Two wheel drive

(

2WD

)

,

B.

Four wheel drive

(

4WD AUTO

)

,

C.

Four wheel drive

(

4WD L

OC

K

)

.

Four wheel drive s

y

stem

1

.

"ON / OFF"

bu

tt

o

n:

s

wit

c

h

es

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l

o

n

a

n

d

o

ff.

2

.

" COAST SE

T

" button: pro

g

ramme a drivin

g

s

peed then decrease the cruise speed.

3.

"

A

CC RE

S

"

:

i

ncrease t

h

e cru

i

se spee

d

,

an

d

reca

ll

t

h

e pro

g

ramme

d

spee

d

.

4.

"

CANCEL

" button: cruise control off.

L

Cruise control "CRUISE"

1

2

4

I

n or

d

er to

b

e pro

g

ramme

d

or act

i

vate

d

, t

h

e

vehicle speed must be hi

g

her than 25 mph

(

40 km

/

h

)

, with at least second

g

ear en

g

a

g

ed.

122

22

Familiarisation

Eco-driving

Eco-drivin

g

is a ran

g

e o

f

ever

y

da

y

practices that allow the motorist to optimise their

f

uel consumption and

CO

2

e

m

issio

n

s

.

Optimise the use of

y

ou

r

g

earbox

With a manual

g

earbox, move off

g

entl

y

,

c

han

g

e up without waitin

g

and drive b

y

c

han

g

in

g

up quite soon. If

y

our vehicle has

the s

y

stem, the

g

ear shift indicator invites

y

ou

to c

h

an

g

e up;

i

t

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

anel,

f

ollow its instructions.

With an automatic or electronic

g

earbox,

s

ta

y

i

n

D

r

i

ve

"D"

o

r

Au

t

o

"A"

, accor

di

n

g

to

the t

y

pe o

f

g

earbox, without pressin

g

the

a

cce

l

erator pe

d

a

l

h

eav

ily

or su

dd

en

ly

.

D

r

i

ve smoot

hly

Maintain a sa

f

e distance between vehicles, use

e

n

g

ine brakin

g

rather than the brake pedal,

a

nd press the accelerator pro

g

ressivel

y

. These

p

ractices contribute towards a reduction in fuel

c

onsumption and C

O

2

emissions and also helps

r

educe the back

g

round tra

ff

ic noise.

I

f

your vehicle has cruise control, make use o

f

the s

y

stem at speeds above 25 mph

(

40 km

/

h

)

when the traffic is flowin

g

well.

Control the use of

y

our

e

lectrical e

q

ui

p

ment

Before movin

g

off, if the passen

g

er

c

ompartment is too warm, ventilate it b

y

openin

g

the windows and air vents before usin

g

t

h

e a

i

r con

di

t

i

on

i

n

g

.

Above 30 mph

(

50 km

/

h

)

, close the windows

an

d

l

eave t

h

e a

i

r vents o

p

en.

Remember to make use o

f

e

q

ui

p

ment that can

help keep the temperature in the passen

g

e

r

c

ompartment down

(

sunroof and window

b

linds...

)

.

Switch off the air conditionin

g

, unless it has

automatic di

g

ital re

g

ulation, as soon as the

d

es

i

re

d

temperature

i

s atta

i

ne

d

.

S

witch o

ff

the demistin

g

and de

f

rostin

g

c

ontrols, i

f

not automatic.

S

witch o

ff

the heated seat as soon as

p

ossible.

S

witch o

ff

the headlamps and

f

ront

f

o

g

lamps

when the level o

f

li

g

ht does not require thei

r

use

.

A

void runnin

g

the en

g

ine before movin

g

off,

p

articularl

y

in winter;

y

our vehicle will warm

up much faster while drivin

g

.

A

s a passen

g

er, i

f

y

ou avoid connectin

g

y

our multimedia devices

(f

ilm, music, video

game...

)

, you will contribute towards limiting

the consumption o

f

electrical ener

gy

, and so

o

f f

ue

l.

Disconnect

y

our portable devices before

leavin

g

the vehicle.

.

23

Familiarisation

Limit the causes of excess

c

onsum

p

tion

Spread loads throu

g

hout the vehicle; place

the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot,

as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit th

e

l

oads

ca

rri

ed

in th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

a

n

d

reduce wind resistance

(

roo

f

bars, roo

f

rack,

bic

y

cle carrier, trailer...

)

. Use a roo

f

box in

p

re

f

erence.

R

e

m

o

v

e

r

oof

ba

r

s

a

n

d

r

oof

r

ac

k

s

af

t

e

r

use

.

A

t the end of winter, remove snow t

y

res and

refit

y

our summer t

y

res.

Observe the recommendations

on maintenance

Check the t

y

re pressures re

g

ularl

y

, when cold,

r

eferrin

g

to the label in the door aperture,

d

riv

e

r'

s

i

de

.

C

arr

y

out this check in particular:

- be

f

ore a lon

g

j

ourne

y

,

- at each chan

g

e o

f

season,

- a

f

ter a long period out o

f

use.

Don't

f

or

g

et the spare wheel and the t

y

res on

a

n

y

trailer or caravan.

Have

y

our vehicle serviced re

g

ularl

y

(

en

g

ine

oil, oil

f

ilter, air

f

ilter...

)

and observe the

schedule o

f

operations recommended by the

m

a

n

ufac

t

u

r

e

r.

When refuellin

g

, do not continue after the

3

r

d

cut-off of the nozzle to avoid an

y

overflow.

A

t the wheel of

y

our new vehicle, it is onl

y

a

f

ter the

f

irst 1 800 miles

(

3 000 kilometres

)

that

y

ou will see the

f

uel consumption settle

d

own to a cons

i

stent avera

g

e.

24

Monitoring

Instrument panel

1.

Re

v

cou

nt

e

r.

2.

Sp

eedometer.

Screen t

y

pe 2

3.

I

nstrument pane

l

di

sp

l

a

y

screen:

- Warning and status displays.

- Total and tri

p

distance recorders.

- Service indicator.

- Coolant temperature.

- Trip computer information.

- Cruise control settin

g

.

-

G

ear shi

f

t indicator recommendations.

-

S

ettin

g

s menu

(

displa

y

, sound...

)

.

-

Fuel

le

v

el

.

- Ambient tem

p

erature.

- Tr

a

n

s

mi

ss

i

o

n m

ode

.

Panel

g

roupin

g

to

g

ether the dials and warnin

g/

indicator lam

p

s. These in

f

orm the driver o

f

the

a

ctivation

/

deactivation o

f

a s

y

stem or o

f

the

occu

rr

e

n

ce

o

f

a

f

au

lt.

Screen t

y

pe 1

Mana

g

ement o

f

the displa

y

is done usin

g

t

he

INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

loca

t

ed

o

n t

he

dashboa

r

d

to the le

f

t o

f

the instrument

p

anel.

1

25

Monitoring

Vi

sua

l in

d

i

ca

t

o

r

s

whi

c

h inf

o

rm th

e

d

riv

e

r

o

f th

e

occurrence of a malfunction

(

warnin

g

lamp

)

or o

f

the operation o

f

a s

y

stem

(

operation or

deactivation indicator lamp

)

.

Wh

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on

C

ertain warnin

g

lamps come on

f

or a

f

ew

secon

d

s w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on.

Wh

en t

h

e en

gi

ne

i

s starte

d

, t

h

ese warn

i

n

g

l

amps should go o

ff

.

A

ssoc

i

ate

d

warn

i

n

g

s

The illumination,

f

ixed or

f

lashin

g

, o

f

certain

warn

i

n

g

l

amps ma

y

b

e accompan

i

e

d

by

an

au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

an

d

a messa

g

e.

Warnin

g

and indicator lamps

I

f

they remain on, be

f

ore moving o

ff

,

r

e

f

er to the in

f

ormation on the warning

lam

p

in

q

uestion.

26

Monitoring

W

arn

i

n

g

l

amps

Wh

en t

h

e en

gi

ne

i

s runn

i

n

g

or t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s

being driven, the illumination o

f

one o

f

the

f

ollowing warning lamps indicates a mal

f

unction

which requires action on the part of the driver.

The warnin

g

comes on in the instrument panel

or appears in the instrument panel screen.

Warnin

g

lam

p

i

s on Caus

e

A

ction / Observations

P

arkin

g

brake

/

B

rake fluid

l

evel

/

Electronic

b

rake force

distribution

fix

ed

. It comes on for a few seconds

,

then

g

oes o

ff

when the i

g

nition is switched

t

o

"

O

N".

The parkin

g

brake is on or not

f

ull

y

re

l

eased

.

It is accompanied b

y

a messa

g

e. Release the parkin

g

brake to make the warnin

g

lamp

g

o off.

Th

e

b

r

a

k

e

f

l

u

i

d

l

e

v

e

l i

s

t

oo

l

o

w.

I

t

i

s accompan

i

e

d

by

a messa

g

e.

T

op up w

i

t

h

b

ra

k

e

fluid and contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

o

p

.

Th

e

l

ec

tr

o

ni

c

b

r

a

k

e

f

o

r

ce

d

i

s

tri

bu

ti

o

n

(

EBFD

)

is fault

y

.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Have it checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

E

ngine

a

utodia

g

nosis

s

y

ste

m

f

lashing. The engine management system has

a

fau

lt.

Risk o

f

destruction o

f

the catalytic converter.

Have it checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

fix

ed

. The emission control s

y

stem has a

f

au

lt.

The warnin

g

lamp should

g

o off when the en

g

ine is started.

If it does not

g

o off, contact a CITROËN dealer o

r

quali

f

ied workshop without dela

y

.

The illumination o

f

a warning lamp may be accompanied by the display o

f

an additional

m

essa

g

e, to assist

y

ou in identi

fy

in

g

the problem.

If

y

ou encounter an

y

problems,

y

ou should contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

1

27

Monitoring

Warnin

g

lamp

i

s on Caus

e

A

ction / Observations

B

atter

y

c

h

ar

ge

*

f

ix

ed

.

Th

e

b

atter

y

c

h

ar

gi

n

g

c

i

rcu

i

t

h

as a

f

ault

(

dirty or loose terminals, slack o

r

c

ut alternator belt, ...

)

.

The warnin

g

lamp should

g

o o

ff

when the en

g

ine is

s

t

a

rt

ed

.

If it does not

g

o off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a

qualified workshop.

A

nt

i

-

l

oc

k

B

raking System

(

ABS

)

f

ix

ed

.

Th

e ant

i

-

l

oc

k

b

ra

ki

n

g

s

y

stem

h

as a

fau

lt.

Th

e ve

hi

c

l

e reta

i

ns convent

i

ona

l

b

ra

ki

n

g

.

Drive care

f

ully at reduced speed and contact a

CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified worksho

p

without

dela

y

.

Front seat belt

not fastened /

u

nfastened

fixed, then flashin

g

,

a

ccompanied b

y

an

a

u

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

.

Th

e

d

riv

e

r h

as

n

o

t f

as

t

e

n

ed

o

r h

as

u

nf

as

t

e

n

ed

th

e

ir

sea

t

be

lt.

Pull the strap, then insert the ton

g

ue in the buckle.

*

Accordin

g

to destination countr

y

.

Ai

r

b

a

g

s an

d

p

retens

i

oner

s

temporar

ily

.

Wh

en

y

ou sw

i

tc

h

on t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on, t

hi

s

warnin

g

lamp comes on

f

or a

f

ew

seconds, then

g

oes o

ff

.

If it does not

g

o off, contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a

quali

f

ied workshop.

f

ix

ed

.Fault with one o

f

the airba

g

or seat

belt pretensioner s

y

stems.

Have it checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

28

Monitoring

O

p

eration indicator lam

p

s

I

f

one o

f

the

f

ollowin

g

indicator lamps comes on, this con

f

irms that the correspondin

g

s

y

stem has come into operation.

I

t may

b

e accompan

i

e

d

b

y an au

dibl

e s

i

gna

l

an

d

a message

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen.

Warnin

g

lam

p

i

s on Caus

e

A

ction / Observations

L

eft-hand

direction

i

ndicato

r

f

lashin

g

with audible

warning.

Th

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

sta

lk

h

as

b

een presse

d

do

wnw

a

r

ds

.

I

f

this indicator lamp

f

lashes abnormall

y

quickl

y

, this

cou

l

d

in

d

i

ca

t

e

th

a

t th

e

bu

l

b

of

o

n

e

of

th

e

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

indicators has blown.

C

han

g

e the bulb or contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

R

i

g

ht-hand

direction

i

ndicato

r

f

lashin

g

with audible

warnin

g

.

The li

g

htin

g

stalk has been pushed

upwards.

I

f

this indicator lamp

f

lashes abnormall

y

quickl

y

, this

cou

l

d

in

d

i

ca

t

e

th

a

t th

e

bu

l

b

o

f

o

n

e

o

f th

e

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

indicators has blown. Chan

g

e the bulb or contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Sidelam

ps

or

di

pp

ed beam

headlam

p

s

fix

ed

. The sidelamps or dipped beam

h

eadlamps are on.

M

ain beam

h

ea

dl

am

p

s

fix

ed

.The li

g

htin

g

stalk is pulled towards

yo

u.

Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.

Front fo

g

lamp

s

f

ix

ed

.The

f

ront

f

o

g

lamps are switched on. Turn the rin

g

on the stalk rearwards twice to switch o

ff

the front fo

g

lamps.

R

ear fo

g

lamp fix

ed

.The rear fo

g

lamp is switched on. Turn the rin

g

on the stalk rearwards to switch off the

rear

f

o

g

lamp.

1

29

Monitoring

Warnin

g

lam

p

i

s on Caus

e

Action / Observations

Cruise contro

l

fix

ed

Thi

s

co

m

es

o

n wh

e

n th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l h

as

bee

n

ac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

Press the "

O

N/

O

FF" button to activate/deactivate the

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l.

Active stabilit

y

c

ontrol and

t

ract

i

on contro

l

(

ASC/TCL

)

flashin

g

.

O

peration of the ASC/TCL s

y

stems. The s

y

stems optimise traction and improve the

directional stabilit

y

of the vehicle.

Ad

apt

y

our

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

an

d

mo

d

erate

y

our spee

d

.

f

ix

ed

. Fault in the A

SC/

T

C

L s

y

stems. Have it checked b

y

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

o

p

.

Sto

p

& Start

(

Auto Stop & Go

)

f

unction

fix

ed

. When the vehicle stops

(

red li

g

hts,

traffic

j

ams, ...

)

the Stop & Start

(

A

S&G)

f

unction has put the en

g

ine

int

o

S

T

O

P m

ode

.

The warnin

g

lamp

g

oes off and the en

g

ine restarts

automaticall

y

in START mode, as soon as

y

ou want to

mo

v

e

off

.

f

l

as

h

es

fo

r

a

fe

w

s

econ

d

s, t

h

en

g

oes

off

.

S

T

O

P mode is temporaril

y

u

n

a

v

ailable

.

or

S

TART mode is invoked

automaticall

y

.

S

ee "

S

top

&

S

tart

(

A

S&G)

f

unction"

f

or special cases

with

S

T

O

P m

ode

a

n

d

S

TART m

ode

.

Di

ese

l

en

gi

ne

p

re-

h

eat

i

n

g

f

ix

ed

.

Th

e en

gi

ne

i

s co

ld

an

d

:

- t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s at t

h

e O

N

p

osition

(

ignition on

)

, o

r

- th

e

S

TART/

S

TOP startin

g

button

h

as been pressed

(

i

g

nition on

)

.

Wi

t

h

k

e

y

start

i

n

g

, wa

i

t unt

il

t

h

e warn

i

n

g

l

amp

h

as

g

one

o

ff

be

f

ore startin

g

.

With the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

s

y

stem, the en

g

ine

will onl

y

start a

f

ter the warnin

g

lamp has

g

one o

ff

.

The duration

f

or which the warnin

g

lamp is on is

determined b

y

the climatic conditions

(

up to 30 seconds

in severe weather

)

.

I

f

the en

g

ine does not start, switch the i

g

nition o

ff

and

t

h

en on a

g

a

i

n an

d

wa

i

t a

g

a

i

n unt

il

t

h

e warn

i

n

g

l

amp

g

oes o

ff

, then start the en

g

ine.

30

Monitoring

D

eact

i

vat

i

on

i

n

di

cator

l

am

p

s

I

f

one o

f

the

f

ollowin

g

indicator lamps comes on, this con

f

irms that the correspondin

g

s

y

stem has been switched o

ff

intentionall

y

.

Thi

s

i

s ma

y

b

e accompan

i

e

d

by

an au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

an

d

a messa

g

e

i

n t

h

e screen.

W

arn

i

n

g

l

am

p

i

s on Caus

e

A

ction / Observations

A

SC/TC

L

fix

ed

. The ASC/TCL off switch

,

located at

the bottom o

f

the dashboard

(

driver's

s

ide

)

has been pressed.

A

SC/

T

C

L i

s

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

A

SC

: active stability control .

T

C

L: traction control.

Press the button to activate the A

SC/

T

C

L.

The A

SC/

T

C

L s

y

stem is automaticall

y

activated on

s

tart

i

n

g

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e.

Sto

p

& Start

s

y

stem

(

Auto

Stop & Go

)

fix

ed

. The off switch for the Stop & Start

(

AS&G

)

s

y

stem, located at the bottom

o

f

the dashboard

(

driver's side

)

has

b

een presse

d

.

The

S

top

&

S

tart

(

A

S&G)

s

y

stem is

deaac

t

i

v

a

t

ed

.

Press the switch a

g

ain to activate the Stop & Start

(

AS&G

)

s

y

stem.

1

31

Monitoring

Instrument panel screen

Each time the en

g

ine is started: warnin

g

lamps and/or messa

g

es come on, appl

y

in

g

a checkin

g

self test. The

y

g

o off after a few seconds.

When

y

ou want to see the trip computer in

f

ormation,

y

ou can choose to i

g

nore the alerts, b

y

pressin

g

the INFO

bu

tt

o

n

o

n t

he

dashboa

r

d

.

The messa

g

es displa

y

ed ma

y

var

y

accordin

g

to the t

y

pe o

f

displa

y

screen

(

t

y

pe 1 or t

y

pe 2

)

in the instrument panel.

Certain messa

g

es are onl

y

displa

y

ed in the t

y

pe 2 screen

.

Wh

en t

hi

s s

y

m

b

o

l

appears: ma

k

e a

s

h

ort

p

ress

.

Wh

en t

hi

s s

y

m

b

o

l

appears: ma

k

e a

l

on

g

press

.

I

g

nition off

.

Ig

nition on

(

with a manual

g

earbox

).

Ig

nition on

(

with a CVT

g

earbox

).

Warnin

g

s and alerts

When an alert occurs, the displa

y

ed information then disappears. the warnin

g

lamp and its associated messa

g

e appear, accompanied if appropriate b

y

an audible si

g

nal.

When there are several alerts, they are displayed in turn and this symbol appears. It remains displayed while there are still alerts.

You will then be able to displa

y

the alerts a

g

ain b

y

pressin

g

the

I

NFO button several times to c

y

cle throu

g

h the trip computer information and return to

th

e

a

l

e

rt

s

.

32

Monitoring

S

creen

1

S

creen 2 Caus

e

S

olution - Action Observations

Warnin

g

messa

g

es

(

i

g

nition at "OFF"

)

You have

f

or

g

otten to switch o

ff

the

ve

hi

c

l

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

.

S

witch o

ff

the vehicle li

g

htin

g

b

y

placin

g

the control at

O

FF.

The

r

e

is

a

n

i

nt

e

rm

i

tt

e

nt

audible

sig

na

l

.

The alarm has been tri

gg

ered.

The batter

y

f

or the Ke

y

less Entr

y

a

nd

S

tartin

g

s

y

stem is

f

lat.

Replace the batter

y

(

see "

C

han

g

in

g

the batteries"

)

.

Th

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

t

h

at

y

ou

h

ave on

your person is not recognised.

C

heck that

y

ou have the correct

e

lectronic key.

I

f

the messa

g

e persists, contact a

C

ITROËN dealer.

The electronic ke

y

is still in the

vehicle and

y

ou have tried to lock

th

e

doo

r

s

o

r

boo

t fr

o

m th

e

ou

t

s

i

de

.

Ensure that

y

ou have the electronic

k

e

y

on

y

our person before lockin

g

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

O

n

e

of

th

e

doo

r

s

o

r th

e

boo

t i

s

n

o

t

p

roper

ly

c

l

ose

d

w

h

en

l

oc

ki

n

g

t

h

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

f

r

o

m th

e

ou

t

s

i

de

.

C

lose the door or the boot, then lock

t

he

v

ehicle

.

1

33

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

Fault with the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem.

Contact a CITROËN dealer.

F

au

lt with th

e

l

ec

tr

o

ni

c

a

nti-th

e

ft

sy

stem.

Switch off the i

g

nition, then start the

e

n

gi

ne.

If the problem persists, contact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer.

The electronic key is not detected. Insert the electronic key into the

housin

g

located in the

g

love box.

R

e

m

e

m

be

r t

o

r

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

l

ec

tr

o

ni

c

ke

y

f

rom the housin

g

a

f

ter startin

g

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The electronic ke

y

has not been

r

emoved from the housin

g

in the

gl

ove

b

ox.

Remove the electronic ke

y

from the

housin

g

in the

g

love box.

Th

e steer

i

n

g

co

l

umn

i

s

l

oc

k

e

d

.

S

witch the i

g

nition on and turn the

steer

i

n

g

w

h

ee

l

s

ligh

t

ly

to un

l

oc

k

t

h

e

steering column.

The en

g

ine is off but the

g

ear lever

is not in position

P

.

P

Place the

g

ear lever in position

P

.

P

O

nl

y

for vehicles fitted with a "CVT"

g

earbox.

34

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

The steerin

g

column has not locked

a

fter openin

g

the driver's door.

Lock the steerin

g

column b

y

turnin

g

the steerin

g

wheel sli

g

htl

y

before

l

eavin

g

the vehicle.

F

au

l

t w

i

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectr

i

ca

l

s

y

stem.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop.

1

35

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

Warnin

g

messa

g

es

(

i

g

nition at "ON"

)

F

au

l

t w

i

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectr

i

c

p

ower

s

teering.

S

to

p

the vehicle, wait

f

ew moments

then start the engine again.

I

f

the messa

g

e remains a

f

te

r

restarting, contact a CITROËN

dealer or a quali

f

ied workshop.

The batter

y

f

or the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

a

nd Startin

g

" s

y

stem is flat.

Replace the batter

y

(

see "

C

han

g

in

g

the batteries"

)

.

The electronic ke

y

that

y

ou have on

y

our person is not reco

g

nised.

Check that

y

ou have the correct

e

lectronic ke

y

.

If the messa

g

e persists, contact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer.

The electronic ke

y

is still in the

vehicle and

y

ou have tried to lock

th

e

doo

r

s

o

r

boo

t fr

o

m th

e

ou

t

s

i

de

.

Ensure that

y

ou have the electronic

k

e

y

on

y

our person before lockin

g

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

O

ne of the doors or the boot is not

p

roperl

y

closed when lockin

g

the

v

e

hi

c

l

e

fr

o

m th

e

ou

t

s

i

de

.

Close the door or the boot, then lock

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Fault with the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer.

36

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

Th

e

b

r

a

k

e

fl

u

i

d

l

e

v

e

l i

s

t

oo

l

o

w. Top up usin

g

a brake fluid listed b

y

C

ITR

O

ËN.

If the problem persists, contact

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

orkshop.

Fault with the brakin

g

s

y

stem. You must stop as soon as it is safe

t

o

do

so

.

Have the s

y

stem checked b

y

a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

w

or

k

s

h

op.

Fault with the anti-lock braking

s

y

stem

(

AB

S)

.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop.

Th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

r

e

t

a

in

s

co

nv

e

nti

o

n

a

l

brakin

g

without assistance but

y

ou

are advised to stop.

O

ne of the doors or the boot is not

p

roperl

y

closed.

C

lose the door or the boot. The openin

g

in question is identified

in th

e

sc

r

ee

n.

Th

e

b

onnet

i

s not proper

ly

c

l

ose

d

.

C

l

ose

th

e

bo

nn

e

t.

F

au

lt with th

e

l

ec

tr

o

ni

c

a

nti-th

e

ft

s

y

stem.

Switch off the i

g

nition then start the

e

n

g

ine a

g

ain.

If the problem persists, contact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer.

Th

e

d

r

i

ver

'

s

d

oor

i

s open an

d

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s st

ill

on.

S

witch o

ff

the i

g

nition be

f

ore leavin

g

t

he

v

ehicle

.

1

37

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

Fault in the steerin

g

column. You must stop as soon as it is safe

t

o

do

so

.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

Fault with the electrical s

y

stem. Stop the vehicle and contact a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

w

or

k

s

h

op.

The cooling system temperature is

too hi

g

h.

Wait

f

or the engine to cool down

b

e

f

ore toppin

g

up, i

f

necessar

y

.

If the problem persists, contact

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

orkshop.

You must sto

p

as soon as it is sa

f

e

t

o

do

so

.

The temperature o

f

the

C

VT

transmission fluid is too hi

g

h.

S

top the vehicle and contact a

C

ITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

orkshop.

Th

e

d

riv

e

r h

as

n

o

t f

as

t

e

n

ed

o

r h

as

u

n

fas

t

e

n

ed

th

e

ir

sea

t

be

lt.

Fasten

y

our seat belt. There is a continuous audible si

g

nal

i

f

y

ou drive without

f

astenin

g

y

our

sea

t

bel

t.

Mal

f

unction o

f

the

f

uel system. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

38

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

You have moved off with the parkin

g

brake not full

y

released.

Release the parkin

g

brake.

The oil pressure is too low or there

is a

f

ault with the en

g

ine lubrication

s

y

stem.

Stop the vehicle and contact a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

op.

Battery charge

f

ault.

S

to

p

the vehicle and contact a

C

ITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Airba

g

or pretensioner fault.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop to have the

sy

stems c

h

ec

k

e

d

.

F

au

l

t w

i

t

h

automat

i

c

h

ea

dl

amp

adj

ustment s

y

stem.

Co

nt

ac

t

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

O

nl

y

on vehicles

f

itted with xenon

h

ea

dl

am

p

s.

Fault with the stabilit

y

control

s

y

stem

(

ASC

)

.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

F

au

lt with th

e

fou

r wh

ee

l

d

riv

e

transm

i

ss

i

on s

y

stem.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop.

1

39

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

Fault with the CVT

g

earbox. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

The temperature of the four wheel

d

r

i

ve transm

i

ss

i

on s

y

stem

i

s too

high

.

Stop the vehicle and contact a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

w

or

k

s

h

op.

The vehicle chan

g

es automaticall

y

to two wheel drive

(

2WD

)

.

Th

e

fue

l l

e

v

e

l i

s

l

o

w. Re

f

uel as soon as

p

ossible.

The low level o

f

the

p

article

e

mi

ss

i

o

n

s

f

ilt

e

r

add

itiv

e

r

ese

rv

o

ir

has

bee

n r

eac

h

ed

.

H

ave t

h

e reservo

i

r to

pp

e

d

u

p

as

soon as possible by a CITROËN

dealer or a quali

f

ied workshop.

O

nl

y

f

or the 1.6 litre HDi en

g

ine.

+

Start of saturation of the particle

e

mi

ss

i

o

n

s

filt

e

r.

As soon as the drivin

g

conditions

allow, re

g

enerate the filter b

y

drivin

g

at a speed of at least 25 mph

(

40 km

/

h

)

f

or around 20 minutes

(

with

the 1.6 litre HDi en

g

ine the minimum

speed is 36 mph

(

60 km

/

h

))

.

If the messa

g

e remains on, contact

a CITROËN or a qualified workshop.

The particle emissions filter is fault

y

. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop as soon as

possible.

40

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 Caus

e

Solution - Action Observations

En

g

ine oil level not correct

(

below

m

inim

u

m l

e

v

e

l

o

r

abo

v

e

m

a

xim

u

m

l

evel

)

.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe

t

o

do

so

.

Check the level with the dipstick and

top-up if the level low.

I

f

th

e

l

e

v

e

l i

s

abo

v

e

th

e

m

a

xim

u

m

mar

k

,

d

o not restart t

h

e en

gi

ne an

d

co

nt

ac

t

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

Never drive with an incorrect oil

l

evel

.

Pr

ese

n

ce

of

w

a

t

e

r in th

e

Di

ese

l

fue

l

f

ilt

e

r.

Risk o

f

dama

g

e to the in

j

ection

sy

stem on

Di

ese

l

en

gi

nes.

Co

nt

ac

t

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

as soon as

p

ossible.

The ambient temperature is at or

below 3 °C

(

37 °F

)

.

There ma

y

be black ice on the road.

Take care and drive

g

entl

y

.

The clutch pedal is not depressed

while startin

g

the en

g

ine.

Depress the clutch pedal to start the

e

n

g

ine.

F

o

r v

e

hi

c

l

es

fitt

ed

with

a

m

a

n

ua

l

g

earbox.

Th

e

g

ear

l

ever

i

s not

i

n pos

i

t

i

on

P

or

p

os

i

t

i

on

N

w

h

en start

i

n

g

t

h

e en

gi

ne.

Pl

ace t

h

e

g

ear

l

ever at pos

i

t

i

on

P

t

o

s

tart t

h

e en

gi

ne.

For vehicles

f

itted with a

C

VT

g

ear

b

ox.

The brake

p

edal is not

p

ressed

while startin

g

the en

g

ine.

Press the brake

p

edal to start the

e

n

g

ine.

1

41

Monitoring

Screen

1

Screen 2 S

y

ste

m

Observations

Information messa

g

es

(

i

g

nition at "ON"

)

2

WD two wheel drive

syste

m

Flashes

f

or a

f

ew moments when the "2WD"

(

2 wheel drive

)

mode is selected usin

g

the transmission mode selector,

f

or 4 wheel drive versions.

4

WD four wheel drive

s

y

ste

m

Flashes for a few moments when the "4WD"

(

4 wheel drive

)

mode is selected usin

g

the transmission mode selector, for 4 wheel drive versions.

4

WD LOCK four wheel

d

r

i

ve s

y

stem

Flashes

f

or a

f

ew moments when the "L

OC

K"

(

4 wheel drive

)

mode is selected usin

g

the transmission mode selector,

f

or 4 wheel drive versions.

A

ct

i

ve sta

bili

t

y

contro

l

(

ASC

)

Flashes when the stabilit

y

control s

y

stem

(

A

SC)

is operatin

g

.

42

Monitoring

Screen 2 S

y

ste

m

Caus

e

Observations Solution - Action

Prevention messa

g

es

Service indicator In

fo

rm

s

th

e

d

riv

e

r th

a

t th

e

ne

xt

se

rv

ice

is

o

v

e

r

due

.

This is displa

y

ed

f

or a

f

ew

s

econ

d

s w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s

w

i

t

ched

o

n.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer

or a quali

f

ied workshop.

R

est rem

i

n

d

e

r

In

f

orms the driver that the

y

should sto

p

to take a break.

Thi

s

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

w

h

en t

h

e

driving time that you set

previousl

y

is reached.

A

n audible si

g

nal sounds

3

times and then ever

y

5

minutes until the vehicle

s

tops.

You

a

r

e

ad

v

ised

t

o

t

ake

a

break approximately every

tw

o

h

ou

r

s

.

1

43

Monitoring

Trip computer

I

NFO

button displa

y

s the followin

g

screens in

success

i

o

n:

-

di

stance recor

d

er an

d

tr

i

p recor

d

er

A

,

-

di

stance recor

d

er an

d

tr

i

p recor

d

er

B

,

- serv

i

ce

i

n

di

cator,

- coolant tem

p

erature,

-

range

,

- avera

g

e fuel consumption,

- avera

g

e speed,

- current fuel consumption,

- settin

g

menu,

- an

y

a

l

ert messa

g

es.

Information displa

y

D

istance recorder

S

y

stem for measurin

g

the total distance

travelled b

y

the vehicle durin

g

its life.

Th

e

t

o

t

a

l

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

i

s

displa

y

ed in the lower part o

f

t

he

sc

r

ee

n.

T

ri

p

distance recorde

r

(

Trip A or B

)

Reset to zero

With the ignition on and either trip

A

or

B

displa

y

ed, press the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

2 seconds.

O

nl

y

the trip displa

y

ed will be reset.

Each of these trip recorders

i

n

d

i

ca

t

es

th

e

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

tr

a

v

e

ll

ed

s

in

ce

th

e

l

as

t r

ese

t.

Pr

ess

th

e

INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

di

sp

l

a

y

t

h

e

d

es

i

re

d

tr

i

p.

44

Monitoring

Service indicator

Sy

stem which in

f

orms the driver when the

ne

xt

se

rvi

ce

i

s

due

in

acco

r

da

n

ce

with th

e

m

anu

f

acturer's servicin

g

schedule.

The point at which the next service is due is

ca

l

cu

l

a

t

ed

fr

o

m th

e

l

as

t

se

rvi

ce

in

d

i

ca

t

o

r z

e

r

o

reset

.

It is determined b

y

two parameters:

- the distance travelled

(

in miles

(

km

))

,

- t

h

e t

i

me e

l

apse

d

s

i

nce t

h

e

l

ast serv

i

c

e

(

in months

)

.

The distance remaining to be travelled may be

wei

g

hted b

y

the time

f

actor, dependin

g

on the

use

m

ade

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Exam

p

le

:

the screen indicates that 7

3

00 miles

(

kilometres

)

remain before the next service is

due

.

Service overdue

E

xam

p

le

:

th

e

sc

r

ee

n in

d

i

ca

t

es

th

a

t th

e

se

rvi

ce

i

s over

d

ue.

Thi

s serv

i

ce must

b

e carr

i

e

d

out

by

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop.

Operation

Th

e s

y

m

b

o

l

"--

"

rema

i

ns

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

unt

il

th

e

f

ir

s

t

se

rvi

ce

of

a

n

e

w v

e

hi

c

l

e

h

as

bee

n

ca

rr

ied

ou

t.

Each time the i

g

nition is switched on, the

"

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE REQUIRED"

sy

mbol is displa

y

ed

f

or a

f

ew seconds to

i

n

dica

t

e

t

ha

t t

he

se

rv

ice

m

us

t

be

ca

rr

ied

ou

t

without dela

y

.

When the i

g

nition is switched on,

y

ou must press

th

e

INFO

bu

tt

o

n

se

v

e

r

a

l tim

es

in

success

i

o

n

u

ntil the service indicator is displa

y

ed. The

distance recorder displa

y

line indicates the

number of miles or kilometres remainin

g

and

the time elapsed line indicates the number o

f

months remainin

g

be

f

ore the next service is due.

1

45

Monitoring

Resettin

g

the service indicato

r

t

o zero

A

f

t

e

r

a

ce

rt

a

in

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

a

n

d

a

ce

rt

a

in

time, the displa

y

o

f

"---

"

i

s

r

ese

t

a

utomaticall

y

and the displa

y

indicates

the time remainin

g

before the next

se

rvi

ce

i

s

due

.

Your CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop

c

arries out this o

p

eration a

f

ter each service.

I

f

you have carried out your vehicle's service

y

oursel

f

, the zero reset procedure is the

followin

g

:

)

switch off the i

g

nition,

)

press the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

se

v

e

r

a

l tim

es

in

success

i

o

n

u

ntil th

e

se

rvi

ce

in

d

i

ca

t

o

r i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

,

)

press an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

seco

n

ds

u

nt

il

t

he

spanner flashe

s

,

)

p

ress the INF

O

button while the s

p

anne

r

is

f

lashin

g

to chan

g

e the displa

y

"

---

"

t

o

"

CLEAR" then the time remainin

g

before

the next service is due is displa

y

ed.

46

Monitoring

When the en

g

ine is

runnin

g

, this indicates the

temperature of the coolant.

Ran

g

e

When the en

g

ine is

r

unnin

g

, this indicates

th

e

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

whi

c

h

ca

n

s

till

be

tr

a

v

e

ll

ed

with th

e

f

uel remainin

g

in the tank

b

ase

d

on t

h

e avera

g

e

f

uel consum

p

tion over the

last

f

ew miles

/

kilometres

tr

a

v

e

ll

ed

.

This value ma

y

var

y

followin

g

a chan

g

e

in the st

y

le of drivin

g

or the relief,

resu

l

t

i

n

g

i

n a

l

ar

g

e var

i

at

i

on

i

n t

h

e

c

urrent

f

uel consumption.

I

f

y

ou onl

y

add a

f

ew litres, the value

displayed will be incorrect. There

f

ore,

y

ou must

f

ill the tank whenever

possible.

C

oolant tem

p

erature

g

au

g

e

I

f

th

e

ba

r i

s

c

l

ose

t

o

th

e

c

r

i

t

i

ca

l

pos

i

t

i

on

l

ocate

d

on t

h

e r

igh

t, t

h

e temperature

i

s too

high

.

The symbol

f

lashes when your engine is

overheatin

g

.

Y

ou must stop your vehicle as soon as it is

safe to do so

.

Wait a few minutes before switchin

g

off the

e

n

g

ine

.

When the ran

g

e is less than

3

0 miles

(

50 km

)

,

dashes are displa

y

ed.

Refuel as soon as possible. The displa

y

of the

r

an

g

e is updated.

Wait

f

or the en

g

ine to cool be

f

ore

toppin

g

up the level. The coolin

g

s

y

stem

is pressurised.

To avoid an

y

risk of scaldin

g

, unscrew

the cap b

y

two turns to allow the

p

ressure to

d

rop.

Wh

en t

h

e pressure

h

as

d

roppe

d

,

remove t

h

e ca

p

an

d

to

p

u

p

t

h

e

l

eve

l

,

i

f

necessary.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

Wh

en

y

ou

di

sconnect t

h

e

b

atter

y

,

the previous

f

uel consumption data

i

s

l

ost an

d

t

h

e va

l

ue

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

w

ill

b

e

di

ff

erent

f

rom that displayed be

f

ore the

batter

y

was disconnected. The distance

displa

y

ed must be considered an

approximate indication.

1

47

Monitoring

Avera

g

e fuel consumption

(

l/100 km or km/l or mp

g)

This is the avera

g

e

f

uel

c

onsum

p

t

i

on ca

l

cu

l

ate

d

s

ince the tri

p

com

p

uter was

l

as

t r

ese

t.

A

vera

g

e spee

d

(

km

/

h or mph

)

This is the avera

g

e speed

c

alculated since the trip

c

omputer was last reset.

Current fuel consum

p

tion

(

l/100 km or km/l or mp

g)

This is the avera

g

e fuel

c

onsumpt

i

on ca

l

cu

l

ate

d

over

th

e

l

as

t

fe

w

seco

n

ds

.

This value ma

y

chan

g

e

f

ollowin

g

a

c

han

g

e in the st

y

le o

f

drivin

g

or the relie

f

.

If dashes "---" are displa

y

ed for lon

g

periods in place of the di

g

its while

drivin

g

, contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop.

Resettin

g

the information to zero

When the required information is displa

y

ed,

p

ress t

h

e

I

NFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

tw

o

seco

n

ds

t

o

r

ese

t

a

ll

of

th

e

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n t

o

zero

.

When the ignition is switched on, the zero reset

switches automaticall

y

f

rom manual mode to

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

.

A

utomatic

If the i

g

nition ke

y

remains in the

O

FF position

for more than 4 hours, the information is reset

to zero automaticall

y

.

48

Monitoring

The various menus ma

y

chan

g

e between

the t

y

pe 1 instrument panel and the t

y

pe 2

instrument panel.

A

d

j

ustin

g

vehicle settin

g

s

When the vehicle is

stationary

, it allows the

y

user to chan

g

e the followin

g

s

ettin

g

s:

- th

e

r

e

initi

a

li

sa

ti

o

n

m

ode for avera

g

e

f

uel consumption and

a

vera

g

e spee

d

,

)

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

th

e

INFO

bu

tt

o

n f

o

r

a

f

e

w

s

econds to displa

y

the menu screen.

)

In the menu screen, press the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

t

o

se

l

ec

t

a

f

u

n

c

ti

o

n fr

o

m th

e

li

s

t:

- the

f

uel consum

p

tion units,

- the temperature displa

y

unit,

- the displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e,

- activation

/

deactivation of the sound when

p

ressin

g

the INFO button

,

- the break

(

rest

)

reminder displa

y

interval,

- restore the

f

actor

y

settin

g

s.

T

o c

h

an

g

e t

h

e sett

i

n

g

s,

y

ou must stop

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e an

d

sw

i

tc

h

on t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on.

Apply the parking brake and place the

g

ear lever in neutral.

Wi

t

h

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on on ,

p

ress t

h

e INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

on the dashboard, to the le

f

t o

f

the instrument

p

anel, several times in succession until the

"SETTINGS MENU" screen is displa

y

ed.

O

p

eration

MENU

1

/3

:

-

1

- 2, A - M, A -

P

*

(

choice o

f

the t

y

pe o

f

r

eset o

f

average

f

uel consumption and

a

vera

g

e speed

)

,

-

A

VG UNI

T

(

choice of the fuel consumption

units

)

,

-

c

h

o

i

ce

o

f th

e

temperature displa

y

uni

t

,

-

L

ANGUAG

E

(

option of the displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e

)

,

* Accordin

g

to displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e.

For your sa

f

ety, when the vehicle is

m

ovin

g

, the

f

unction settin

g

s are not

displa

y

ed when

y

ou press the

I

NFO

bu

tt

o

n.

1

49

Monitoring

MEN

U

2/3

:

-

a/b

(

option o

f

displa

y

in

g

a di

ff

erent

l

an

g

ua

g

e

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen

a

nd the navi

g

ation screen

)

,

-

a

ctivation / deactivation of the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n sound ,

-

A

LERT

(

chan

g

in

g

of the "REST

R

EMINDER" displa

y

interval

)

,

-

selection of the sound

o

f th

e

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

indicators

,

-

a

ctivation / deactivation of the current

f

uel consumption

,

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

th

e

INFO

bu

tt

o

n f

o

r

a

f

ew seconds to return to the previous

sc

r

ee

n.

Wh

en t

h

e menu screen

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

,

i

f

no operation is carried out within

15 seconds, the

S

ettin

g

s Menu screen

is displayed.

MENU 3

/

3

:

-

R

E

S

ET

(

restore

f

actor

y

settin

g

s

)

.

Choice of the reset mode for

a

vera

g

e fuel consumption and

a

vera

g

e spee

d

You can choose between two avera

g

e fuel

c

onsumption and avera

g

e speed reset modes:

- automatic reset

,

- m

a

n

ual

r

ese

t.

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t:

)

p

ress an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

seco

n

ds

t

o

s

wit

c

h in

success

i

o

n

f

r

o

m

rese

t m

ode

1

-

A

(

automatic

)

*

t

o

r

ese

t

m

ode

2 - M - P (manual) *

.

Th

e

m

ode

se

l

ec

t

ed

i

s

co

nfirm

ed

.

Choice of the fuel consum

p

tion

u

n

i

t

The distance, speed and quantit

y

of fuel units

will also be chan

g

ed in accordance with

y

our

c

hoice of fuel consumption unit.

In th

e

m

e

n

us

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press t

h

e INF

O

bu

tt

o

n t

o

selec

t

"UNIT"

.

)

p

ress and hold the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

f

ew seconds to displa

y

the

"

AVG UNIT"

screen

.

* Accordin

g

to displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e.

50

Monitoring

If the batter

y

is disconnected, the

s

ettin

g

s memor

y

is cleared and

the default unit

(

km/L

)

is restored

automat

i

ca

lly

.

I

f

the batter

y

is disconnected, the

sett

i

n

g

s memor

y

i

s c

l

eare

d

an

d

the de

f

ault unit

(°C)

is restored

a

utomatically.

)

press t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

sc

r

oll

t

he

u

n

i

t

s

(

km

/

L, L

/

100km, mp

g

(

U

S)

, mp

g

(

UK

)

and

RETURN

)

in succession,

)

p

ress and hold the

I

NFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

seconds to con

f

irm

y

our selection.

Choice of the tem

p

erature

di

sp

l

a

y

un

i

t

)

p

ress an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

s

econds to scroll the units

(°C

and

°

F

)

in

success

i

o

n.

Th

e

m

ode

se

l

ec

t

ed

i

s

co

nfirm

ed

.

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t th

e

temperature un

i

t sett

i

n

g

s

y

m

b

o

l

(

thermometer

)

:

Choice of the displa

y

LANGUAGE

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t

"

LANGUAGE"

:

)

p

ress and hold the INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

s

econds to displa

y

the "LANGUAGE"

screen

:

1

51

Monitoring

If

y

ou select the "---" settin

g

, no

messa

g

e will be displa

y

ed in messa

g

e

displa

y

situations.

If the batter

y

is disconnected, the

s

ettin

g

s memor

y

is cleared and the

default lan

g

ua

g

e

(

ENGLISH

)

is restored

automaticall

y

.

)

press the INF

O

bu

tt

o

n t

o

sc

r

o

ll th

e

lan

g

ua

g

es

(

Japonais, En

g

lish, Deutsch,

Français, Espanol, Italiano, Russe "---" and

R

ETURN

)

in succession,

)

press an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

s

econds to con

f

irm

y

our selection.

A

ctivation / deactivation of

l

an

g

ua

g

e cooperat

i

on

b

etween

t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

ane

l

screen an

d

the navi

g

ation screen

*

You can choose to have the lan

g

ua

g

e used b

y

the instrument panel screen linked to that of the

n

avi

g

ation screen.

In th

e

m

e

n

us

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press and hold the INF

O

f

o

r

a

f

e

w

s

econds to run throu

g

h the choices

(

A

-

1

"cooperation activated"

**

and

M

-

2

-

P

"cooperation deactivated"

**

)

.

Th

e

se

l

ec

t

ed

m

ode

i

s

co

n

f

irm

ed

.

I

f

the battery is disconnected, the

s

ettin

g

s memor

y

is cleared and

the default unit

(

A -

1

"cooperation

activated"

)

is restored automaticall

y

.

)

p

ress the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t

the s

y

mbol

f

or activation

/

deactivation of lan

g

ua

g

e

c

ooperation.

** Accordin

g

to displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e.

* Dependin

g

on equipment.

52

Monitoring

If the batter

y

is disconnected, the

s

ettin

g

s memor

y

is cleared and

the default choice

(O

N

)

is restored

automat

i

ca

lly

.

As a safet

y

measure, it is recommended

that

y

ou stop

f

or a break ever

y

tw

o

hou

r

s

.

Y

ou

ca

n

ac

tiv

a

t

e

o

r

deac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

sou

n

d

assoc

i

a

t

ed

with th

e

INFO

bu

tt

o

n.

A

ctivation / deactivation of the

"

INFO" button sound

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

p

ress the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t

th

e

INFO button sound activation

/

deactivation s

y

mbol

(

located in

m

enu 2/3

)

:

)

press and hold the

I

NFO

bu

tt

o

n f

o

r

a

f

e

w

seconds to scroll the choices

(

ON, OFF

)

in

successio

n.

Th

e

m

ode

se

l

ec

t

ed

i

s

co

n

f

irm

ed

.

Chan

g

in

g

the displa

y

interval of

the "REST REMINDER" messa

g

e

The "REST REMINDER" function allows

y

ou to

pro

g

ramme an alert messa

g

e remindin

g

y

ou to

t

a

k

e

a

b

r

ea

k.

Th

e

"

REST REMINDER" messa

g

e appears

accompanied b

y

an audible si

g

nal.

You can chan

g

e the displa

y

interval of the

"REST REMINDER" messa

g

e.

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press the INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t

"

ALARM"

(

located in menu 2/3

)

:

)

p

ress and hold the INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

s

econds to displa

y

the

"

ALARM"

screen

,

)

press t

h

e INFO

b

utton to se

l

ect t

h

e

di

sp

l

a

y

int

e

rv

a

l

of

th

e

"REST REMINDER"

message

,

)

p

ress and hold the INFO

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w

seco

n

ds

t

o

co

n

f

irm.

I

f

the batter

y

is disconnected, the

s

ettings memory is cleared and

the de

f

ault value

(O

FF

)

is restored

automaticall

y

.

1

53

Monitoring

O

n the menu screen:

)

press t

h

e INF

O

bu

tt

o

n t

o

selec

t

"

RESET"

(

located in menu 2

/

2 or 3

/

3 dependin

g

on the instrument panel

)

:

Restorin

g

factor

y

settin

g

s

(

RESET

)

You can restore all of the factor

y

settin

g

s for all

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

s

.

)

p

ress an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e INF

O

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r

a

t

l

east

5

seconds .

There is an audible signal and all o

f

the

f

actory

s

ettin

g

s are restored

f

or all

f

unctions.

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press t

h

e INFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

selec

t t

he

cu

rr

e

nt

f

uel consumption activation

/

deactivation

sy

m

b

o

l

(

located in menu 2

/

3

)

:

A

ctivation / deactivation of the

c

urrent fuel consum

p

tion *

You can activate or deactivate the displa

y

o

f

the current fuel consumption, with the t

y

pe

2

instrument panel onl

y

.

)

press and hold the INFO

bu

tt

o

n f

o

r

a

f

e

w

s

econ

d

s to scro

ll

t

h

rou

gh

t

h

e c

h

o

i

ces

i

n

s

uccession

(O

N,

O

FF

)

.

*

Dependin

g

on equipment.

In th

e

m

e

n

u

sc

r

ee

n:

)

press t

h

e

I

NFO

bu

tt

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t

sou

n

d

1

o

r 2

(

located in menu 2

/

3

)

:

Selection of the sound

for the direction indicators

Y

ou

ca

n

se

l

ec

t th

e

sou

n

d

f

o

r th

e

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

indicators, with the t

y

pe 2 instrument panel onl

y

.

54

Monitoring

AUDIO-CD system screen

A

ssociated with the audio s

y

stem, this provides

the

f

ollowin

g

in

f

ormation:

- t

h

e t

i

me,

- audio s

y

stem in

f

ormation

(

see "Audio and

Telematics"

)

.

Settin

g

the time

Selectin

g

the ad

j

ustment mode

The di

g

ital clock can be set in automatic mod

e

o

r in

m

anual mod

e

.

Se

l

ec

t

a

utomat

i

c mo

de

or

m

anua

l

mo

de

as

fo

ll

o

w

s

:

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

A

"PWR" t

o

s

wit

c

h

o

n th

e

a

udio s

y

stem.

)

Access the settin

g

mode b

y

pressin

g

bu

tt

o

n

B

"TUNE" for approximatel

y

2

seco

n

ds

.

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

B

"T

U

NE" several times to

s

cro

ll

t

h

rou

gh

t

h

e var

i

ous menus an

d

se

l

ect

t

he

CT menu

(

clock time

)

.

The order o

f

the menus is the

f

ollowin

g

:

AF / CT / REG / TP-S / PTY displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e / SCV / PH

O

NE / Functions

s

ettin

g

mode

O

FF.

M

anual mod

e

This mode permits manual settin

g

of the time

u

sin

g

the audio s

y

stem buttons.

It

ca

n

a

l

so

be

used

wh

e

n th

e

"A

u

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

"

displa

y

s an inaccurate time, when the local

R

D

S

stations are broadcastin

g

f

rom a di

ff

erent

t

i

m

e

z

o

n

e

.

Automatic mod

e

This mode permits automatic settin

g

o

f

the

l

ocal time usin

g

the si

g

nal

f

rom RD

S

stations.

Th

e s

y

m

b

o

l

"C

T" a

pp

ears

i

n t

h

e screen.

1

55

Monitoring

I

f

n

o

ac

ti

o

n i

s

ca

rri

ed

ou

t within

10 seconds, the system will exit

the "Functions settin

g

mode" menu

automaticall

y

.

)

T

u

rn

bu

tt

o

n

B

"T

U

NE" to the left or to the

r

i

g

ht to select

"

CT ON"

(

automatic mode

)

or

"

CT OFF"

(

manual mode

)

.

)

A

f

ter selectin

g

the mode,

y

ou can exit the

"F

unct

i

ons sett

i

n

g

mo

d

e

"

menu

by

press

i

n

g

bu

tt

o

n

B

"TUNE"

f

or approximately

2

seco

n

ds

.

Th

e

digi

ta

l

c

l

oc

k

d

oes not

di

sp

l

a

y

seco

n

ds

.

When the "minutes" displa

y

is set or

reset to zero, the clock starts at the zero

seco

n

d

o

f th

e

min

u

t

e

se

l

ec

t

ed

.

The time settin

g

is lost if the batter

y

is

d

i

sco

nn

ec

t

ed

.

Manual ad

j

ustment

)

With the ignition on or in the A

CC

(

Accessories

)

position, press and hold

th

e

CLOCK button until the time displa

y

fl

as

h

es

.

)

Press the appropriate button to set the

tim

e

:

B

utton

H:

t

o

se

t t

he

hou

r

s

Th

e

h

ours

digi

ts scro

ll

w

h

en

y

ou press t

hi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

Button M: t

o

se

t th

e

min

u

t

es

The minutes di

g

its scroll when

y

ou press this

bu

tt

o

n.

Button 00

:

t

o

r

ese

t th

e

min

u

t

es

t

o

z

e

r

o

.

- fr

o

m

1

to 29 min: r

ou

n

ded

do

wn t

o

th

e

p

revious hour,

-

f

r

o

m 30 to 59 min

:

roun

d

e

d

up to t

h

e next

hou

r.

)

A

f

ter settin

g

the time, press the

D

I

SP

button; the time display stops

f

lashing.

S

et the time usin

g

the buttons as indicated

belo

w:

56

Monitoring

AUDIO-TELEMATIC system screen

I

f

y

our vehicle is

f

itted with the navi

g

ation s

y

stem,

y

ou have this colour touch screen.

General o

p

eration

Use the buttons on either side o

f

the screen,

or touc

h

t

h

e v

i

rtua

l

b

uttons appear

i

n

g

i

n t

h

e

s

creen to operate the system.

Uses

a

sof

t

c

l

ea

n

c

l

o

th t

o

c

l

ea

n th

e

screen

.

Do not use pointed ob

j

ects on the touch

screen

.

D

o

n

o

t t

ouc

h th

e

sc

r

ee

n with w

e

t h

a

n

ds

.

For reasons of safet

y

, the driver

should onl

y

carr

y

out operations

t

hat re

q

uire close attention, with the

v

ehicle stationar

y.

In addition

,

some functions are not

access

ibl

e w

h

en

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

.

1.

M

ODE :

access

t

o

th

e

"A

ud

i

o

-vi

deo

" m

e

n

u

.

2.

A

UDIO :

se

l

ec

ti

o

n

o

f th

e

A

ud

i

o

-vi

deo

o

r

Navi

g

ation displa

y

.

3.

V

OL : volume ad

j

ustment.

4.

PWR

: on

/

o

ff

.

5

.

SET

: access to the "Settings" menu.

T

6

.

O

PEN: access to the

C

D

/

DVD pla

y

er.

7

.

INFO:

access

t

o

th

e

"In

fo

" m

e

n

u

.

8.

NAVI : displa

y

the map with the location o

f

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

9.

SCALE : map scale.

1

0

.

M

EN

U

: access to the "Navi

g

ation-

g

uidance" menu.

11.

ENT

: scroll through a list or select an item.

T

For more in

f

ormation on these menus,

r

e

f

e

r t

o

th

e

"A

ud

i

o

a

n

d

t

e

l

e

m

a

ti

cs

"

sec

ti

o

n.

1

57

Monitoring

S

y

stem screen

O

nce in the "Settin

g

s" menu, select "S

y

stem" to

m

odif

y

the time zone, the units, or the displa

y

lan

g

ua

g

e

(

En

g

lish, Dutch, Swedish, French,

Portu

g

uese, Italian, German, Spanish or

Danish

)

and ad

j

ust other settin

g

s.

E

q

ui

p

ment screen

O

nce in the "

S

ettings" menu, select

"Equipment" to activate or deactivate certain

drivin

g

and comfort s

y

stems, or to ad

j

ust

s

ettin

g

s.

"Settin

g

s" menu

O

n the control

p

anel,

p

ress the

S

ET

bu

tt

o

n t

o

p

en the menu.

R

emot

e

c

ontro

l

:

- o

p

eration o

f

the direction indicators when

l

ocking and unlocking the vehicle.

K

e

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

s

y

ste

m

:

- o

p

eration o

f

the direction indicators when

l

ocking and unlocking the vehicle,

- operation o

f

the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

sy

stem

(

onl

y

for unlockin

g

, onl

y

for startin

g

,

or both

)

.

Wi

p

ers:

- intermittent operation of the windscreen

wipers,

- operation of the front screenwash

associated with the wipers,

- ad

j

ust the

f

requenc

y

o

f

rear wiper

operat

i

on,

- continuous o

p

eration o

f

the rear wi

p

er,

- wiper linked to reverse gear.

Interior

/

exterior li

g

htin

g

:

- sensitivit

y

o

f

the sensor

f

or automatic

illumination o

f

headlam

p

s,

- guide-me-home lighting

(

activation

/

deactivation

)

,

- welcome li

g

htin

g

(

activation/deactivation

)

,

E

lectric windows :

- operatin

g

period after switchin

g

off the

i

g

nition.

Di

rect

i

on

i

n

di

cator

s

:

- motorwa

y

f

unction.

Central lockin

g

:

- selective unlockin

g

.

- automatic door unlockin

g

,

- timin

g

of the automatic re-lockin

g

of the

vehicle a

f

ter unlockin

g

,

- deadlockin

g

(

activation

/

deactivation

)

.

Other

s

:

- automatic

f

olding o

f

the door mirrors,

- automatic cut o

f

power suppl

y

to

accesso

ri

es

.

- alarm

(

ad

j

ustment of sensor sensitivit

y

,

activation/deactivation

)

.

- operatin

g

period

f

or courtes

y

lamps a

f

ter

cl

os

i

n

g

a

d

oor,

- automatic headlamp dipping

(

activation

/

deactivation

)

,

- timin

g

before automatic courtes

y

lamps

g

o off,

- automatic li

g

htin

g

linked to the wipers.

58

Monitoring

Th

e

digi

ta

l

c

l

oc

k

i

s set

automatically

.

y

Thi

s mo

d

e ena

bl

es t

h

e s

y

stem to set t

h

e

l

oca

l

time automaticall

y

usin

g

the si

g

nal

f

rom the

R

D

S

stations.

)

O

n the control panel, press button

A

(

SET

)

t

o

access

th

e

"

Settin

g

s"

menu

.

)

O

n the touch screen,

p

ress button

B

t

o

access

th

e

"

S

y

stem"

menu

.

The s

y

stem settin

g

s screen is displa

y

ed.

Y

ou

m

us

t

deac

tiv

a

t

e

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

ad

j

ustment

(

RD

S

Auto

C

orrect

)

to

c

han

g

e the time zone and summer time

s

ettin

g

s.

O

n each screen,

y

ou can return to the

previous screen b

y

pressin

g

button

D

"B

ac

k"

.

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

C

t

o

access

th

e

"

Time"

m

e

n

u

.

1.

R

DS Auto Correct

:

Activate

/

deactivate automatic ad

j

ustment.

2.

G

MT / GMT+1 / GMT+2

Se

l

ec

t th

e

tim

e

z

o

n

e

.

3.

S

ummer Time

:

S

ummer time

O

n

/

Off

.

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

D

t

o

co

nfirm

a

n

d

r

e

t

u

rn t

o

th

e

p

revious menu.

O

nce this menu has been selected,

y

ou can

access the

f

ollowin

g

f

unctions:

1

59

Monitoring

Lighting dimmer

Sy

stem

f

or manual ad

j

ustment o

f

the bri

g

htness

of

th

e

in

s

tr

u

m

e

nt

s

a

n

d

co

ntr

o

l

s

in r

e

l

a

ti

o

n t

o

th

e

xterior brightness.

There is an audible si

g

nal and the

intensit

y

of the li

g

htin

g

increases each

t

i

me t

h

e

b

utton

i

s presse

d

.

With the li

g

htin

g

on or off, press the button

to chan

g

e the intensit

y

of the li

g

htin

g

of the

i

nstruments an

d

contro

l

s

i

n

"d

a

y"

or

"

n

igh

t

"

mode

.

Wh

en t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

reac

h

es t

h

e max

i

mum

setting, press again to change to the minimum

settin

g

.

When the li

g

htin

g

reaches the required

i

ntensit

y

, release the button.

With the vehicle's li

g

htin

g

o

ff

, onl

y

the

bri

g

htness o

f

the instrument panel is modi

f

ied.

Th

e sett

i

n

g

i

s save

d

w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s

t

u

rn

ed

t

o

O

FF.

Wit the vehicle's li

g

htin

g

on, the bri

g

htness o

f

the entire dashboard

(

instrument panel, screen,

air conditionin

g

control panel...

)

is modi

f

ied.

60

Access

S

y

stem which permits central unlockin

g

or lockin

g

of the vehicle usin

g

the door lock or remotel

y

. It is also used for the

g

uide-me-home li

g

htin

g

and

s

tartin

g

the en

g

ine, as well as providin

g

protection a

g

ainst theft.

Remote control key

Unfoldin

g

the ke

y

)

First press this button to unfold the ke

y

.

Unlockin

g

the vehicle

Complete unlockin

g

usin

g

the

r

emote control

)

Press the open padlock to unlock

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Unlockin

g

usin

g

the ke

y

Unlockin

g

is con

f

irmed b

y

the interio

r

lighting which comes on

f

or around

1

5 seconds and the direction indicators

whi

c

h fl

as

h

t

wic

e

.

Accordin

g

to version, the door mirrors

u

nf

o

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

)

Turn the ke

y

to the front in the driver's door

l

oc

k t

o

u

nl

oc

k it.

61

2

Access

The complete or selective unlockin

g

parameter is set via the colour

s

creen "Equipment" menu.

C

omplete unlockin

g

is activated b

y

defau

lt.

Selective unlockin

g

usin

g

the

remote control

Selective unlockin

g

is onl

y

available on

versions not

f

itted with deadlockin

g

.

S

elective unlockin

g

is not available

us

i

n

g

t

h

e

k

e

y

.

)

Press the open padlock once to unlock the

driver's door onl

y

.

)

Press the open padlock a

g

ain to unlock the

o

t

he

r

doo

r

s

a

n

d

t

he

boo

t.

Unlockin

g

is confirmed b

y

illumination

o

f

the interior li

g

htin

g

f

or about

15 seconds and the direction indicators,

whi

c

h

f

l

as

h tw

i

c

e

.

According to version, the door mirrors

u

n

fo

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

as

th

e

f

ir

s

t

unlockin

g

action.

62

Access

L

ockin

g

the vehicle

)

Turn the ke

y

to the rear in the driver's door

lock

t

o

lock

i

t.

Normal lockin

g

usin

g

the remote

c

ontrol

)

Press the closed padlock to lock

the vehicle completel

y

.

I

f

o

n

e

of

th

e

doo

r

s

o

r th

e

boo

t i

s

till

open, the central lockin

g

does not take

p

lace.

When the vehicle is locked, if it is

u

nlocked inadvertentl

y

, it will re-lock

a

utomaticall

y

a

f

ter a certain time

(

which can be set in the colour screen

"

Equipment" menu

)

, except i

f

a door is

open

.

Normal lockin

g

usin

g

the ke

y

The

f

oldin

g

and un

f

oldin

g

o

f

the door

mi

rrors us

i

n

g

t

h

e remote contro

l

can

b

e

set

i

n t

h

e co

l

our screen

"Eq

u

ip

ment

"

menu

.

Lockin

g

is con

f

irmed b

y

the direction

i

n

d

i

ca

t

o

r

s

whi

c

h

f

l

as

h

once

.

Accordin

g

to version, the door mirrors

f

o

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

63

2

Access

If

y

ou do not press the button when

f

oldin

g

the ke

y

, there is a risk o

f

dama

g

e

t

o

t

he

m

echa

n

is

m.

D

eadlockin

g

usin

g

the remote

c

ontrol

)

Press the closed padlock to lock

the vehicle completel

y

.

)

Press the closed padlock a

g

ain within

f

ive

seco

n

ds

t

o

deadlock

t

he

v

ehicle

.

Foldin

g

the ke

y

)

First press this button to

f

old the ke

y

.

Deadlockin

g

renders the exterior and

interior door controls inoperative.

It

a

l

so

deac

tiv

a

t

es

th

e

m

a

n

ua

l

ce

ntr

a

l

co

ntr

o

l

bu

tt

o

n.

Therefore,

y

ou should never leave

an

y

one

i

ns

id

e t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e w

h

en

i

t

i

s

deadlocked

.

Deadlockin

g

is con

f

irmed b

y

the

direction indicators, which

f

lash three

t

imes.

A

ccordin

g

to version, the door mirrors

fo

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

64

Access

"Keyless Entry and Starting" system

Selective unlockin

g

Thi

s sett

i

n

g

i

s

d

one v

i

a t

h

e

"E

qu

i

pment

"

menu

of

th

e

co

l

ou

r

sc

r

ee

n.

B

y

de

f

ault, complete unlockin

g

is activated.

Sy

stem that allows the lockin

g

, unlockin

g

a

nd startin

g

o

f

the vehicle while keepin

g

the

el

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

on

y

our person.

It can also be used as a remote control; see the

"R

e

m

o

t

e

co

ntr

o

l"

sec

ti

o

n.

Unlockin

g

the vehicle

Complete unlockin

g

)

Wi

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

on

y

our person an

d

in

o

n

e

of

th

e

def

in

ed

z

o

n

es

A

,

press

one

of

th

e

bu

tt

o

n

s

B

or

C

to un

l

oc

k

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e,

then

p

ull on the handle to o

p

en the door.

Your passen

g

ers can also open their doors,

as soon as the electronic ke

y

is in one o

f

th

e

de

fin

ed

z

o

n

es

.

Unlockin

g

is confirmed b

y

an audible

s

i

g

nal and the direction indicators which

f

l

as

h tw

i

c

e

.

Th

e

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

u

n

fo

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

t

i

m

e

.

S

elective unlocking is only available on

versions not

f

itted with deadlockin

g

.

)

Wi

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

on

y

our person,

p

ress

b

utton

B

once to un

l

oc

k

on

ly

t

h

e

d

r

i

ver

'

s

d

oor, t

h

en

p

u

ll

on t

h

e

d

oor

h

an

dl

e

to o

p

en.

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n B a

g

ain to unlock the vehicle

c

ompletel

y

.

For securit

y

, the detection zones in

w

hi

c

h

t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

i

s operat

i

ona

l

h

a

v

e

a

r

ad

i

us

of

abou

t 7

0

c

m

a

r

ou

n

d

e

ac

h

open

i

n

g

b

utton.

65

2

Access

L

ockin

g

the vehicle

Loc

ki

n

g

)

With the ke

y

in one o

f

the de

f

ined zones

A

,

p

ress one o

f

the buttons

B

or

C

.

D

ea

dl

oc

ki

n

g

)

With the electronic ke

y

in one o

f

the

def

in

ed

z

o

n

es

A

, press

b

utton

B

or

C

t

o

lock

t

he

v

ehicle

.

)

Within

f

ive seconds,

p

ress button B

or

C

a

g

ain to deadlock the vehicle.

Al

wa

y

s ensure t

h

at

y

ou

h

ave t

h

e

lectronic key on your person

be

f

ore lockin

g

the vehicle: in some

c

ircumstances, it is possible to lock

the vehicle without the presence of the

e

lectronic ke

y

havin

g

been detected

in

s

i

de

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Locking is con

f

irmed by an audible

s

i

g

nal and the direction indicators,

whi

c

h fl

as

h

once

.

Th

e

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

f

o

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

Lockin

g

is confirmed b

y

two audible

s

i

g

nals and b

y

the direction indicators

whi

c

h fl

as

h

t

hree time

s

.

Th

e

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

u

nf

o

l

d

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

t

i

m

e

.

The operatin

g

mode must be "

O

FF".

W

ith Stop & Start, if the en

g

ine is in

S

top mode, the vehicle cannot be

locked

.

66

Access

Switchin

g

on the li

g

htin

g

remote

ly

This only operates with the

ignition off

a

n

d

th

e

f

l

i

g

htin

g

control in the "OFF"

o

r "AUTO " position.

Remote operation of the li

g

htin

g

will be

s

wit

c

h

ed

off

:

- on sw

i

tc

hi

n

g

on t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on,

- i

f

the li

g

htin

g

control is not in the " OFF

"

o

r

"AUTO "

p

osition,

- when activatin

g

manual

g

uide-me-home

li

g

htin

g

.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n t

o

s

wit

c

h

o

n

the li

g

htin

g

remotel

y

(

illumination

of the sidelamps and dipped

b

eam headlamps

)

for a period o

f

30

seconds.

A

second press switches o

ff

the

ligh

t

i

n

g

.

D

ea

dl

oc

ki

n

g

ren

d

ers t

h

e exter

i

or an

d

interior door controls ino

p

erative.

It

a

l

so

deac

tiv

a

t

es

th

e

m

a

n

ua

l

ce

ntr

a

l

co

ntr

o

l

bu

tt

o

n.

Therefore, never leave an

y

one inside

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

wh

e

n it i

s

dead

l

oc

k

ed

.

The means b

y

which lockin

g

/unlockin

g

the vehicle and automatic

f

oldin

g/

un

f

oldin

g

o

f

the mirrors is con

f

irmed

c

an be con

f

i

g

ured in the colour screen

"E

q

ui

p

ment" menu.

67

2

Access

Emergency procedure with the Keyless Entry and Starting

system

Unlockin

g

)

Turn the ke

y

towards the front in the

d

riv

e

r'

s

doo

r l

oc

k t

o

u

nl

oc

k th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Emer

g

enc

y

unlockin

g/

lockin

g

u

sin

g

the inte

g

ral ke

y

Th

e

i

nte

g

ra

l

k

e

y

i

s use

d

to

l

oc

k

an

d

un

l

oc

k

t

h

e

vehicle when the electronic key cannot operate:

- cell batter

y

f

lat, vehicle batter

y

dischar

g

ed

or disconnected, ...

- vehicle located in an area with stron

g

e

lectro-ma

g

netic si

g

nals.

)

P

u

ll

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

bu

tt

o

n

1

,

to extract the

i

nte

g

ra

l

k

e

y

2

.

Lockin

g

)

Turn the ke

y

towards the rear in the driver's

doo

r l

oc

k t

o

l

oc

k th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The emer

g

enc

y

ke

y

allows

y

ou to lock

o

r un

l

oc

k

t

h

e

d

r

i

ver

'

s

d

oor on

ly

.

T

o

l

oc

k

or un

l

oc

k

t

h

e ot

h

er

d

oors, use

the interior controls

(

see "Lockin

g

/

unlockin

g

f

rom inside"

)

.

68

Access

With the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

s

y

stem,

m

essage appears in the instrument panel when

r

eplacement o

f

the batter

y

is needed.

C

han

g

in

g

the batteries

D

o

n

o

t thr

o

w th

e

r

e

m

o

t

e

co

ntr

o

l

batteries awa

y

, the

y

contain metals

whi

c

h

a

r

e

h

a

rmf

u

l t

o

th

e

nvir

o

nm

e

nt.

Take them to an approved collection

point.

Remote control ke

y

Batter

y

re

f

.:

C

R1620

/

3 volts.

Electronic ke

y

Batter

y

re

f

.:

C

R2032

/

3 volt.

)

Unclip the cover usin

g

a small screwdriver at the cutout.

)

Li

f

t

off

th

e

co

v

e

r.

)

Remove the flat batter

y

from its location.

)

Fit the new batter

y

into its location observin

g

the ori

g

inal direction of fitment.

)

Clip the cover onto the casin

g

.

69

2

Access

Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's re

g

istration document and

y

our personal identification documents and if possible the ke

y

code label.

The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the ke

y

code and the transponder code required to order a new ke

y

.

Electronic ke

y

The electronic ke

y

is a sensitive s

y

stem; do not operate it while it is in

y

our pocket as there is a possibilit

y

that it ma

y

unlock the vehicle, without

y

ou bein

g

aware of it.

Do not repeatedl

y

press the buttons of

y

our electronic ke

y

out of ran

g

e and out of si

g

ht of

y

our vehicle. You run the risk of stoppin

g

it from

wor

ki

n

g

an

d

t

h

e remote contro

l

wou

ld

h

ave to

b

e re

i

n

i

t

i

a

li

se

d

.

Th

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

cannot operate as a remote contro

l

w

h

en

i

t

i

s

i

n t

h

e rea

d

er or even w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on.

Lockin

g

the vehicle

Drivin

g

with the doors locked ma

y

make access to the passen

g

er compartment b

y

the emer

g

enc

y

services more di

ff

icult in an emer

g

enc

y

.

As a safet

y

precaution

(

with children on board

)

, take the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

electronic ke

y

when

y

ou leave the vehicle, even for a short

tim

e

.

Electrical interference

The Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

electronic ke

y

ma

y

not operate i

f

close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, stron

g

m

a

g

netic

f

ields, ...

A

nti-theft

p

rotection

Do not make an

y

modi

f

ications to the electronic en

g

ine immobiliser s

y

stem; this could cause mal

f

unctions.

Don't

f

or

g

et to turn the steerin

g

to en

g

a

g

e the steerin

g

lock.

Wh

en purc

h

as

i

n

g

a secon

d

-

h

an

d

ve

hi

c

l

e

Have all of the ke

y

s in

y

our possession paired b

y

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer, to ensure that onl

y

our ke

y

s allow

y

our vehicle to be unlocked and started.

70

Access

Doors

From outside

)

A

f

ter unlocking the vehicle using the

r

emote control or the ke

y

, pull the door

ha

n

d

l

e

.

Closin

g

From inside

)

Pull the

f

ront or rear door lever to o

p

en the

doo

r.

If a door is not closed correctl

y

, this warnin

g

lamp comes on in the instrument panel screen

u

ntil th

e

doo

r

co

n

ce

rn

ed

i

s

c

l

osed

.

O

n the driver's side, this action on the door

le

v

e

r

u

nl

oc

k

s

th

e

doo

r i

f

it w

as

l

oc

k

ed

.

O

n the passen

g

er's side or

f

or the rear doors,

the door must

f

irst be unlocked manually

(

see

"

Individual controls"

)

i

f

it was locked.

71

2

Access

Boot

Openin

g

)

After unlockin

g

the vehicle, press the

ha

n

dle

A

an

d

ra

i

se t

h

e ta

ilg

ate.

)

P

u

ll th

e

h

a

n

d

l

e

B

downwards to

g

uide the

ta

ilg

ate.

)

R

e

l

ease t

h

e

h

an

dl

e an

d

press

g

ent

ly

on t

h

e

xterior sur

f

ace o

f

the tail

g

ate to close it.

Closin

g

M

anual release

Thi

s

e

n

ab

l

es

th

e

boo

t t

o

be

u

nl

oc

k

ed

in th

e

vent of a central lockin

g

fault.

- Fold back the rear seats to

g

ain access to

the tail

g

ate release from inside the boot.

- Remove the plastic cover

f

rom the

open

i

n

g

A

i

n t

h

e ta

ilg

ate

i

nter

i

or p

ill

ar.

-

Mo

v

e

t

he

co

ntr

ol

B

to t

h

e r

igh

t to un

l

oc

k

and o

p

en the boot.

If the tail

g

ate is not full

y

closed, this warnin

g

l

amp comes on in the instrument panel screen

u

ntil it i

s

c

l

osed

.

72

Access

Locking / unlocking from inside

Central lockin

g

control

Lockin

g

)

Pr

ess

th

e

f

r

o

nt

of

bu

tt

o

n

A

t

o

l

oc

k th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Unlockin

g

)

Pr

ess

th

e

r

ea

r

of

bu

tt

o

n

A

t

o

u

nl

oc

k th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Individual controls

Thi

s

co

ntr

o

l

ca

n

a

l

so

be

used

t

o

l

oc

k th

e

fr

o

nt

passen

g

er

'

s

d

oor an

d

t

h

e rear

d

oors

i

n t

h

e

vent o

f

a

f

ailure with the central lockin

g

. To

do

t

his

:

)

Op

en the door in

q

uestion.

)

Piv

o

t th

e

int

e

ri

o

r

co

ntr

o

l B t

o

w

a

r

ds

th

e

f

ront, then close the door.

Lockin

g

the front and rear doors

)

Piv

o

t th

e

int

e

ri

o

r

co

ntr

o

l

B

t

o

w

a

r

ds

th

e

f

r

o

nt.

Sy

stem which provides

f

ull manual lockin

g

or

unlockin

g

o

f

the doors and boot

f

rom the inside.

It is possible to lock the vehicle with a

passen

g

er door open, usin

g

usin

g

the

i

n

di

v

id

ua

l

oc

ki

n

g

contro

l

s: ensure t

h

at

y

ou have the ke

y

be

f

ore closin

g

the

passen

g

er

d

oor.

Unlockin

g

the front and rear

d

oors

)

Piv

o

t th

e

int

e

ri

o

r

co

ntr

o

l

B

t

o

w

a

r

ds

th

e

r

ea

r.

73

2

Access

For all work on the alarm s

y

stem,

c

ontact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

Alarm *

S

ystem which protects and provides a deterrent against the

f

t and break-ins. It provides the

f

ollowing types o

f

monitoring:

-

p

erimeter

The s

y

stem checks for an

y

openin

g

of the vehicle.

The alarm is tri

gg

ered if an

y

one tries to open a

d

oor

,

t

h

e

b

oot

,

t

h

e

b

onnet....

- volumetric

The s

y

stem checks for an

y

variation in the

volume in the passen

g

er compartment.

The alarm is tri

gg

ered if an

y

one breaks a

window, enters the passen

g

er compartment o

r

mo

v

es

i

n

side

t

he

v

ehicle

.

- tilt

The s

y

stem checks for an

y

chan

g

e in the

a

ttit

ude

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The alarm is tri

gg

ered if the vehicle is lifted,

mo

v

ed

o

r kn

oc

k

ed

.

Self-

p

rotection function

The s

y

stem checks

f

or the puttin

g

out o

f

s

ervice o

f

its com

p

onents.

The alarm is triggered i

f

the battery, the central

c

ontrol or the siren wirin

g

are put out o

f

service

or dama

g

ed.

Lockin

g

the vehicle with full

a

larm s

y

stem

A

ctivation

)

S

witch o

ff

the i

g

nition

(O

FF mode i

f

y

our

vehicle has the Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

sy

stem

)

.

)

Remove the ke

y

from the i

g

nition switch,

if

y

our vehicle does not have the "Ke

y

less

Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem.

)

L

eave t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e, an

d

c

l

ose a

ll

t

h

e

d

oors

a

n

d

t

he

bo

nn

e

t.

)

Press the locking button on the remote

co

ntr

o

l

o

r

o

n

e

of

th

e

doo

r

o

r

boo

t

bu

tt

o

n

s

if

y

our vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem.

D

eact

i

vat

i

on

Do one o

f

the the

f

ollowin

g

to deactivate the

ala

rm:

)

P

ress t

h

e un

l

oc

ki

n

g

b

utton on t

h

e remote

co

ntr

o

l

o

r

o

n

e

of

th

e

doo

r

o

r

boo

t

bu

tt

o

n

s

i

f

y

our vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem.

)

Switch on the i

g

nition

(O

N mode if

y

our

vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

)

O

pen a door or the boot while the s

y

stem is

b

e

i

n

g

act

i

vate

d

.

Th

e a

l

arm s

y

stem

i

s

d

eact

i

vate

d

: t

h

e

i

n

di

cator

lam

p

A goes o

ff

.

The alarm is bein

g

activated: the indicator

lamp

A

flashes rapidl

y

accompanied b

y

an intermittent audible si

g

nal

f

or about

2

0

seco

n

ds

.

O

nce the 20 seconds have ex

p

ired, t

h

e

system is activ

e

. The audible signal stops and

the indicator lamp in the button

f

lashes slowl

y

.

*

Accordin

g

to equipment.

74

Access

Lockin

g

the vehicle with

p

erimeter monitorin

g

onl

y

D

eac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

int

e

ri

o

r v

o

l

u

m

e

tri

c

a

n

d

tilt

m

onitorin

g

to avoid unwanted tri

gg

erin

g

of the

al

arm

i

n certa

i

n cases, suc

h

as:

- an animal le

f

t in the vehicle,

- a window le

f

t partl

y

open,

- washing your vehicle.

Deactivation of the interior

v

o

l

umetr

i

c an

d

t

il

t mon

i

tor

i

n

g

Raise and hold the wiper control stalk in the

"

M

IS

T

" position for about three seconds to

activate them a

g

ain, the audible si

g

nal sounds

tw

i

c

e

.

)

Switch off the i

g

nition and remove the

k

e

y

from the i

g

nition switch

(O

FF mode i

f

y

our vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

)

R

a

i

se an

d

h

o

ld

t

h

e w

i

per contro

l

sta

lk

i

n

t

he

"

MIST" position

f

or about 3 seconds.

)

Th

e au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

soun

d

s

once

a

n

d

t

he

interior volumetric and tilt monitoring are

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

75

2

Access

Tri

gg

erin

g

of the alarm

This is indicated b

y

soundin

g

o

f

the siren and

f

lashin

g

o

f

the direction indicators

f

or thirt

y

seco

n

ds

.

A

messa

g

e then appears in the instrument

p

anel screen while the siren is operatin

g

.

When the i

g

nition is next switched on

(O

N

m

ode if

y

our vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

, an audible si

g

nal sounds four

times to in

f

orm

y

ou that the alarm was tri

gg

ered

d

ur

i

n

g

y

our a

b

sence.

Com

p

lete deactivation of

t

he alarm

)

S

witch o

ff

the ignition

(O

FF mode i

f

y

our vehicle has the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

)

Remove the ke

y

from the i

g

nition switch,

if

y

our vehicle does not have the "Ke

y

less

Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem.

)

O

pen the driver's door.

)

Pl

ace t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

contro

l

sta

lk

i

n t

h

e

"

OFF

"

p

os

i

t

i

on.

)

Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and

h

o

l

d

.

Aft

e

r

abou

t t

e

n

seco

n

ds

th

e

r

e

i

s

a

n

aud

i

b

l

e

s

i

g

nal.

)

When the audible si

g

nal stops, continue to

hold the wiper stalk pulled towards

y

ou and

press t

h

e remote contro

l

oc

ki

n

g

b

utton.

Y

ou can comp

l

ete

ly

d

eact

i

vate t

h

e a

l

arm

s

y

stem. To do this, proceed as

f

ollows:

)

The state o

f

the system is then signalled to

y

ou b

y

the number o

f

beeps:

O

ne beep: the alarm s

y

stem is completel

y

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

Two beeps: the alarm s

y

stem is activated.

Each new press of the remote control

lockin

g

button chan

g

es the state o

f

the

sy

stem.

I

t

i

s poss

ibl

e to a

dj

ust t

h

e sens

i

t

i

v

i

t

y

of

th

e

a

l

a

rm

se

n

so

r

a

n

d

t

o

deac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n vi

a

th

e

co

l

ou

r

sc

r

ee

n

"

Equipment" menu.

76

Access

Electric windows

S

y

stem which opens or closes a window

m

anuall

y

or automaticall

y

. It is fitted with

a

s

y

stem which provides protection if an

obs

t

acle

is

de

t

ec

t

ed

o

n

o

n

e

-t

ouch

m

odels

a

n

d

a

deactivation s

y

stem to prevent misuse o

f

the

rea

r

co

ntr

ols

.

Front and rear passen

g

ers'

el

ectr

i

c w

i

n

d

ows

)

Wi

t

h

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on on, press or pu

ll

t

h

e

s

w

i

tc

h

.

Th

e w

i

n

d

ow stops w

h

en

y

ou

r

elease

t

he

s

w

i

t

ch

.

Safet

y

anti-pinch

(

driver's side

)

I

n automat

i

c mo

d

e, w

h

en t

h

e w

i

n

d

ow r

i

ses an

d

m

eets an obstacle, it stops and lowers again.

Th

e

l

ec

tri

c

win

do

w

s

wit

c

h

es

remain operational for approximatel

y

30 seconds a

f

ter the i

g

nition is switched

off

.

Th

e w

i

n

d

ows can no

l

on

g

er

b

e opene

d

o

r closed once a

f

ront door is o

p

ened.

The rear windows do not lower

f

ull

y

.

1.

D

r

i

ver

'

s e

l

ectr

i

c w

i

n

d

ow

.

2.

P

assen

g

er

'

s e

l

ectr

i

c w

i

n

d

ow

.

3.

Rear right electric window

.

4.

Rear left electric window

.

5.

D

eactivatin

g

the passen

g

er and rea

r

electric window switches

.

Driver's one-touch electric

w

i

n

d

ow

Wi

t

h

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on on,

y

ou

h

ave two opt

i

ons:

-

m

anual mod

e

)

Press the switch

g

entl

y

to open or pull

it

g

entl

y

to close. The window stops as

soo

n

as

th

e

s

wit

c

h i

s

r

e

l

eased

.

-

a

utomatic mod

e

)

Press the switch full

y

to open or pull

it

f

ull

y

to close. The window opens o

r

cl

oses comp

l

ete

ly

w

h

en t

h

e sw

i

tc

h

i

s

r

eleased

.

)

Pressing the switch again stops the

m

o

v

e

m

e

nt

of

th

e

win

do

w.

77

2

Access

Deactivatin

g

the passen

g

er

a

n

d

rear e

l

ectr

i

c w

i

n

d

ow

switches

Reinitialisin

g

the electric

w

i

n

d

ows

Wh

en t

h

e

b

utton

i

s presse

d

own, on

ly

t

h

e w

i

n

d

ow

i

n t

h

e

d

r

i

ver

'

s

d

oor operates.

Alwa

y

s remove the ke

y

from the i

g

nition

when leavin

g

the vehicle, even for a

s

h

o

rt tim

e

.

In the event o

f

contact durin

g

operation

o

f

the windows,

y

ou must reverse the

m

ovement o

f

the window. To do this,

p

ress the switch concerned.

When the driver operates the passen

g

er

e

lectric window switches, the

y

must

e

nsure that no one is preventin

g

correct

c

losin

g

of the windows.

The driver must ensure that passen

g

ers

use t

h

e e

l

ectr

i

c w

i

n

d

ows correct

ly

.

Be aware o

f

children when operatin

g

t

he

w

i

n

do

w

s

.

)

For the safet

y

of

y

our children, press switch

5

to prevent operation of the passen

g

er

and rear electric windows irrespective o

f

t

h

e

i

r pos

i

t

i

on.

Fr

o

m th

e

s

wit

c

h in th

e

d

riv

e

r'

s

doo

r:

)

pull the switch until the window is

f

ull

y

c

losed, then release it,

)

pull the switch a

g

ain for at least one

s

econd after reachin

g

the window closed

p

osition.

T

he safet

y

anti-pinch function is not active

d

ur

i

n

g

t

h

ese operat

i

ons

.

When the button is pressed down, the switches

a

r

e

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

When the button is up, the switches are activated.

S

hould there be no automatic

movement of a window when risin

g

or

after the safet

y

anti-pinch has been

tr

igg

ere

d

t

h

ree t

i

mes

i

n success

i

on, t

h

e

elec

tr

ic

w

i

n

do

w

s

m

us

t

be

r

ei

n

i

t

ialised

.

78

Access

Panoramic sunroof

It h

as

a

m

o

t

o

ri

sed

b

lin

d

.

Motorised blind

With the i

g

nition on, there are two wa

y

s o

f

opening or closing the blind:

)

Brie

f

l

y

pull or push the control in direction

1

or

2

, the blind stops when

y

ou release the

co

ntr

o

l.

)

Maintain pressure on the control in

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

1

o

r

2

until movement starts

,

the

blind then opens or closes

f

ull

y

.

Stoppin

g

temporaril

y

)

To stop the openin

g

or closin

g

of the blind,

press par

t

3

o

f th

e

co

ntr

o

l

o

r r

e

v

e

r

se

th

e

m

o

v

e

m

e

nt

o

f th

e

co

ntr

o

l.

Safet

y

anti-pinch

At the end of its travel, if the blind encounters

an obstacle to closin

g

, it stops and moves back

sli

g

htl

y

.

Remember to alwa

y

s switch off the

ig

n

i

t

i

on w

h

en

l

eav

i

n

g

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e, even

fo

r

a

s

h

o

rt tim

e

.

Wh

en operat

i

n

g

t

h

e contro

l

, t

h

e

d

r

i

ver

s

hould ensure that there is nothing

preventin

g

movement o

f

the blind.

The driver must ensure that passen

g

ers

u

se the blind correctl

y

.

Be aware of children when operatin

g

th

e

b

lin

d

.

79

3

Comfort

Front seats

Manual ad

j

ustments

Forwards-backwards

)

R

a

i

se

th

e

co

ntr

o

l

ba

r

a

n

d

s

li

de

th

e

sea

t

fo

rw

a

r

ds

o

r

bac

kw

a

r

ds

.

When the seat is in the correct position, push

it forwards and backwards without raisin

g

the

co

ntr

o

l

ba

r t

o

c

h

ec

k th

a

t th

e

it h

as

l

a

t

c

h

ed

.

Seat backrest an

g

le

)

Pull the control lever up to adjust the seat

bac

kr

es

t.

Wh

e

n th

e

bac

kr

es

t i

s

a

t th

e

des

ir

ed

a

n

gl

e, re

l

ease t

h

e contro

l

.

A

s a sa

f

et

y

measure, seat ad

j

ustments should onl

y

be done when stationar

y

.

Driver's seat hei

g

ht

)

Pull the control u

p

wards to raise or

p

ush

it downwards to lower, as man

y

times as

n

ecessar

y

, to obtain the position required.

Seat consistin

g

of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be ad

j

usted to

adapt

y

our position for ease of drivin

g

and comfort.

When the backrest is at the correct an

g

le,

re

l

ease

th

e

co

ntr

o

l l

e

v

e

r. T

o

e

n

su

r

e

th

a

t th

e

backrest does not suddenl

y

f

old

f

orwards

a

n

d

h

urt

y

ou, restra

i

n

i

t w

i

t

h

y

our

b

ac

k

or

y

our

h

an

d

w

hil

e operat

i

n

g

t

h

e contro

l

.

80

Comfort

Front seats

Electric ad

j

ustments

F

orwar

d

s-

b

ac

k

war

d

s

)

P

us

h th

e

co

ntr

o

l f

o

rw

a

r

ds

o

r r

ea

rw

a

r

ds

t

o

slide

t

he

sea

t.

Seat backrest an

g

le

)

Tilt th

e

co

ntr

o

l f

o

rw

a

r

ds

o

r r

ea

rw

a

r

ds

t

o

ad

j

ust the an

g

le o

f

the seat backrest.

D

r

i

ver

'

s seat cus

hi

on

h

e

igh

t

a

n

d

an

gl

e

)

Pull or push the

f

ront part o

f

the control

upwar

d

s or

d

ownwar

d

s to ra

i

se or

l

ower t

h

e

f

r

o

nt

of

th

e

sea

t

cus

hi

o

n.

)

Pull or

p

ush the rear

p

art o

f

the control

upwards or downwards to raise or lower the

rea

r

o

f th

e

sea

t

cus

hi

o

n.

)

Pull or push all of the control upwards or

do

wnw

a

r

ds

t

o

r

a

i

se

o

r l

o

w

e

r th

e

wh

o

l

e

sea

t

cus

hi

o

n

.

To avoid dischar

g

in

g

the batter

y

, carr

y

out

these ad

j

ustments with the en

g

ine runnin

g

.

81

3

Comfort

Additional ad

j

ustments

H

ea

d

restra

i

nt

h

e

igh

t

Th

e

h

ead

r

es

tr

a

int i

s

f

itt

ed

with

a

f

r

a

m

e

with

n

otches which prevents it

f

rom lowerin

g

; this is

a

safet

y

device in case of impact.

T

he ad

j

ustment is correct when the uppe

r

ed

g

e of the head restraint is level with the

to

p

of the head

.

N

e

v

e

r

d

riv

e

with th

e

h

ead

r

es

tr

a

int

s

removed; the

y

must be in place and

ad

j

usted correctl

y

.

)

T

o ra

i

se a

h

ea

d

restra

i

nt,

p

u

ll

i

t u

p

war

d

s.

)

To lower the head restraint, press the lug

A

a

n

d

th

e

h

ead

r

es

tr

a

int

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

)

T

o remove a

h

ea

d

restra

i

nt, press t

h

e

l

u

g

A

and

p

ull the head restraint u

p

wards.

)

To

p

ut the head restraint back in

p

lace,

e

n

g

a

g

e the head restraint stems in the

openin

g

s keepin

g

them in line with the seat

back and press the lu

g

A

a

t th

e

sa

m

e

tim

e

.

R

emov

i

n

g

a

h

ea

d

restra

i

nt

82

Comfort

o

r

de

r t

o

use

it

as

a

n

a

rmr

es

t.

Front armrest

H

eate

d

seats a

dj

ustment

Wi

t

h

t

h

e en

gi

ne runn

i

n

g

,

t

il

t t

h

e

b

utton to t

h

e

p

os

i

t

i

on requ

i

re

d

.

The temperature o

f

the seat is re

g

ulated

a

utomat

i

ca

lly

.

There are two setting positions:

- "HI": Hi

g

h heatin

g

- "L

O

": Low heatin

g

When the button is in the intermediate position,

the heatin

g

is switched off.

Th

e

i

n

di

cator

l

amps

A

co

m

e

o

n w

he

n t

he

sy

stem

i

s act

i

vate

d

.

83

3

Comfort

Rear seats

Bench seat with

f

ixed one-piece cushion and split backrest

(

le

f

t hand 2

/

3, right hand 1

/

3

)

which can be

f

olded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.

Foldin

g

the backrest

Repositionin

g

the seat backrest

)

Move the correspondin

g

front seat forward

if necessar

y

.

)

Place the head restraints in the low position

(

see "Rear head restraints"

)

.

)

P

r

ess

co

ntr

ol

1

fo

rw

a

r

ds

t

o

r

e

l

ease

th

e

sea

t

back

r

es

t

2

.

)

Fold

t

he

sea

t

back

2

o

n t

o

t

he

cushio

n.

)

Strai

g

hten the seat backrest

2

a

n

d

secu

r

e

i

t.

)

C

heck that the red indicator, located next to

t

he

co

ntr

ol

1

,

i

s no

l

on

g

er v

i

s

ibl

e.

When repositionin

g

the seat backrests, the

y

c

an be locked in one of two different positions,

dependin

g

on the speed in which the operation

is

ca

rr

ied

ou

t:

- i

f

done quickl

y

, the backrest returns to its

or

igi

na

l

pos

i

t

i

on

1

,

- i

f

done slowly, the backrest goes into the

vertical

p

osition 2 .

To

g

o from position

2

to position

1

, simpl

y

release the backrest and push it until it locks

in place.

84

Comfort

)

L

o

w

e

r th

e

r

ea

r

a

rmr

es

t f

o

r

a

m

o

r

e

c

omfortable position.

It ma

y

be fitted with cup holders and also

g

ives

access to the ski

f

lap.

Device for storin

g

and transportin

g

lon

g

ob

j

ects.

Openin

g

)

L

o

w

e

r th

e

a

rmr

es

t.

)

Lower the flap openin

g

control.

)

Lower the flap.

)

Load the ob

j

ects from inside the boot.

These have one position for use

(

up

)

and a

s

towed position

(

down

)

.

Th

e

y

can a

l

so

b

e remove

d

.

To

r

e

m

o

v

e

a

head

r

es

tr

ai

nt:

)

p

u

ll

t

h

e

h

ea

d

restra

i

nt u

p

war

d

s to t

h

e sto

p

,

)

then, press the lug

A

.

Rear head restraints Rear armrest Ski fla

p

N

e

v

e

r

d

riv

e

with th

e

h

ead

r

es

tr

a

int

s

removed; the

y

must be in place and

c

orrect

ly

a

dj

uste

d

.

85

3

Comfort

Mirrors

A

djustment is possible when the ignition switch

is in the "

O

N" or "A

CC

"

p

osition.

)

M

o

v

e

co

ntr

o

l

A

to the ri

g

ht or to the left to

s

elect the correspondin

g

mirror.

)

M

o

v

e

co

ntr

o

l

B

in

a

ll f

ou

r

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

s

t

o

ad

j

ust.

)

Re

t

u

rn

co

ntr

ol

A

to t

h

e centra

l

pos

i

t

i

on.

Each

f

itted with an ad

j

ustable mirror

g

lass

p

erm

i

tt

i

n

g

t

h

e

l

atera

l

rearwar

d

v

i

s

i

on necessar

y

f

or overtakin

g

or parkin

g

. The

y

can also be

f

olded

f

or parking in con

f

ined spaces.

Demistin

g

- Defrostin

g

Door mirrors

I

f

y

our vehicle is

f

itted with heated

mirrors, the demistin

g

-de

f

rostin

g

o

perates with the engine running, by

s

witchin

g

on the heated rear screen

(

see "Rear screen demist-defrost"

)

.

Th

e o

bj

ects o

b

serve

d

are,

i

n rea

li

t

y

,

cl

oser t

h

an t

h

e

y

appear.

Take

t

his

i

nt

o

accou

nt

i

n

o

r

de

r t

o

c

orrectly judge the distance o

f

vehicles

approachin

g

f

rom behind.

86

Comfort

From the outside

:

)

by

l

oc

ki

n

g

or un

l

oc

ki

n

g

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e,

u

sin

g

the remote control or the lockin

g

/

u

nlockin

g

buttons

(f

or vehicles

f

itted with

the "Keyless Entry and

S

tarting" system

)

.

I

f

y

ou have

f

olded the mirrors usin

g

the

co

ntr

ol

C

,

y

ou must use t

hi

s contro

l

to

un

f

old them, otherwise the mirrors will

not be lock in place correctl

y

.

Some mirror functions

(

in particular the

automatic foldin

g

and unfoldin

g

of the

door mirrors

)

can be confi

g

ured via the

c

o

l

our screen

"E

qu

i

pment

"

menu.

Th

e

mirr

o

r

s

ca

n

a

l

so

be

fo

l

ded

manua

lly

.

From inside:

- with the i

g

nition switch in the "

O

N" or

"

ACC" position, b

y

pressin

g

the control

C

,

- with the i

g

nition switch in the "L

O

CK"

p

osition, b

y

pressin

g

control C

,

within

3

0 seconds

.

87

3

Comfort

Rear view mirror

A

djustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle s

y

stem, which darkens the mirror

g

lass and reduces the nuisance to

the driver caused b

y

the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...

Manual da

y/

ni

g

ht model

Ad

j

ustment

)

Ad

j

ust the mirror so that the

g

lass is

di

recte

d

correct

ly

i

n t

h

e

"d

a

y"

pos

i

t

i

on.

A

s a safet

y

measure, the mirrors should be ad

j

usted to reduce the "blind spot".

In order to ensure optimum visibilit

y

d

ur

i

n

g

y

our manoeuvres, t

h

e m

i

rror

ligh

tens automat

i

ca

lly

w

h

en reverse

g

ear

i

s en

g

a

g

e

d

.

Da

y

/ ni

g

ht position

)

P

u

ll

t

h

e

l

ever to c

h

an

g

e to t

h

e

"

n

igh

t

"

ant

i

-

d

azz

l

e pos

i

t

i

on.

)

P

us

h

t

h

e

l

ever to c

h

an

g

e to t

h

e norma

l

"day" position.

A

utomatic da

y/

ni

g

ht model

B

y

means o

f

a sensor, which measures the

li

g

ht

f

rom the rear o

f

the vehicle, this s

y

stem

a

utomatically and progressively changes

between the da

y

and ni

g

ht uses.

Steering wheel adjustment

)

When stationary

,

l

ower t

h

e contro

l

ever to

y

r

e

l

ease t

h

e steer

i

n

g

w

h

ee

l

a

dj

ustment mec

h

an

i

sm.

)

Adjust the height and reach to suit your

drivin

g

position.

)

Pull the control lever to lock the steerin

g

wheel ad

j

ustment mechanism.

As a safet

y

precaution, these

operat

i

ons s

h

ou

ld

on

ly

b

e carr

i

e

d

out

w

hil

e t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s stat

i

onar

y

.

88

Comfort

Ventilation

The air circulatin

g

in the passen

g

er compartment

is filtered and ori

g

inates either from the outside via

the

g

rille located at the base of the windscreen or

f

r

o

m th

e

in

s

i

de

in

a

ir r

ec

ir

cu

l

a

ti

o

n m

ode

.

A

ir treatment

The incoming air

f

ollows various routes

dependin

g

on the controls selected b

y

the

d

riv

e

r:

- direct arrival in the passen

g

er compartment

(

air intake

)

,

- passa

g

e throu

g

h a heatin

g

circuit

(

heatin

g)

,

- passa

g

e throu

g

h a coolin

g

circuit

(

air

c

onditionin

g)

.

Control

p

anel

The controls of this s

y

stem are

g

rouped

to

g

ether on control panel

A

o

n th

e

ce

ntr

e

co

n

so

l

e

.

1.

Windscreen demistin

g

-de

f

rostin

g

vents.

2.

Front side window demistin

g

-de

f

rostin

g

v

e

nt

s

.

3.

S

ide adjustable air vents.

4.

C

entral ad

j

ustable air vents.

5

.

Air

ou

tl

e

t

s

t

o

th

e

f

r

o

nt

foo

tw

e

ll

s

.

6

.

Air

ou

tl

e

t

s

t

o

th

e

r

ea

r

foo

tw

e

ll

s

.

7.

T

em

p

erature sensor.

8.

S

unshine

/

rain sensor.

Air distribution

89

3

Comfort

In order for these s

y

stems to be full

y

effective, follow the operation and maintenance

g

uidelines below:

)

T

o o

b

ta

i

n an even a

i

r

di

str

ib

ut

i

on, ta

k

e care not to o

b

struct t

h

e exter

i

or a

i

r

i

nta

k

e

g

r

ill

es

located at the base o

f

the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well

as

t

he

ai

r

e

xtr

ac

t

o

r

loca

t

ed

i

n t

he

boo

t.

)

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used

f

or regulation

of

the di

g

ital air conditionin

g

s

y

stem.

)

O

perate the air conditionin

g

s

y

stem for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month

to keep it in perfect workin

g

order.

)

Ensure that the passen

g

er compartment filter is in

g

ood condition and have the filte

r

e

lements replaced re

g

ularl

y

.

We recommend the use o

f

a combined passen

g

er compartment

f

ilter. Thanks to its

s

pecial active additive, it contributes to the puri

f

ication o

f

the air breathed b

y

the

o

ccupants and the cleanliness o

f

the passen

g

er compartment

(

reduction o

f

aller

g

ic

s

ymptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits

)

.

)

To ensure correct operation o

f

the air conditionin

g

s

y

stem,

y

ou are also advised to have

it checked re

g

ularl

y

as recommended in the servicin

g

booklet.

)

If the s

y

stem does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

If after an extended stop in sunshine,

the interior temperature is ver

y

hi

g

h, first

ventilate the passen

g

er compartment fo

r

a

f

e

w m

o

m

e

nt

s

.

P

ut the air

f

low control at a settin

g

hi

g

h

e

nou

gh

to qu

i

c

kly

c

h

an

g

e t

h

e a

i

r

i

n t

h

e

passen

g

er compartment.

The air conditioning system does not

c

ontain chlorine and does not

p

resent

an

y

dan

g

er to the ozone la

y

er.

Th

e con

d

ensat

i

on create

d

by

t

h

e a

ir

c

on

di

t

i

on

i

n

g

resu

l

ts

i

n a

di

sc

h

ar

g

e

of

w

a

t

e

r

u

n

de

r th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

whi

c

h i

s

per

f

ectly normal.

When towin

g

the maximum load on a steep

g

radient in hi

g

h temperatures, switchin

g

off the

a

i

r con

di

t

i

on

i

n

g

i

ncreases t

h

e ava

il

a

bl

e en

gi

ne power an

d

so

i

mproves t

h

e tow

i

n

g

a

bili

t

y

.

90

Comfort

Manual heating / air conditioning

The s

y

stem operates with the en

g

ine runnin

g

.

1. Temperature settin

g

)

Turn the temperature control

dial to the ri

g

ht to raise the

temperature, and to the left to

l

o

w

e

r it.

To avoid mistin

g

and deterioration o

f

the air

quality in the passenger compartment, ensure

that an adequate air

f

low is maintained.

3. Air distribution settin

g

)

Pl

ace

th

e

d

i

a

l in th

e

des

ir

ed

position, to direct air towards:

t

h

e centre an

d

s

id

e vents,

Th

e a

i

r

di

str

ib

ut

i

on can

b

e mo

d

u

l

ate

d

by

pl

ac

i

n

g

t

h

e

di

a

l

i

n

i

nterme

di

ate pos

i

t

i

ons.

2. Air ﬂ ow settin

g

)

Turn the dial to the ri

g

ht to

in

c

r

ease

a

n

d

t

o

th

e

l

e

ft t

o

reduce

th

e

a

ir fl

o

w.

the centre, side and footwell

vents,

the

f

ootwells,

the windscreen, side windows

and footwells,

t

he

w

i

n

dsc

r

ee

n

a

n

d

side

win

do

w

s

.

91

3

Comfort

Recirculation of interior ai

r

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

4

t

o

se

l

ec

t th

e

a

ir

e

ntr

y

mode.

This

f

unction allows the passen

g

er

c

om

p

artment to be isolated

f

rom exterio

r

odou

r

s

a

n

d

s

m

o

k

e

.

When the warnin

g

lamp in button 4 is o

ff

, the

int

a

k

e

o

f

e

xt

e

ri

o

r

a

ir i

s

ac

tiv

e

.

When the warnin

g

lamp in button

4

is on, the

intake of exterior air is deactivated, and

y

ou are

in

a

ir r

ec

ir

cu

l

a

ti

o

n.

Do not drive

f

or lon

g

with interior air

rec

i

rcu

l

at

i

on, except

i

n tru

ly

except

i

ona

l

atmos

ph

er

i

c con

di

t

i

ons.

The air conditionin

g

is desi

g

ned to operate

e

ff

ectivel

y

in all seasons, with the windows closed.

I

t ena

bl

es

y

ou to:

-

l

ower t

h

e tem

p

erature,

i

n summer,

- increase the e

ff

ectiveness o

f

the demisting

in winter, above 3

°C

.

5. Air conditionin

g

On / Off

Switchin

g

on

Switchin

g

off

)

P

r

ess

bu

tt

o

n 5 a

g

a

i

n, t

h

e

l

amp

i

n t

h

e

b

utton

g

oes o

ff

.

S

witching o

ff

may a

ff

ect com

f

ort levels

(

humidit

y

, condensation

)

.

If

y

our vehicle is not fitted with air

c

onditionin

g

, the button is not active.

)

P

r

ess

bu

tt

o

n

5

, t

h

e

l

am

p

i

n t

h

e

bu

tt

o

n

co

m

es

o

n.

92

Comfort

Automatic air conditioning

1.

Temperature ad

j

ustment

2.

Air flow ad

j

ustment

3.

Ai

r

di

str

ib

ut

i

on a

dj

ustment

4.

Int

a

k

e

of

e

xt

e

ri

o

r

a

ir

/

R

ec

ir

cu

l

a

ti

o

n

of

i

nt

e

r

io

r

air

5.

Air conditioning

O

n

/

Off

Automatic o

p

eration

)

S

et the tem

p

erature control dial

1

t

o

th

e

temperature required.

)

Pl

ace

th

e

a

ir fl

o

w

co

ntr

o

l

d

i

a

l

2

in th

e

"

AUTO" position.

)

Place the air distribution ad

j

ustment dial

3

i

n t

he

"

AUTO" pos

i

t

i

on.

When the en

g

ine is cold, to avoid an

e

xcessive distribution of cold air, the

ventilation will reach its optimum level

g

raduall

y

.

On enterin

g

the vehicle, the interio

r

temperature ma

y

b

e muc

h

co

ld

e

r

(

or warmer

)

than the temperature

s

ett

i

n

g

.

Th

ere

i

s no nee

d

to c

h

an

g

e t

h

e

temperature setting in order to reach

the com

f

ort required rapidl

y

.

The automatic re

g

ulation of the air

c

onditionin

g

will operate to correct the

temperature difference as quickl

y

as

possible.

In

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

:

)

when the temperature is set to maximum

(

Rapid heatin

g)

, the intake of exterior air is

a

ctivated and the air conditionin

g

stops.

)

w

h

en t

h

e temperature

i

s set to m

i

n

i

mum

(

Rapid coolin

g)

, air recirculation is

a

ct

i

vate

d

an

d

t

h

e a

i

r con

di

t

i

on

i

n

g

operates.

Th

e s

y

stem contro

l

s t

h

e a

i

r

di

str

ib

ut

i

on, t

h

e

f

low, the tem

p

erature and the air intake to

e

n

su

r

e

th

e

l

e

v

e

l

of

co

m

fo

rt

se

l

ec

t

ed

a

n

d

adequate air circulation in the passen

g

er

c

ompartment. No further action on

y

our part is

r

equired.

93

3

Comfort

Manual settin

g

s

1. Temperature settin

g

2. Air ﬂ ow settin

g

th

e

ce

ntr

a

l

a

n

d

s

i

de

v

e

nt

s

a

n

d

the footwells

,

)

Turn the tem

p

erature control

dial to the ri

g

ht to increase the

temperature and to the left to

dec

r

ease

it.

)

Turn the dial to the ri

g

ht to

in

c

r

ease

th

e

a

ir fl

o

w

o

r t

o

th

e

l

e

ft t

o

dec

r

ease

it.

T

o

a

v

o

i

d

co

n

de

n

sa

ti

o

n

a

n

d

de

t

e

ri

o

r

a

ti

o

n

of

th

e

q

ualit

y

o

f

the air in the passen

g

er compartment,

e

n

su

r

e

th

a

t

a

suff

i

c

i

e

nt

f

l

o

w

of

a

ir i

s

m

a

int

a

in

ed

.

3. Air distribution settin

g

)

Place the dial in the position

r

equ

i

re

d

to

di

rect t

h

e a

ir

t

o

w

a

r

ds

:

t

h

e centra

l

an

d

s

id

e vents,

the

f

ootwells,

the windscreen

,

the side

windows and the footwells

,

th

e

win

dsc

r

ee

n

a

n

d

th

e

s

i

de

win

do

w

s

.

The air distribution can be adapted b

y

placin

g

the ad

j

ustment dial in the intermediate

positions.

It is

p

ossible to set one or more

f

unctions

m

anually while leaving the other

f

unctions in

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

.

Switchin

g

to manual mode ma

y

result in

discomfort

(

temperature, humidit

y

, odour,

c

ondensation

)

and does not offer optimum

co

mf

o

rt.

94

Comfort

Personalisation of the

E

xterior air intake

/

Interior air

r

ecirculation function

This

f

unction is controlled automatically.

H

owever,

y

ou can deactivate its automatic

c

ontrol if

y

ou wish to chan

g

e the air intake

mode at an

y

time.

Chan

g

in

g

the status

Press the Air intake / Interior air recirculation

b

utton for at least 1

0

seconds.

When the status chan

g

es from active to

inactive, three bleeps are heard and the

indicator lamp

f

lashes three times.

When the status chan

g

es

f

rom inactive to

act

i

ve, two

bl

ee

p

s are

h

ear

d

an

d

t

h

e

i

n

di

cator

l

am

p

f

lashes three times.

A

utomat

i

c contro

l

act

i

ve

I

f

the air distribution ad

j

ustment dial and the air

f

low adjustment dial are placed in the "AUT

O

"

p

osition, the Air intake

/

Interior air recirculation

function is also controlled automaticall

y

.

Automatic control inactive

Even if the air distribution ad

j

ustment dial and

the air flow ad

j

ustment dial are placed in the

"AUT

O

" position, the Air intake / Interior ai

r

recirculation function is no lon

g

er controlled

automat

i

ca

lly

.

The settin

g

s are retained, even a

f

ter switchin

g

o

ff

the i

g

nition.

4. Intake of exterior air /

Recirculation of interior air

This function insulates the passen

g

er

c

ompartment

f

rom exterior odours and smoke.

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

4

t

o

se

l

ec

t th

e

a

ir

i

nt

ake

m

ode

.

Wh

en t

h

e

i

n

di

cator

l

amp on

b

utton

4

is o

ff

, the

e

xt

e

ri

o

r

a

ir int

a

k

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n i

s

o

n.

When the indicator lam

p

on button

4

is on, the

intake o

f

exterior air is o

ff

and the s

y

stem is in

a

ir r

ec

ir

cu

l

a

ti

o

n m

ode

.

Do not drive for lon

g

periods in interior

air recirculation mode, except in trul

y

e

xcept

i

ona

l

atmosp

h

er

i

c con

di

t

i

ons.

95

3

Comfort

5. Air conditionin

g

On / Off

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n 5 t

o

ac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

a

ir

c

onditionin

g

.

The indicator lamp comes on.

Personalisation of the Ai

r

Conditionin

g

On / Off function

This

f

unction is controlled automaticall

y

.

H

owever, you can deactivate its automatic

c

ontrol i

f

y

ou wish to activate or deactivate the

a

ir conditionin

g

at an

y

time.

Chan

g

in

g

the status

Press the Air Conditionin

g

O

n /

O

ff button for at

l

east

10

seconds.

When the status chan

g

es from active to

i

nactive, three bleeps are heard and the

i

ndicator lamp

f

lashes three times.

When the status chan

g

es

f

rom inactive to

a

ct

i

ve, two

bl

ee

p

s are

h

ear

d

an

d

t

h

e

i

n

di

cato

r

l

am

p

f

lashes three times.

A

utomat

i

c contro

l

act

i

ve

I

f

the air distribution ad

j

ustment dial and the

air

f

low adjustment dial are placed in the

"AUT

O

"

p

osition, or i

f

the tem

p

erature control

dial is set to the minimum temperature, the air

c

onditionin

g

s

y

stem is controlled automaticall

y

.

Automatic control inactive

The air conditionin

g

s

y

stem is no lon

g

er

c

ontrolled automaticall

y

.

96

Comfort

Front Demist - Defrost

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

A

, to select "exterior air intake". The lam

p

in the button

is

off

.

2.

Place the air distribution dial in the "windscreen, side windows and

footwells" position.

3.

S

elect the desired level of air flow.

4.

Select the desired temperature.

5.

I

f

y

our vehicle has air conditionin

g

, switch it on b

y

pressin

g

button

B

.

Th

e

l

amp

i

n t

hi

s

b

utton comes on.

Rapid demistin

g

1

.

Pl

ace

th

e

d

i

s

tri

bu

ti

o

n

co

ntr

o

l

o

n th

e

"win

dsc

r

ee

n

a

n

d

s

i

de

win

do

w"

p

osition.

2.

S

elect maximum air flow.

3.

Select maximum temperature.

97

3

Comfort

Rear screen demist - defrost

Switchin

g

on

The rear screen demistin

g/

de

f

rostin

g

can onl

y

operate when the engine is running.

Switchin

g

off

The demisting

/

de

f

rosting switches o

ff

a

utomaticall

y

to prevent an excessive

c

onsumption of current.

)

It is possible to stop the demistin

g

/

defrostin

g

operation before it is switched

off automaticall

y

b

y

pressin

g

the button

a

g

a

i

n.

Th

e

i

n

di

cator

l

amp assoc

i

ate

d

w

i

t

h

the button

g

oes o

ff

.

)

S

witch o

ff

the demistin

g/

de

f

rostin

g

o

f

the

rea

r

sc

r

ee

n

a

n

d

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

as

soo

n

as

a

pp

ro

p

riate, as lower current consum

p

tion

r

esults in reduced fuel consumption.

Th

e contro

l

b

utton

i

s

l

ocate

d

on t

h

e a

i

r con

di

t

i

on

i

n

g

s

y

stem contro

l

pane

l

.

)

Press this button to demist

/

def

r

os

t th

e

r

ea

r

sc

r

ee

n

a

n

d

(

dependin

g

on version

)

the

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

. Th

e

in

d

i

ca

t

or

l

am

p

associated with the button

comes

on

.

98

Comfort

Front ﬁ ttings

Sun visor.

2.

G

love box.

3.

Portable ashtra

y

.

4.

Ci

g

arette li

g

hter

12 V socket

(

120 W max

)

.

5.

A

rmrest w

i

t

h

stora

g

e compartments.

6

.

C

u

p

holder.

7

.

B

o

ttl

e

h

o

l

de

r.

99

3

Comfort

Mat

Wh

en remov

i

n

g

t

h

e mat on t

h

e

d

r

i

ver

'

s s

id

e,

m

ove back the seat as

f

ar as possible and

remove the

f

ixin

g

s.

When re

f

ittin

g

, position the mat correctl

y

on the

p

ins and clip the

f

ixings.

C

heck that the mat is

s

ecured

f

irml

y

.

To prevent an

y

risk of

j

ammin

g

under the

p

edals:

- onl

y

use mats suited to the fixin

g

s alread

y

p

resent

i

n t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e;

i

t

i

s

i

mperat

i

ve t

h

at

these

f

ixin

g

s are used.

- never

f

it one mat on top o

f

another.

Sun visor Glove box

It has dedicated locations for storin

g

a water

b

ott

l

e, t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s

h

an

db

oo

k

pac

k

...

)

T

o open t

h

e

gl

ove

b

ox, ra

i

se t

h

e

h

an

dl

e.

I

t

i

s

ill

um

i

nate

d

w

h

en t

h

e

lid

i

s o

p

ene

d

.

It houses the

f

ront passenger airbag

deac

tiv

a

ti

o

n

s

wit

c

h

A

.

If the vehicle is fitted with air conditionin

g

, it has

a

v

e

ntil

a

ti

o

n n

o

zzl

e

B

, distributin

g

the same

c

onditioned air as the vents in the passen

g

e

r

c

ompartment.

I

f

y

our vehicle is

f

itted with the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem, it contains the back-up

s

tart

i

n

g

un

i

t

C

.

The sun visors fold forwards

,

and to the side

wh

en t

h

e

y

are un

h

oo

k

e

d

.

The

y

are

f

itted with a courtes

y

mirror and a

t

icke

t

holde

r.

100

Comfort

Portable ashtray

)

Pull the cover to open the ashtra

y

.

)

To empt

y

it, remove the ashtra

y

b

y

pullin

g

it

u

pwar

d

s.

Cigarette lighter /

12 V accessory

socket

)

T

o use t

h

e c

ig

arette

ligh

ter, press

i

t

i

n

and wait a

f

ew seconds until it

p

o

p

s out

automaticall

y

.

)

To connect a 12 V accessor

y

(

max power:

120 W

)

, remove the ci

g

arette li

g

hter and

c

onnect a suitable adaptor.

You can use this socket to connect a telephone

ch

ar

g

er, a

b

ott

l

e warmer...

A

f

ter use, put the ci

g

arette li

g

hter back into

p

l

ace stra

igh

t awa

y

.

101

3

Comfort

Front armrest

Pull the right-hand lever to open the storage

c

ompartment lid, which serves as an armrest.

To close, fold down the lid until it locks.

Pull the le

f

t-hand lever to o

p

en the lid.

To close,

f

old down the lid until it locks.

This stora

g

e compartment ma

y

contain up

to

3

accessor

y

sockets.

This operates when the i

g

nition switch is in the

"L

O

CK", "ACC" or "

O

N" position.

Open the cover of the front armrest to

g

ain

access

t

o

t

he

socke

t.

Upper stora

g

e compartment

L

ower stora

g

e compartment

C

heck that the electrical e

q

ui

p

ment

operates on

12

V and that its maximum

e

lectrical power is

120

W.

The prolon

g

ed use of electrical

e

quipment without runnin

g

the en

g

ine

ma

y

dischar

g

e the batter

y

.

12 V socket

(120 W max)

102

Comfort

It permits the connection of a portable device,

such as a di

g

ital audio pla

y

er of the iPod

®

or

®

U

SB memor

y

stick t

y

pe.

O

pen the

f

ront armrest cover

f

or access to the

port.

It reads certain audio

f

ile

f

ormats allowin

g

them

to be heard via the vehicle's s

p

eakers.

You can mana

g

e these

f

iles usin

g

the steerin

g

mounted controls or the audio s

y

stem control

panel.

F

o

r m

o

r

e

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n

o

n th

e

use

of

thi

s

eq

ui

p

ment, see "Audio and Telematics".

USB port

Connected to the USB port, the

porta

bl

e

d

ev

i

ce c

h

ar

g

es automat

i

ca

lly

w

hile

i

n

use

.

Auxiliary socket

(AUX)

It is used to connect a portable device

(

MP3 pla

y

er...

)

.

Open the front armrest cover for access to the

socke

t.

For more in

f

ormation on usin

g

this equipment,

see

"Audio

a

n

d

Tele

m

a

t

ics"

.

103

3

Comfort

Rear ﬁ ttings

P

u

ll th

e

h

a

n

d

l

e

do

wnw

a

r

ds

t

o

l

o

w

e

r it.

Grab handle

The rear left

g

rab handle is fitted with a coat

hoo

k.

Coat hook Seat

p

ockets

104

Comfort

Boot ﬁ ttings

Rear parcel shelf

(

see details on a followin

g

pa

g

e

)

2.

L

ashin

g

rin

gs

3.

Retainin

g

stra

p

4.

Side stora

ge

105

3

Comfort

Stowin

g

rin

g

s

There are four stowin

g

rin

g

s in the boot for

securin

g

lu

gg

a

g

e:

- two rin

g

s are located on the boot floor,

- two r

i

n

g

s are

l

ocate

d

on t

h

e rear s

id

e

p

ill

ars.

T

o

r

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

s

h

e

lf:

)

unhook the two cords

,

)

raise the shelf sli

g

htl

y

, then remove it.

There are several options

f

or storin

g

the shel

f

:

- either upri

g

ht behind the

f

ront seats,

-

o

r

f

l

a

t

a

t th

e

base

of

th

e

boo

t.

106

Driving

Starting - stopping the engine with the key

- P

os

iti

o

n 1:

L

OCK

Th

e steer

i

n

g

i

s

l

oc

k

e

d

.

- P

os

iti

o

n 2:

ACC

The accessories

(

radio, 12 V socket...

)

can

be

used

.

- Position

3

: O

N

I

g

nition on.

- P

os

iti

o

n 4: STAR

T

Startin

g

the en

g

ine.

I

g

nition switch

If

y

ou use the accessories for a

p

rolon

g

ed period

(

with the ke

y

in

p

osition

2

(

ACC

)

,

y

ou risk dischar

g

in

g

the batter

y

. Startin

g

y

our vehicle will

t

h

en no

l

on

g

er

b

e poss

ibl

e.

B

e awar

e

.

S

ee the "Automatic power cut-o

ff

to

accesso

r

ies"

sec

t

io

n.

K

e

y

in i

g

nition

A buzzer sounds on openin

g

the driver's

door, i

f

the ke

y

has been le

f

t in the

ig

n

i

t

i

on.

)

I

nsert t

h

e

k

e

y

i

n t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

.

)

Turn the key to position

2

(ACC)

a

n

d

u

nl

oc

k

the steerin

g

column, b

y

turnin

g

wheel

s

li

g

htl

y

.

)

Press and hold the brake pedal.

)

Full

y

depress the clutch pedal

(

vehicles

f

itted with a manual

g

earbox

)

.

)

Put the

g

ear lever into neutral

(

vehicles

f

itted with a manual

g

earbox

)

, or in

p

os

i

t

i

on

P

(

vehicles

f

itted with a

C

VT

gearbox

)

.

)

O

perate the starter b

y

turnin

g

the ke

y

to

position

4

(

START

)

.

)

O

nce the en

g

ine is runnin

g

, release the

k

e

y

.

The ke

y

returns automaticall

y

to

pos

i

t

i

on

3

(

ON

)

.

Startin

g

usin

g

the ke

y

Stoppin

g

)

I

mm

obilise

t

he

v

ehicle

.

)

Put the gear lever into neutral

(

vehicles

f

itted with a manual

g

earbox

)

, or in

p

osition

P

(

vehicles fitted with a CVT

g

earbox

)

.

)

While pressin

g

the ke

y

, turn it to

p

osition 1

(

LOCK

)

.

)

Remove the ke

y

f

rom the i

g

nition switch.

)

L

oc

k

t

h

e steer

i

n

g

.

Do not attach an

y

heav

y

ob

j

ects to the

k

e

y

as t

hi

s cou

ld

we

igh

d

own on

i

t w

h

en

in the i

g

nition switch and cause a

f

ault.

For Diesel vehicles, when the en

g

ine

i

s co

ld

wa

i

t w

i

t

h

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

n pos

i

t

i

on

3

(

ON

)

unt

il

t

h

e pre

h

eate

r

w

arnin

g

lamp

g

oes o

ff

, be

f

ore turnin

g

the key to position 4 (START

)

.

The warnin

g

lamp does not come on

w

hen the en

g

ine is hot.

107

4

Driving

Starting - stopping the engine with the Keyless Entry and

Starting system

Wi

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

i

ns

id

e t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e; eac

h

p

ress on t

h

e

"

START/STO

P

"

b

utton, w

i

t

h

no

act

i

on on t

h

e pe

d

a

l

s, c

h

an

g

es t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s

mode

:

)

First press

(

A

CC

mode

)

, the button's

warnin

g

lamp comes on in oran

g

e.

The accessories

(

radio, 12V socket...

)

can

be

used

.

)

Second press

(O

N mode

)

, the button's

warn

i

n

g

l

amp comes on

i

n

g

reen.

S

witchin

g

on the i

g

nition.

)

Third press

(O

FF mode

)

, the warnin

g

lamp

in the button

g

oes o

ff

.

If

y

ou use the accessories for a

p

rolon

g

ed period with the i

g

nition switch

in position 2

(

ACC

)

,

y

ou risk dischar

g

in

g

the batter

y

. Startin

g

y

our vehicle will

t

h

en no

l

on

g

er

b

e poss

ibl

e.

T

a

k

e car

e

.

S

ee the "Automatic power cut-o

ff

to

accesso

r

ies"

sec

t

io

n.

Chan

g

in

g

the mode of

the vehicle

If the warnin

g

lamp flashes oran

g

e,

c

ontact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer or a

quali

f

ied workshop as soon as possible.

)

Pr

ess

a

n

d

r

e

l

ease

th

e

" START

/

STOP"

bu

tt

o

n.

)

Wi

t

h

t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

i

ns

id

e t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e,

depress the clutch pedal

f

ully on vehicles

with a manual

g

earbox or press the brake

p

edal on vehicles with a CVT

g

earbox.

Startin

g

usin

g

the

e

lectronic ke

y

For vehicles

f

itted with a manual

g

earbox , put

t

h

e

g

ear

l

ever

i

n neutra

l

.

For vehicles

f

itted with a

C

VT gearbox , put the

g

ear lever in

P

.

P

108

Driving

For Diesel vehicles, when

the en

g

ine is cold startin

g

does not take place until the

pre-

h

eater warn

i

n

g

l

amp

h

as

g

one o

ff

.

I

f

one o

f

the startin

g

conditions is not

m

et, a reminder messa

g

e appears in

the instrument panel screen. In some

c

ircumstances, it is necessar

y

to

turn t

h

e steer

i

n

g

w

h

ee

l

s

ligh

t

ly

w

hil

e

p

ress

i

n

g

t

h

e

"

START/STOP

"

bu

tt

o

n

to assist unlockin

g

o

f

the steerin

g

;

a messa

g

e warns

y

ou w

h

en t

hi

s

i

s

needed

.

The presence o

f

the electronic ke

y

in th

e

de

fin

ed

z

o

n

e

i

s

esse

nti

a

l. F

or

reasons of safet

y

, do not leave this area

when the en

g

ine is runnin

g

.

Switchin

g

off usin

g

the

e

lectronic ke

y

If the vehicle is not immobilised, the

e

n

g

ine will not stop.

Thi

s messa

g

e

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

w

he

n t

he

d

r

i

v

e

r

's

doo

r

is

o

p

ene

d

an

d

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s not

in "

O

FF" mode.

)

Pr

ess

th

e

"

S

TART/

S

TO

P

" button a

g

ain to

c

han

g

e to "

O

FF" mode.

)

I

mm

obilise

t

he

v

ehicle

.

)

Place the

g

ear lever in neutral

f

or vehicles

f

itted with a manual

g

earbox , or on

P

for

vehicles

f

itted with a

C

VT gearbox .

)

With the electronic ke

y

inside the vehicle,

p

ress the " START/STO

P

"

bu

tt

o

n.

The en

g

ine stops.

The steerin

g

locks when a door is opened or on

lockin

g

the vehicle.

Each attempt at startin

g

takes around

15 seconds. If the en

g

ine does not start, press

th

e

"START/STOP " button once more to tr

y

ag

ain.

The presence of the electronic ke

y

in

the vehicle is essential for switchin

g

on the i

g

nition and startin

g

onl

y

. Once

t

h

e en

gi

ne

h

as starte

d

, ma

k

e sure

t

h

at t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

rema

i

ns w

i

t

h

the vehicle until the end o

f

the

j

ourne

y

:

otherwise you would not be able to lock

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

109

4

Driving

O

nce the en

g

ine has started,

y

ou can

remove the electronic ke

y

from its

housin

g

A

and close the

g

love box.

Back-up startin

g

with the

e

lectronic ke

y

The messa

g

e is displa

y

ed

when

y

ou open the driver's

door and the electronic ke

y

has

n

o

t

bee

n r

e

m

o

v

ed

fr

o

m

i

t

s

l

oca

ti

o

n

A

. R

e

m

e

m

be

r t

o

t

a

k

e

th

e

l

ec

tr

o

ni

c

k

e

y

w

i

t

h

y

ou w

h

en

y

ou

l

eave t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e.

)

Press the brake pedal on vehicles fitted

with a

C

VT

g

earbox or depress the clutch

pedal

f

ull

y

on vehicles with a manual

g

ear

b

ox.

)

Pr

ess

th

e

"

S

TART/

S

TOP "

bu

tt

o

n.

When the electronic ke

y

is in the defined zone

and

y

our vehicle does not start after pressin

g

th

e

"START/STOP"

bu

tt

o

n:

)

O

pen the

g

love box.

)

I

nsert t

h

e e

l

ectron

i

c

k

e

y

i

n t

h

e

l

ocat

i

on

A

.

Emer

g

enc

y

stop with the

e

lectronic ke

y

D

ur

i

n

g

an emer

g

enc

y

stop, t

h

e

b

ra

ki

n

g

s

ervo ass

i

stance an

d

steer

i

n

g

power

assistance

f

unctions are no lon

g

e

r

provided. Take great care.

In the event of an emergency only

, t

h

e

y

e

n

gi

ne can

b

e stoppe

d

w

i

t

h

out an

y

con

di

t

i

ons.

To do this,

p

ress and hold the "

S

TART/

S

TO

P

" button

f

or about

3

seconds or make

3

s

uccessive presses on the button.

The en

g

ine stops and the vehicle

g

oes into

"A

CC

" mode.

110

Driving

Anti-theft protection

Electronic en

g

ine immobiliser

The ke

y

s contain an electronic chip which has

a

secret co

d

e.

Wh

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on, this code must be reco

g

nised in order

f

or

s

tart

i

n

g

to

b

e poss

ibl

e.

Thi

s e

l

ectron

i

c en

gi

ne

i

mmo

bili

ser

l

oc

k

s t

h

e

ngine management system a

f

ew minutes

af

ter the i

g

nition is switched o

ff

and prevents

s

tartin

g

of the en

g

ine b

y

an

y

one who does not

h

ave the ke

y

.

In the event of a malfunction,

y

ou are informed

by

a messa

g

e

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen.

I

n t

hi

s case,

y

our ve

hi

c

l

e

d

oes not start; contact

a

CITRO

Ë

N dealer as soon as possible.

Appl

y

in

g

)

Pull the parkin

g

brake lever

f

ull

y

up to

immobilise

y

our vehicle.

Parking brake

Releasin

g

)

Pull the parkin

g

brake lever up

g

entl

y

,

press the release button

A

th

e

n l

o

w

e

r th

e

l

ever full

y

.

When the vehicle is bein

g

driven, i

f

the parkin

g

brake is still on or has not been

f

ull

y

released, a

m

essage appears in the screen.

Wh

en par

ki

n

g

on a s

l

ope,

di

rect

y

our

wheels against the kerb, apply the

parkin

g

brake, en

g

a

g

e a

g

ear or place

the

g

ear lever in position

P

f

o

r v

e

hi

c

l

es

f

itted with a CVT

g

earbox, and switch

o

ff the i

g

nition

(

"

O

FF" mode

)

.

111

4

Driving

5-speed manual

gearbox

)

Push the

g

ear lever to the ri

g

ht then

back

w

a

r

ds

.

E

n

g

a

gi

n

g

reverse

g

ear

6-speed manual

gearbox

)

Move the lever full

y

to the ri

g

ht to en

g

a

g

e

5

t

h

or

6

t

h

gear

.

E

n

g

a

gi

n

g

reverse

g

ear

)

R

a

i

se t

h

e r

i

n

g

un

d

er t

h

e

k

no

b

an

d

move

the gear lever to the le

f

t then

f

orwards.

E

n

g

a

gi

n

g

5

t

h

or 6

t

h

gear

Onl

y

en

g

a

g

e reverse

g

ear when the

ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s stat

i

onar

y

w

i

t

h

t

h

e en

gi

ne at

idl

e.

A

s a sa

f

et

y

precaution and to

f

acilitate

s

tarting o

f

the engine:

- alwa

y

s select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

O

nl

y

en

g

a

g

e reverse

g

ear when the

vehicle is stationar

y

with the en

g

ine at idle.

As a sa

f

et

y

precaution and to

f

acilitate

s

tartin

g

o

f

the en

g

ine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

112

Driving

Gear shift indicator *

S

ystem which reduces

f

uel consumption by advising the driver to change up on vehicles

f

itted with a manual gearbox.

O

p

eration

*

Accordin

g

to en

g

ine.

Th

e s

y

m

b

o

l

appears

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

ane

l

su

gg

est

i

n

g

t

h

at

y

ou c

h

an

g

e up.

In the case o

f

drivin

g

which makes

p

articular demands on the

p

er

f

ormance

o

f

the engine

(f

irm pressure on the

accelerator pedal,

f

or example, when

overtakin

g

...

)

, the s

y

stem will not

recommend a

g

ear chan

g

e.

The s

y

stem never su

gg

ests:

- en

g

a

g

in

g

reverse

g

ear,

- en

g

a

gi

n

g

a

l

ower

g

ear.

Th

e s

y

stem

i

ntervenes on

ly

w

h

en

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

e

conom

i

ca

lly

.

D

epen

di

n

g

on t

h

e

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

s

i

tuat

i

on an

d

y

our

vehicle's equipment, the system may advise

y

ou to skip one or more

g

ears. You can

follow this instruction without en

g

a

g

in

g

the

intermediate

g

ears.

The

g

ear recommendations should not

be considered compulsor

y

. In fact, the

c

on

f

i

g

uration o

f

the road, the amount o

f

tra

ff

ic

a

nd sa

f

et

y

remain determinin

g

f

actors when

c

hoosin

g

the best

g

ear. There

f

ore, the driver

r

emains responsible

f

or deciding whether or not

to

f

ollow the advice

g

iven b

y

the s

y

stem.

Thi

s

f

u

n

c

ti

o

n

ca

nn

o

t

be

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

113

4

Driving

Thi

s

g

ear

b

ox

h

as two

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

mo

d

es:

-

a

n

au

t

o

m

a

t

ed

m

ode

fo

r

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

co

ntr

o

l

o

f

the

g

ears b

y

the

g

earbox and there

f

ore

without any action on the part o

f

the driver,

- a manual mode

f

or sequential chan

g

in

g

o

f

the

g

ears b

y

the driver usin

g

the steerin

g

m

ounted controls or the

g

ear lever.

CVT gearbox

It includes the

f

ollowin

g

controls:

- a gear lever

1

o

n th

e

ce

ntr

e

co

n

so

l

e

fo

r

s

electin

g

the drivin

g

mode, reverse

g

ear

and neutral or for chan

g

in

g

ear in manual

mode,

-

a

"-"

steer

i

n

g

mounte

d

contro

l

pa

ddl

e

2

fo

r

m

anual downward gear changes,

-

a

"

+/OFF" steerin

g

mounted control

p

addle

3

for manual upward

g

ear chan

g

es.

The six-speed automatic

g

earbox offers a choice between the comfort of automatic re

g

ulation or the pleasure of manual

g

ear chan

g

in

g

.

The mode can be chan

g

ed at an

y

time.

114

Driving

Gear lever

p

ositions

P

: park.

Immobilisation of the vehicle, parkin

g

brake

a

pp

li

e

d

or not.

R

:

re

v

erse

gear

.

With the vehicle stationar

y

, keep

y

our

f

oot

on t

h

e

b

ra

k

e pe

d

a

l

an

d

pus

h

t

h

e

g

ear

l

eve

r

fo

rw

a

r

ds

.

N: n

eu

tr

a

l.

D

: drivin

g

in automated mode.

M

o

v

e

th

e

l

e

v

e

r

bac

kw

a

r

ds

t

o

se

l

ec

t thi

s

m

ode

.

+

/

-: manual mode with sequential

g

ear

ch

an

gi

n

g

.

Move the lever backwards, then to the le

f

t to

s

e

l

ect t

hi

s mo

d

e, t

h

en:

- push

f

orward to chan

g

e up,

- pull backward to change down.

+

:

g

ear chan

g

in

g

in manual mode.

Pr

ess

be

hin

d

th

e

"

+/OFF" steerin

g

mounted

c

ontrol paddle to chan

g

e up.

-

:

g

ear c

h

an

gi

n

g

i

n manua

l

mo

d

e.

P

r

ess

behi

n

d

t

he

"-"

steer

i

n

g

mounte

d

contro

l

pa

ddl

e to c

h

an

g

e

d

own.

Functions of the steerin

g

m

ounted control

p

addles

Press the brake pedal firml

y

while

s

tartin

g

the en

g

ine

.

Movin

g

off

)

Start the en

g

ine.

From position

P

, parking brake applied:

P

Press the brake pedal firml

y

to

re

l

ease t

h

e

g

ear

l

ever

.

)

S

elect

f

irst

g

ear

(

position

D

or

+/-

) or

r

everse

(

position

R

).

R

"

D"

or

"

1"

or

"

R" appear in the instrument

p

anel screen.

)

Release the parkin

g

brake, the vehicle

mo

v

es

o

ff

o

n it

s

o

wn.

115

4

Driving

Stoppin

g

- Startin

g

on a slope

I

t is essential to use the parkin

g

brake to

hold the vehicle on a slo

p

e and not the

a

cce

l

erator

p

e

d

a

l.

Wh

en start

i

n

g

on a s

l

ope, acce

l

erate

g

ra

d

ua

lly

w

hil

e re

l

eas

i

n

g

t

h

e par

ki

n

g

b

ra

k

e.

Manual mode

)

Select position +

/

-

.

)

Use the steerin

g

mounted controls or the

g

ear lever to chan

g

e

g

ear.

Th

e

g

ears en

g

a

g

e

d

appear

i

n success

i

on

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen.

Th

e

g

ear c

h

an

g

e

i

nstruct

i

ons are on

ly

carr

i

e

d

out i

f

the engine speed permits it.

You can chan

g

e

g

ear without takin

g

y

our

f

oot

off the accelerator pedal.

When deceleratin

g

, the

g

earbox chan

g

es down

a

utomaticall

y

.

With the vehicle stationar

y

, first

g

ear is

en

g

a

g

e

d

.

Automated mode

)

Select position

D

.

"

D" appears in the instrument panel screen.

The

g

earbox operates in auto-active mode,

without an

y

action on the part o

f

the driver.

I

t cont

i

nuous

ly

se

l

ects t

h

e

g

ear most su

i

te

d

to

th

e

co

n

d

iti

o

n

s

of

:

- driving style,

- road characteristics,

- v

e

hi

c

l

e

l

oad

.

To optimise drivin

g

comfort and obtain the most

s

uitable

g

ear, avoid sharp variations in the

pressure on the accelerator pedal.

F

or t

h

e

b

est acce

l

erat

i

on, w

h

en

overtakin

g

another vehicle,

f

or example,

press

f

irml

y

on the accelerator

g

oin

g

beyond the point o

f

resistance.

116

Driving

M

anua

l

g

ear c

h

an

gi

n

g

I

n t

h

e automate

d

mo

d

e,

y

ou can ta

k

e ove

r

c

ontro

l

temporar

ily

at an

y

t

i

me us

i

n

g

t

h

e

s

teer

i

n

g

mounte

d

contro

l

s.

The use o

f

these controls

p

ermits manual

s

election o

f

the

g

ears in situations which

r

equire a faster chan

g

e down than that offered

in automated mode

(

arrival at a roundabout,

e

xit from a car park with a steep

g

radient,

overtakin

g

...

)

.

The

g

earbox en

g

a

g

es the

g

ear requested i

f

t

h

e en

gi

ne spee

d

perm

i

ts

i

t.

Th

e

g

ear en

g

a

g

e

d

appears

.

To return to the automated mode, do one o

f

the

f

ollowin

g

:

- press the back of the

"

+/OFF" steerin

g

mou

nt

ed

co

ntr

o

l

3

for approximatel

y

2 seconds,

- move the

g

ear lever quickl

y

towards

p

os

i

t

i

on

+/

- an

d

t

h

en return

i

t to pos

i

t

i

on

D

,

- stop t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e.

Stoppin

g

the vehicle Operatin

g

fault

With the i

g

nition on, if the messa

g

e "Slow

down"

o

r

"

Service re

q

uired" appears in

the instrument panel screen, this indicates a

g

earbox mal

f

unction.

Wh

en a messa

g

e

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

, carr

y

out t

h

e

f

ollowin

g

operations:

- slow down and stop

y

our vehicle in a sa

f

e

p

lace,

- place the lever in position

P

a

n

d

l

e

t th

e

n

g

ine run,

- open the bonnet to allow the en

g

ine to cool.

If the messa

g

e disappears for a lon

g

period,

y

ou can set o

ff

a

g

ain.

I

f

the messa

g

e remains displa

y

ed or appears

frequentl

y

, contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop without dela

y

.

Before switchin

g

off the en

g

ine,

y

ou must place

the

g

ear lever in position

P

.

P

Y

ou must app

ly

t

h

e par

ki

n

g

b

ra

k

e to

i

mmo

bili

se

t

he

v

ehicle

.

117

4

Driving

Emer

g

enc

y

release

I

f

the batter

y

is dischar

g

ed or i

f

the

g

ear lever

lockin

g

mechanism is dama

g

ed, it is possible

for the

g

ear lever to be locked in position

P

,

P

e

ven when

y

ou press the brake pedal firml

y

.

However, i

f

y

ou have to move the vehicle,

r

elease the

g

ear lever usin

g

the followin

g

p

rocedure:

)

Appl

y

the parkin

g

brake.

)

Switch off the en

g

ine if necessar

y

.

)

R

emove t

h

e cap

A

, usin

g

a

f

lat screwdriver

co

v

e

r

ed

w

i

t

h

a

clo

t

h

.

)

Press the brake pedal

f

irml

y

.

)

Put the ignition switch into position A

CC

(

A

CC

mode, i

f

y

ou vehicle has the Ke

y

less

Entr

y

and Startin

g

s

y

stem

)

.

)

Insert the screwdriver into the aperture.

)

While pushin

g

the screwdriver downwards,

move the

g

ear lever to position

N

.

Y

ou must contact a CITROËN dealer

o

r a qualified workshop to have the

s

y

stem checked .

118

Driving

Hill start assist

S

y

stem which keeps

y

our vehicle immobilised

temporaril

y

(

approximatel

y

2 seconds

)

when

s

tartin

g

on a

g

radient, the time it takes to

m

ove

y

our foot from the brake pedal to the

a

cce

l

erator pe

d

a

l

.

This

f

unction is onl

y

active when:

- t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s comp

l

ete

ly

stat

i

onar

y

, w

i

t

h

your

f

oot on the brake pedal,

- when certain conditions o

f

g

radient are

m

et,

- with th

e

d

riv

e

r’

s

doo

r

c

l

osed

.

Th

e

hill

s

t

a

rt

ass

i

s

t f

u

n

c

ti

o

n

ca

nn

o

t

be

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

On an ascendin

g

slope, with the vehicle

s

tationar

y

, the vehicle is held for a brief

m

oment when

y

ou release the brake pedal

:

- if

y

ou are in first

g

ear or neutral with a

manua

l

g

ear

b

ox,

- i

f

y

ou are in position

D

with th

e

C

VT

g

ear

b

ox.

O

p

eration

On a descendin

g

slope, with the vehicle

stationar

y

and reverse

g

ear en

g

a

g

ed, the

v

ehicle is held for a brief moment when

y

ou

r

e

l

ease t

h

e

b

ra

k

e

p

e

d

a

l.

D

o not

l

eave t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e w

hil

e

i

t

i

s

b

e

i

n

g

h

e

ld

i

n t

h

e

hill

start ass

i

st

ph

ase.

I

f

you need to leave the vehicle while

the en

g

ine is runnin

g

, appl

y

the parkin

g

b

r

a

k

e

.

Operatin

g

fault

If a fault occurs with the s

y

stem, this warnin

g

l

amp comes on, accompan

i

e

d

by

a messa

g

e

in the instrument panel screen.

C

ontact a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a

q

ualified worksho

p

to

h

ave the system checked.

Wh

en t

h

e en

gi

ne

i

s not runn

i

n

g

,

i

nc

l

u

di

n

g

per

i

o

d

s on stan

dby

w

i

t

h

the

S

top

&

S

tart

(

A

S&G)

s

y

stem, the

f

unction is not o

p

erative.

119

4

Driving

Stop & Start (Auto Stop & Go) function

O

p

eration

Goin

g

into en

g

ine STOP mode

The

"

AS&G" warn

i

n

g

l

amp comes on

i

n

t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

or t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

ane

l

screen an

d

t

h

e en

gi

ne

g

oes

i

nto

s

tandby a

f

ter a

f

ew seconds:

- with a manual

g

earbo

x

, with the vehicle

s

tationar

y

and

y

our foot on the brake, when

y

ou put the

g

ear lever into neutral and

r

e

l

ease t

h

e c

l

utc

h

pe

d

a

l

.

Never re

f

uel with the en

g

ine in

S

T

O

P

m

ode;

y

ou must switch off the i

g

nition

with the ke

y

or the START/ST

O

P button.

Wh

en t

h

e en

gi

ne

i

s stoppe

d

a

utomatically, the operation o

f

certain

vehicle s

y

stems, such as

f

or example,

brakin

g

, power steerin

g

... are modified.

T

ake car

e

.

S

p

ecial cases: STOP mode not

a

va

il

a

bl

e

S

T

O

P mode is not invoked when:

- the driver's seat belt is not

f

astened,

- t

h

e

b

onnet

i

s o

p

en,

- the vehicle has not exceeded 3 m

p

h

(

5 km

/

h

)

since the last en

g

ine start,

- th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

h

as

r

es

t

a

rt

ed

l

ess

th

a

n

10

seconds a

g

o,

- the en

g

ine is needed to maintain a

c

omfortable temperature in the passen

g

er

c

ompartment,

-

d

em

i

st

i

n

g

i

s act

i

ve,

- some special conditions

(

batter

y

char

g

e,

e

ngine temperature, braking assistance,

ambient temperature...

)

where the en

g

ine is

n

eeded to assure control of a s

y

stem.

- th

e

"AS

&

G" warnin

g

lamp is

flashin

g

in the instrument panel.

This operation is perfectl

y

normal

.

The Stop & Start

(

Auto Stop & Go

)

function puts the en

g

ine temporaril

y

into standb

y

durin

g

stops in the traffic

(

red li

g

hts, traffic

j

ams, or other...

)

. The

e

n

g

ine restarts automaticall

y

as soon as

y

ou want to move off. The restart takes place instantl

y

, quickl

y

and silentl

y

.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start

(

Auto Stop & Go

)

function reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when

s

tationar

y

.

120

Driving

Th

e

"

AS&G" warnin

g

lamp

g

oes of

f

an

d

t

h

e en

gi

ne starts automat

i

ca

lly

:

-

with a manual

g

earbo

x

, when

y

ou

f

ull

y

depress the clutch pedal.

For safet

y

reasons or to ensure smooth

operation,

S

TART mode is invoked

automat

i

ca

lly

w

h

en:

Special cases: START invoked

automaticall

y

- the speed o

f

the vehicle exceeds 2 mph

(

3 km

/

h

)

,

- some special conditions

(

batter

y

char

g

e,

e

ngine temperature, braking assistance,

ambient temperature...

)

where the en

g

ine is

needed to assure control of a s

y

stem.

If the s

y

stem has been deactivated in

S

T

O

P mode, the en

g

ine will not start.

A

t an

y

time, press the "AS&G OFF"

s

wit

c

h t

o

deactivate the s

y

stem.

Deactivation

I

n t

his

case

t

he

"

AS&G" warn

i

n

g

l

amp

f

lashes

f

or

f

ew seconds, then goes o

ff

.

T

his operation is perfectl

y

normal

.

This is con

f

irmed b

y

the

"

AS&G OFF"

w

arn

i

n

g

l

amp com

i

n

g

on

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

ane

l

or

i

nstrument

p

ane

l

screen.

121

4

Driving

Th

e s

y

stem

i

s react

i

vate

d

automat

i

ca

lly

at every new start using the key or the

S

TART

/S

T

O

P button.

Reactivation

Pr

ess

th

e

"

AS

&

G OFF" switch a

g

ain.

The s

y

stem is active a

g

ain; this is confirmed b

y

th

e

"AS&G OFF" warnin

g

lamp

g

oin

g

off in the

instrument panel or instrument panel screen.

Operatin

g

fault

In the event o

f

a mal

f

unction with the system,

th

e

"

AS

&

G OFF" warnin

g

lamp

f

lashes in the

i

nstrument panel or instrument panel screen,

a

nd the s

y

stem no lon

g

er operates.

have it checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

This s

y

stem requires a speci

f

ic

batter

y

with a special speci

f

ication

and technology

(

re

f

erence numbers

available from a CITROËN dealer or

a qualified workshop

)

.

Fitting a battery not listed by CITROËN

introduces the risk o

f

mal

f

unction o

f

the s

y

stem.

Maintenance

The "Auto Stop & Go" s

y

stem makes

u

se of advanced technolo

gy

. All work

on this t

y

pe o

f

batter

y

must be done

onl

y

b

y

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

o

p

.

In the event o

f

a

f

ault in

S

T

O

P mode, the

vehicle may stall. The

f

ollowing warning lamps

c

ome on in the instrument panel or instrument

p

anel screen:

It is then necessar

y

to switch o

ff

the i

g

nition,

then restart the en

g

ine usin

g

the ke

y

or the

S

TART

/S

T

O

P button.

122

Driving

Four wheel drive system

S

y

stem which permits the selection of a transmission mode in relation to the drivin

g

conditions.

Three transmission modes are available and can be selected manuall

y

b

y

the driver in accordance with his requirements.

You can chan

g

e transmission mode when

s

tationar

y

or while drivin

g

.

The transmission mode can be selected b

y

turnin

g

the control

A

.

Selectin

g

the transmission

m

ode

4WD AUTO

(

position 1

)

The vehicle operates with four wheel drive and

provides optimum traction

f

or all levels o

f

g

rip.

Thi

s

i

s t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s norma

l

an

d

re

g

u

l

ar

operatin

g

mode, the distribution o

f

the torque

be

tw

ee

n th

e

f

r

o

nt

a

n

d

r

ea

r

a

xl

es

i

s

co

ntr

o

ll

ed

automaticall

y

.

The distribution favours the front wheels,

the transfer of torque to the rear wheels is

mana

g

ed electronicall

y

b

y

the control unit

in relation to the level of

g

rip, so providin

g

opt

i

mum roa

d

h

o

ldi

n

g

.

4WD LOCK

(

position 2

)

The vehicle operates with

f

our wheel drive in

t

his

m

ode

also

.

It is recommended when grip is particularly

poor or di

ff

icult

(

sand, mud, slopes, ...

)

.

2WD

(

position 3

)

The vehicle operates with front two wheel drive.

Thi

s

i

s

su

it

ab

l

e

fo

r

use

o

n

a

t

a

rm

ac

r

oads

or

w

he

r

e

t

he

d

r

i

v

e

r

co

n

side

r

s

t

ha

t t

he

r

e

is

n

o

r

isk

o

f

loss o

f

g

rip

(

dr

y

road

)

.

D

ispla

y

in the instrument panel

The transmission mode is displa

y

ed in the

form of an intermittent displa

y

in the instrument

p

ane

l

screen w

h

en t

h

e transm

i

ss

i

on mo

d

e

i

s

selec

t

ed

.

Th

e

se

l

ec

ti

o

n

of

thi

s

m

ode

i

s

recommended when the level of

g

rip

permits.

123

4

Driving

A

s the en

g

ine torque is applied to all

f

our wheels, the condition o

f

the t

y

res

h

as a cons

id

era

bl

e

i

mpact on t

h

e

p

er

f

ormance o

f

the vehicle.

Ensure that all

f

our tyres are in good

co

n

d

iti

o

n.

A

void drivin

g

the vehicle in sand

y

or

m

udd

y

areas or in other areas in which

the wheels could spin.

Spinnin

g

the wheels places the

transm

i

ss

i

on components un

d

e

r

p

ressure an

d

cou

ld

cause a ser

i

ous

ma

l

fu

n

c

ti

o

n.

Do not drive the vehicle through deep

w

a

t

e

r.

A

void drivin

g

over excessivel

y

uneven

terrain

(

risk of scrapin

g

under the bod

y

or of

g

roundin

g

on crossin

g

a brid

g

e

)

.

Operatin

g

faults

I

f

the selected transmission mode displa

y

f

lashes, the vehicle switches automaticall

y

to

f

r

o

nt

"

2WD" tr

a

n

s

mi

ss

i

o

n m

ode

.

It is then no lon

g

er possible to select the

transmission mode usin

g

the control A .

If the messa

g

e "SL

O

W D

O

WN" is displa

y

ed on

the instrument panel, let the transmission cool

down then wait for the displa

y

to clear before

s

ettin

g

o

ff

a

g

ain.

I

f

"4WD" and "L

OC

K" are displa

y

ed alternatel

y

and i

f

"

S

ERVI

C

E RE

Q

UIRED" is displa

y

ed in

the instrument panel, the system has

f

ailed and

the sa

f

et

y

s

y

stem has been activated.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop without dela

y

.

Have your vehicle towed on a

flatbed

.

Th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

m

us

t n

o

t

be

t

o

w

ed

with th

e

front or rear wheels on the

g

round even

if it is in front "2WD"

(

2 wheel drive

)

m

ode

.

124

Driving

Cruise control

S

y

stem which automaticall

y

maintains the vehicle speed at the value pro

g

rammed b

y

the driver, without an

y

action on the accelerator pedal.

The

c

r

uise

co

ntr

ol

is

sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on manua

lly

:

the vehicle s

p

eed must be at least 25 m

p

h

(

40 km

/

h

)

and second gear or higher must be

e

n

g

a

g

ed in the case o

f

a manual

g

earbox.

Th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l i

s

switched off

manually, by

f

a

n action on the brake or clutch pedal or i

f

the

A

SC s

y

stem is tri

gg

ered.

The pro

g

rammed speed can be exceeded

temporaril

y

b

y

pressin

g

the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control cannot, in any

c

ircumstances, take the

p

lace o

f

the

n

eed to compl

y

with speed limits or of the

vi

g

ilance and responsibilit

y

of the driver.

The controls o

f

this s

y

stem are

g

rouped

to

g

et

h

er on t

h

e steer

i

n

g

w

h

ee

l

.

1.

"

ON/OFF"

bu

tt

o

n:

ac

tiv

a

ti

o

n

/

deac

tiv

a

ti

o

n

of

th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l m

ode

.

2

.

"

COA

S

T

S

ET" button: store a drivin

g

s

peed and decrease the cruisin

g

speed.

3.

"

ACC RES" button: increase the cruisin

g

s

peed and recall the stored speed.

4.

"C

AN

C

EL" button: stop control of the

ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s spee

d

.

Steerin

g

mounted controls

Wh

en

y

ou press

b

utton

1

, t

h

e "CRUISE"

i

n

di

cator comes on

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

.

Di

sp

l

a

y

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

Pro

g

rammin

g

)

Pr

ess

bu

tt

o

n

1

.

)

S

et the pro

g

rammed speed b

y

acceleratin

g

to

the required speed, then press button

2

"COAST

SET"

.

To return to the pro

g

rammed speed, simpl

y

r

elease the accelerator pedal.

Switchin

g

off the i

g

nition cancels an

y

p

ro

g

rammed speed value.

125

4

Driving

I

ncreas

i

n

g

t

h

e pro

g

ramme

d

s

p

eed

D

ecreas

i

n

g

t

h

e

pro

g

rammed speed

Temporar

y

acceleration

/

d

eceleration

Temporar

y

acceleration

Press the accelerator pedal as normal. When

the pedal is released,

y

ou return to the stored

s

pee

d

.

)

U

s

i

n

g

b

utton 2 "COA

S

T

S

ET"

:

- successive

p

resses decrease the s

p

eed in

s

teps o

f

approximatel

y

1 mph

(

1.6 km

/

h

)

.

- a maintained press of this button

decreases the speed pro

g

ressivel

y

.

O

nce the speed required has been reached,

r

elease the button, the new speed is stored.

)

U

s

i

n

g

t

h

e

b

ra

k

e pe

d

a

l

:

-

b

ra

k

e to

d

eact

i

vate t

h

e cru

i

se contro

l

, t

h

en

p

ress

b

utton

2

"COA

S

T

S

ET" .

Release

t

o

s

tore the new s

p

eed.

)

U

s

i

n

g

b

utton

3

"ACC RE

S

"

:

- successive

p

resses increase the s

p

eed in

s

teps o

f

approximatel

y

1 mph

(

1.6 km

/

h

)

.

- a maintained press of this button increases

the pro

g

rammed speed pro

g

ressivel

y

.

O

nce the speed required has been reached,

release the button, the new speed is stored.

)

U

s

i

n

g

t

h

e acce

l

erator pe

d

a

l

:

- acce

l

erate to reac

h

t

h

e spee

d

requ

i

re

d

,

t

h

en

p

ress

b

utton

2

"COA

S

T

S

ET"

.

R

elease the button to store the new s

p

eed.

T

emporar

y

d

ece

l

erat

i

on

P

ress t

h

e

b

ra

k

e pe

d

a

l

to re

d

uce t

h

e spee

d

.

T

o

return to t

h

e store

d

spee

d

, press

b

utton

3

"ACC

RE

S

"

.

126

Driving

When the cruise control is in operation,

pa

y

attention i

f

y

ou press and hold one

of

the pro

g

rammed speed ad

j

ustment

b

uttons: t

hi

s can resu

l

t

i

n a ver

y

rap

id

c

hange in the speed o

f

your vehicle.

D

o

n

o

t

use

th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l

o

n

s

lipper

y

roads or in heav

y

traffic.

O

n a steep descent, the cruise control

will not be able to prevent the vehicle

f

rom exceedin

g

the pro

g

rammed speed.

To prevent the mat

f

rom becomin

g

c

au

gh

t un

d

er t

h

e pe

d

a

l

s:

- ensure t

h

at t

h

e mat

i

s

p

os

i

t

i

one

d

c

orrectly,

- never

f

it one mat on top o

f

another.

T

o

deac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l:

)

press the brak

e

or

c

lutch pedal, or

)

press button 1 "ON OFF"

,

or

)

press button

4

"

C

AN

C

EL"

.

Deactivatin

g

the function Reactivatin

g

the function

Wh

e

n th

e

c

r

u

i

se

co

ntr

o

l h

as

bee

n

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

u

sin

g

the button

4

"CANCEL" ,

y

ou can return

to the stored speed b

y

pressin

g

button

3

"ACC

RES" when

y

ou reach a minimum speed o

f

2

5 mph

(

40 km/h

)

.

The cruise control ma

y

be deactivated

a

utomaticall

y

:

)

when the vehicle reaches a speed below

20 mph

(

35 km/h

)

,

)

w

h

en t

h

e act

i

ve sta

bili

t

y

contro

l

s

y

stem

(

A

SC)

comes into operation.

127

4

Driving

Parking sensors

This function cannot, in an

y

c

ircumstances, take the place of the

vi

g

ilance and responsibilit

y

of the driver.

Rear parkin

g

sensors

This s

y

stem indicates the proximit

y

of an

obstacle

(

person, vehicle, tree,

g

ate, etc.

)

which

co

m

es

within th

e

f

i

e

l

d

of

de

t

ec

ti

o

n

of

se

n

so

r

s

l

ocate

d

i

n t

h

e

b

um

p

er.

C

ertain types o

f

obstacle

(

stake, roadworks

c

one, etc.

)

detected initiall

y

will no lon

g

er be

de

t

ec

t

ed

a

t th

e

n

d

o

f th

e

m

a

n

oeu

vr

e

due

t

o

the presence of blind spots.

Audible assistance

The proximity in

f

ormation is given by an

intermittent audible si

g

nal, the

f

requenc

y

o

f

which increases as the vehicle approaches the

obs

t

ac

l

e

.

Wh

e

n th

e

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

be

tw

ee

n th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

a

n

d

the obstacle becomes less than approximatel

y

t

hi

rt

y

cent

i

metres, t

h

e au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

b

ecomes

co

nt

i

n

uous

.

The s

y

stem is switched on b

y

en

g

a

g

in

g

reverse

g

ear. This is accompanied b

y

an audible si

g

nal.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on to

c

onfirm that the s

y

stem is active.

Th

e s

y

stem

i

s

d

eact

i

vate

d

w

h

en

y

ou come out

o

f

reverse

g

ear.

128

Driving

V

ehicle onl

y

Vehicle fitted with a towbar

Modiﬁ cation of the detection

zones

)

P

ress t

hi

s

b

utton to

d

eact

i

vate t

h

e s

y

stem.

)

Press this button again

f

or a

f

ew seconds

a

n

d

r

e

l

ease

it.

Th

e

de

t

ec

ti

o

n z

o

n

e

m

od

ifi

ca

ti

o

n inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n i

s

indicated b

y

an audible si

g

nal:

-

d

oubl

e

si

g

nal on vehicles fitted with a

towbar

,

-

s

i

n

gle

s

ig

na

l

on ve

hi

c

l

es w

hi

c

h

are not

f

itt

ed

with

a

t

o

w

ba

r.

D

etection zones

The detection zones di

ff

er depending on whether the vehicle is

f

itted with a towbar.

I

f

y

ou select towbar mode, the towbar zone A i

s

e

x

c

l

uded

f

r

o

m th

e

de

t

ec

ti

o

n z

o

n

es

.

129

4

Driving

V

isual assistance

Front parkin

g

sensors

Deactivation / Activation of the

f

ront and rear parkin

g

sensors

The

f

unction is deactivated b

y

pressin

g

this

button. The indicator lamp in the button goes

off

.

Pressin

g

this button a

g

ain reactivates the

function. The indicator lamp in the button

co

m

es

o

n.

Operatin

g

fault

The

f

ront parkin

g

sensors are tri

gg

ered when

an obstacle is detected in

f

ront, a

g

ear is

e

ngaged

(

position

D

f

or vehicles with a

C

VT

g

earbox

)

and the speed o

f

the vehicle remains

below 6 mph

(

10 km/h

)

.

The front parkin

g

sensors are interrupted i

f

the vehicle stops for more than five seconds

in forward

g

ear, if no further obstacles are

detected or when the speed o

f

the vehicle

e

xceeds 6 mph

(

10 km

/

h

)

.

Remember to deactivate the s

y

stem i

f

towin

g

a trailer or caravan.

In bad weather or in winter

,

ensure that

the sensors are not covered with mud

,

ice

o

r

s

n

o

w.

Wh

en t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s mov

i

n

g

at a spee

d

below 6 mph

(

10 km

/

h

)

, certain sound

s

ources

(

motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic

drill, etc.

)

ma

y

tri

gg

er the audible

s

i

g

nals of the parkin

g

sensor s

y

stem.

In the event o

f

an problem, when reverse

g

ea

r

is en

g

a

g

ed this lamp in the button

f

lashes,

accompan

i

e

d

by

an au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

.

Thi

s supp

l

ements t

h

e au

dibl

e

sig

na

l

by

di

sp

l

a

yi

n

g

b

ars

i

n t

h

e

s

creen, in

f

ront o

f

or behind the

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

If one of the sensors is fault

y

, it

flashes in the instrument panel

sc

r

ee

n.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified

workshop.

Th

ese

ba

r

s

fl

as

h

a

t th

e

s

t

a

rt

o

f th

e

m

a

n

oeu

vr

e

th

e

n

beco

m

e

fix

ed

fr

o

m

a

ce

rt

a

in

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

be

tw

ee

n th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

a

n

d

th

e

obs

t

ac

l

e

.

130

Driving

Reversing camera

Linked with the navi

g

ation option, the reversin

g

c

amera comp

l

ements t

h

e par

ki

n

g

sensor

sy

stem an

d

i

s act

i

vate

d

automat

i

ca

lly

w

h

en

r

everse

g

ear

i

s en

g

a

g

e

d

.

The colour ima

g

e is provided on the navi

g

ation

sc

r

ee

n with in

d

i

ca

ti

o

n

o

f th

e

limit

o

f th

e

r

ea

r

bumper and o

f

the

g

eneral direction o

f

the

v

ehicle

.

131

5

Visibility

Lighting controls

S

talk

f

or selecting and switching the vehicle's

front and rear exterior lamps.

Main li

g

htin

g

The various

f

ront and rear lam

p

s o

f

the vehicle

a

re desi

g

ned to adapt the li

g

htin

g

pro

g

ressivel

y

i

n r

e

l

a

ti

o

n t

o

th

e

c

lim

a

ti

c

co

n

d

iti

o

n

s

a

n

d

so

ensure the best visibilit

y

for the driver:

- sidelamps, to be seen,

-

di

ppe

d

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amps to see w

i

t

h

out

d

azz

li

n

g

ot

h

er

d

r

i

vers,

- ma

i

n

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amps to see c

l

ear

ly

w

h

en

th

e

r

oad

i

s

c

l

ea

r.

Additional li

g

htin

g

O

ther lam

p

s are

p

rovided to

f

ul

f

il the

requirements of particular drivin

g

conditions:

- a rear fo

g

lamp to be seen from a distance,

- front fo

g

lamps for even better visibilit

y

,

- da

y

time runnin

g

lamps to be seen durin

g

t

h

e

d

a

y

.

In some weather conditions

(

e.

g

. low

temperature or humidit

y)

, the presence

o

f mistin

g

on the internal surface of the

g

lass o

f

the headlamps and rear lamps

is normal; it disappears a

f

ter the lamps

h

a

v

e

bee

n

o

n

fo

r

a

fe

w min

u

t

es

.

O

ther li

g

htin

g

functions are also available:

-

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

ill

u

min

a

ti

o

n

of

h

eadlamps,

-

g

u

id

e-me-

h

ome

ligh

t

i

n

g

,

- we

l

come

ligh

t

i

n

g

.

When usin

g

y

our vehicle in a countr

y

th

a

t

d

riv

es

o

n th

e

o

th

e

r

s

i

de

o

f th

e

road, the headlamps must be ad

j

usted

to avo

id

d

azz

li

n

g

on-com

i

n

g

d

r

i

vers.

Co

nt

ac

t

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

132

Visibility

Model without AUTO li

g

htin

g

Model with AUTO li

g

htin

g

Manual controls

Th

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

i

s contro

ll

e

d

di

rect

ly

by

t

h

e

d

r

i

ve

r

b

y means o

f

the ring

A

a

n

d

th

e

s

t

a

lk B .

Lamps o

ff

.

A

utomatic illumination o

f

headlamps.

S

idelamps.

Di

ppe

d

h

ea

dl

amps or ma

i

n

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amps.

Displa

y

s

Illumination o

f

the correspondin

g

indicato

r

lam

p

in the instrument

p

anel con

f

irms that the

li

g

htin

g

selected is on.

A.

M

a

i

n

ligh

t

i

n

g

mo

d

e se

l

ect

i

on r

i

n

g

: turn

i

t

to position the symbol required

f

acing the

m

a

rk.

B.

S

talk

f

or switchin

g

headlamps: pull the stalk

towar

d

s

y

ou to sw

i

tc

h

t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

b

etween

di

ppe

d

an

d

ma

i

n

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amps.

In the lamps o

ff

and sidelamps modes, the

d

r

i

ver can sw

i

tc

h

on t

h

e ma

i

n

b

eam

h

ea

dl

am

p

s

temporarily

(

"headlamp

f

lash"

)

by maintaining a

p

ull on the stalk.

133

5

Visibility

Model with a rear fo

g

lamp onl

y

rear

f

o

g

lamp

Rotate and release the rin

g

C

:

)

f

o

rw

a

r

ds

a

fir

s

t tim

e

t

o

s

wit

c

h

o

n th

e

fr

o

nt

f

o

g

lamps,

)

fo

rw

a

r

ds

a

seco

n

d

tim

e

t

o

s

wit

c

h

o

n th

e

r

ear

f

o

g

lamp,

)

r

ea

rw

a

r

ds

a

f

ir

s

t tim

e

t

o

s

wit

c

h

off

th

e

r

ea

r

f

o

g

lamp,

)

r

ea

rw

a

r

ds

a

seco

n

d

tim

e

t

o

s

wit

c

h

o

f th

e

front fo

g

lamps.

In

g

ood or rain

y

weather, both da

y

and ni

g

ht, the front fo

g

lamps and the

rear fo

g

lamps are prohibited. In these

s

ituations, the power o

f

their beams

ma

y

d

azz

l

e ot

h

er

d

r

i

vers.

Do not

f

or

g

et to switch o

ff

the

f

ront

f

o

g

lamps and the rear

f

o

g

lamps when

they are no longer necessary.

M

odel with front fo

g

lamps and

a

rear fo

g

lamp

Fo

g

lamp selection rin

g

.

The

y

operate if at least the sidelamps are on.

)

To switch on the rear fo

g

lamp, turn the

r

in

g

C

f

o

rw

a

r

ds

.

)

To switch off the rear fo

g

lamp, turn the

ri

n

g

C

r

ea

rw

a

r

ds

.

front and rear fo

g

lamps

Li

g

htin

g

on reminder

An audible signal when the driver's door

is o

p

ened warns the driver i

f

the vehicle

l

i

g

htin

g

is on, with the i

g

nition off.

Switchin

g

off the li

g

htin

g

stops the

audible si

g

nal.

134

Visibility

The sensitivit

y

o

f

the automatic illumination

o

f

headlamps can be con

f

i

g

ured via the

c

olour screen "E

q

ui

p

ment" menu.

In

f

oggy weather or in snow, the

sunshine sensor ma

y

detect su

ff

icient

l

i

g

ht. The li

g

htin

g

will not come on

a

utomaticall

y

.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, the

a

ssociated functions will no lon

g

er be

co

ntr

olled

.

Automatic switchin

g

off

Wh

en t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

contro

l

sta

lk

i

s at

"di

ppe

d

o

r

m

ain beam headlamps", i

f

the ignition switch

is at "L

OC

K" or "A

CC

" or i

f

the ke

y

has been

removed from the i

g

nition switch, the lamps

s

witch off automaticall

y

w

hen the driver's

door is o

p

ened

.

D

a

y

time runnin

g

lamps

D

a

y

t

i

me

ligh

t

i

n

g

w

hi

c

h

comes on automat

i

ca

lly

when the engine is started making the vehicle

mo

r

e

vi

s

i

b

l

e

t

o

th

e

r

use

r

s

.

This

f

unction is assured b

y

special lamps.

The lighting control stalk must be placed in

p

osition "0"

or

"AUTO"

(

da

y

mode

)

.

Automatic illumination of headlam

p

s

Th

e s

id

e

l

am

p

s an

d

t

h

e

dipp

e

d

b

eam

h

ea

dl

am

p

s come

on automatically, without any action on the part o

f

the

driver, i

f

a low level o

f

exterior li

g

ht is detected or i

f

the

wipers are switched on.

When the li

g

ht returns to a sufficient level or the wipers

are switched off, the li

g

htin

g

is switched off automaticall

y

.

Th

e

se

n

so

r i

s

l

oca

t

ed

a

t th

e

base

o

f th

e

win

dsc

r

ee

n.

Contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop to

ad

j

ust the sensitivit

y

o

f

the sensor.

135

5

Visibility

Switchin

g

off

Th

e manua

l

g

u

id

e-me-

h

ome

ligh

t

i

n

g

sw

i

tc

h

es

off

immediatel

y

i

f

y

ou.

-

f

lash the headlamps a

g

ain,

- place the lighting control stalk in another

p

osition,

- switch the i

g

nition on

(

or select "

O

N" mode

for vehicle with the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

M

anual

g

uide-me-home

l

i

g

htin

g

Switchin

g

on

)

Place the li

g

htin

g

control stalk in the "

O

FF"

position, or "AUT

O

"

f

or vehicles that have it.

)

Place the i

g

nition switch on "L

OC

K" and

r

emove the key

(

or select "

O

FF" mode

f

or

vehicles that have the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and

S

tartin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

)

Within one minute after switchin

g

off the

i

g

nition, "flash" the headlamps usin

g

the

l

i

g

htin

g

control stalk.

The headlamps come on

f

or around

30

seco

n

ds

.

)

A

f

urther "headlam

p

f

lash" within

6

0 seconds o

f

switching the ignition to

O

FF

(

or selection o

f

"

O

FF" mode

f

or vehicles

with the "Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

"

sy

stem

)

reactivates the function for a

further

30

seconds.

Temporaril

y

keepin

g

the dipped beam headlamps

on after the vehicle's i

g

nition has been switched

o

ff

makes the exit o

f

the vehicle's occupants easier

w

h

en t

h

e

ligh

t

i

s poor.

The duration of the

g

uide-me-home

ligh

t

i

n

g

can

b

e set

i

n t

h

e co

l

our screen

"E

qu

i

pment

"

menu.

136

Visibility

Exterior welcome lighting

Remote switching on o

f

the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light.

It comes on when the vehicle is unlocked remotel

y

.

Switchin

g

on

)

Place the li

g

htin

g

control in

position "

O

FF" or "AUT

O

".

)

P

ress t

h

e open pa

dl

oc

k

on t

h

e

r

e

m

o

t

e

co

ntr

ol

o

r t

he

elec

tr

o

n

ic

k

e

y

.

The sidelam

p

s come on

f

or about

3

0 seconds. For vehicles

f

itted

with

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

ill

u

min

a

ti

o

n

of

headlamps, the welcome li

g

htin

g

o

nl

y

comes on under conditions

o

f low ambient li

g

ht.

Switchin

g

off

The welcome li

g

htin

g

oes off immediatel

y

if:

-

y

ou press t

h

e open pa

dl

oc

k

on t

h

e remote

c

ontro

l

,

-

y

ou p

l

ace t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

contro

l

i

n anot

h

er

p

osition,

-

y

ou switch on the i

g

nition

(

or select "

O

N"

mode for vehicles fitted with the "Ke

y

less

Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

It is possible to choose the t

y

pe o

f

l

am

p

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on or to

d

eact

i

vate

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n vi

a

th

e

co

l

ou

r

sc

r

ee

n

"E

q

ui

p

ment" menu.

137

5

Visibility

To avoid causin

g

a nuisance to other road

users, the hei

g

ht of the halo

g

en headlamp

beams should be ad

j

usted accordin

g

to the

load

i

n t

he

v

ehicle

.

0

1 or 2 people in the

f

ront seats.

1

5 passen

g

ers

(

includin

g

the driver

)

.

2

5 passengers

(

including the driver

)

+

ma

xim

u

m

au

th

o

ri

sed

l

oad

.

3

Driv

e

r + m

a

xim

u

m

au

th

o

ri

sed

l

oad

.

Manual adjustment of

the headlamp beams

Automatic headlamp adjustment

In cases of malfunction, this messa

g

e

appears in the multifunction screen.

Do not touch the xenon bulbs.

C

ontact

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

op.

O

n vehicles with xenon bulbs: when

stationary

, the system automatically corrects

y

the hei

g

ht of the beam, whatever the load of the

vehicle. The driver is then assured o

f

havin

g

opt

i

mum

ligh

t

i

n

g

an

d

not caus

i

n

g

a nu

i

sance to

o

t

he

r r

oad

use

r

s

.

138

Visibility

f

ront and rear wipin

g

modes

f

or removin

g

rain

a

nd cleanin

g

the screens.

The vehicle's front and rear wipers are

desi

g

ned to improve the driver's visibilit

y

a

ccordin

g

to the climatic conditions.

Wiper controls

Settin

g

s

V

ar

i

ous automat

i

c w

ip

er contro

l

mo

d

es are a

l

so

a

vailable depending on whether the

f

ollowing

options are

f

itted:

- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,

- rear wipin

g

on en

g

a

g

in

g

reverse

g

ear.

Model with intermittent wipin

g

Model with AUTO wipin

g

139

5

Visibility

C

ertain windscreen wi

p

er

f

unctions

(

intermittent operation, ...

)

can be

c

onfi

g

ured via the colour screen

"Equipment" menu.

Manual controls

Windscreen wi

p

ers

B. intermittent operation or rain sensor

s

ensitivit

y

ad

j

ustment rin

g

.

Windscreen wash

Pull the wiper stalk towards

y

ou. The

w

indscreen wash then the wipers operate for a

se

t t

i

m

e

.

Th

e

h

ea

dl

amp was

h

i

s a

l

so act

i

vate

d

i

f the

di

ppe

d

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amps are on

.

Headlam

p

wash

Press the end of the li

g

htin

g

stalk to activate

the headlamp wash, when the dipped beam

h

ea

dl

amps are on.

sin

g

le wipe.

park.

intermittent

(

the speed can be set

manuall

y)

.

or

automat

i

c ra

i

n sens

i

t

i

ve w

ip

ers

(

the speed can be set manually

)

.

s

l

o

w.

f

as

t.

A

.

wipin

g

speed selection stalk:

Y

ou

ca

n in

c

r

ease

o

r

dec

r

ease

:

- the wipin

g

f

requenc

y

when the intermittent

mode is active

,

- the sensitivity o

f

the rain sensor when the

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

m

ode

i

s

ac

tiv

e

.

- "+": hi

g

h sensitivit

y

.

- "-": low sensitivit

y

.

To reduce the consum

p

tion o

f

s

creenwash

f

luid, the headlam

p

washers onl

y

operate with the

f

irst

operation of the screenwash.

140

Visibility

A

utomatic rain sensitive

wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automaticall

y

,

without an

y

action on the part of the driver, if

r

ain is detected

(

sensor behind the rear view

m

irror

)

, adaptin

g

their speed to the intensit

y

o

f

th

e

r

a

in

fa

ll.

Operatin

g

fault

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the

su

n

s

hin

e

se

n

so

r

a

n

d

l

oca

t

ed

in th

e

ce

ntr

e

o

f

t

he

w

i

n

dsc

r

ee

n

behi

n

d

t

he

r

ea

r v

ie

w m

i

rr

o

r.

A

ctivation

)

M

o

v

e

th

e

s

t

a

lk

A

t

o

th

e

"

AUTO" position.

S

witch off the automatic rain sensitive

wipers when usin

g

an automatic ca

r

w

as

h.

To protect the rubber o

f

the wiper, it is

ad

v

isable

t

o

deac

t

i

v

a

t

e

t

he

au

t

o

m

a

t

ic

mo

d

e w

h

en t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s

p

ar

k

e

d

an

d

when the ambient tem

p

erature is

below 0

°

C

.

In winter, it is advisable to wait until

the windscreen is completel

y

clear o

f

ice before activatin

g

the automatic rain

s

ensitive wipers.

Deactivation

)

M

o

v

e

th

e

s

t

a

lk

A

t

o

th

e

"

OFF" position.

141

5

Visibility

Rear wiper

par

k

.

intermittent wi

p

e.

The wi

p

er wi

p

es twice then switches to

int

e

rmitt

e

nt m

ode

.

wi

p

e with screen wash.

Keep the rin

g

in this position to operate the

screen wash with several wipes o

f

the wiper.

The intermittence o

f

the rear wiper can

be confi

g

ured via the colour screen

"Equipment" menu.

C

.

rear wiper selection rin

g

:

142

Visibility

Courtesy lamps

Front courtes

y

lamp

Position 1

The courtesy lamp comes on when a door or

the tail

g

ate is opened.

When the door or the tail

g

ate is closed a

g

ain,

the li

g

htin

g

raduall

y

dims for a few seconds

before switchin

g

off.

However, the courtes

y

lamp is switched of

f

a

utomaticall

y

in the

f

ollowin

g

cases:

-

Wh

en t

h

e

d

oors an

d

t

h

e ta

ilg

ate are c

l

ose

d

a

n

d

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s p

l

ace

d

i

n t

h

e

"ON"

p

osition.

- When the doors and the tail

g

ate are closed

a

nd

y

ou lock the vehicle.

Position 2

The courtesy lamp is permanently o

ff

.

Th

ere are two map rea

di

n

g

l

amps, one on eac

h

s

ide o

f

the courtes

y

lamp.

Press the correspondin

g

lamp lens

A

.

Map readin

g

lamps

The durations of li

g

htin

g

of the front

c

ourtes

y

lamps can be confi

g

ured via

t

h

e co

l

our screen

"E

qu

i

pment

"

menu.

143

5

Visibility

Rear courtes

y

lamp

Position 1 "ON"

The courtes

y

lamp is permanentl

y

on.

Position 2 "●"

The courtes

y

lamp comes on when a door or

the tail

g

ate is opened. When the door or the

tail

g

ate is closed a

g

ain, the li

g

htin

g

raduall

y

dims for a few seconds before switchin

g

off.

However, the courtes

y

lamp is switched off

i

mmediatel

y

in the

f

ollowin

g

cases:

-

Wh

en t

h

e

d

oors an

d

t

h

e ta

ilg

ate are c

l

ose

d

an

d

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s p

l

ace

d

i

n t

h

e

"

ON"

p

osition.

- When the doors and the tail

g

ate are closed

and

y

ou lock the vehicle.

Position 3 "OFF"

The courtes

y

lamp is permanentl

y

off.

Courtes

y

lamps automatic

switch off

The duration o

f

li

g

htin

g

o

f

the rear

c

ourtes

y

lamps can be confi

g

ured via

the colour screen "Equipment" menu.

With the en

g

ine o

ff

, the courtes

y

lamps,

map rea

di

n

g

l

amps an

d

b

oot

l

amp sw

i

tc

h

off

automatically a

f

ter 30 minutes to prevent

dischar

g

in

g

o

f

the batter

y

.

The courtes

y

lamps are switched on a

g

ain i

f

the i

g

nition switch is placed in the "ON"

or

"

A

CC

" position, if

y

ou open then close a doo

r

o

r the tail

g

ate or if

y

ou use the remote control.

144

Visibility

Boot lamp

This comes on automaticall

y

when the boot is

opened and

g

oes o

ff

automaticall

y

when the

boo

t

is

closed

.

Panoramic roof lighting

When active, the panoramic roof li

g

htin

g

comes

on i

f

the i

g

nition switch is placed in the

"

ON"

or

"A

CC

" pos

i

t

i

on.

D

eact

i

vat

i

on

Wh

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s p

l

ace

d

i

n

p

osition

"

ON"

or

"

ACC":

)

Press this button repeatedl

y

until the

li

g

htin

g

oes off.

Settin

g

s

When the i

g

nition switch is placed in

p

osition

"

ON"

or

"

ACC":

)

Press this button repeatedl

y

to obtain the

desired li

g

htin

g

level

(

hi

g

h, medium, low

)

.

145

6

Safety

Direction indicators

)

Left: lower the li

g

htin

g

stalk passin

g

the

p

oint o

f

resistance.

)

Righ

t: ra

i

se t

h

e

ligh

t

i

n

g

sta

lk

pass

i

n

g

t

h

e

p

oint o

f

resistance.

"

Motorwa

y

" function

)

Press briefl

y

upwards or downwards,

without

g

oin

g

be

y

ond the point o

f

r

esistance; the direction indicators will

f

lash

3

tim

es

.

Th

e

f

u

n

c

ti

o

n

ca

n

be

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

vi

a

th

e

c

olour screen "Equipment" menu.

Hazard warning

lamps

A visual warnin

g

b

y

means o

f

the direction

i

n

dica

t

o

r

s

t

o

ale

rt

o

t

he

r r

oad

use

r

s

t

o

a

v

ehicle

b

rea

kd

own, tow

i

n

g

or acc

id

ent.

)

Press this button, the direction indicators

f

l

as

h.

The

y

can operate with the i

g

nition off.

A

utomatic o

p

eration of

hazard warnin

g

lamps

When braking in an emergency, depending on

the deceleration, the hazard warnin

g

lamps

c

ome on automaticall

y

.

The

y

switch off automaticall

y

the first time

y

ou

acce

l

e

r

a

t

e

.

)

You can also switch them off b

y

pressin

g

t

he

bu

tt

o

n.

Horn

A

u

dibl

e warn

i

n

g

s

y

stem to a

l

ert ot

h

er roa

d

users to an

i

mm

i

nent

d

an

g

er.

)

Press the central part o

f

the steerin

g

wh

ee

l.

U

se t

h

e

h

orn mo

d

erate

ly

an

d

on

ly

i

n t

h

e

f

ollowin

g

circumstances:

- immediate danger,

- approachin

g

a location lackin

g

visibilit

y

.

146

Safety

G

roup o

f

supplementar

y

s

y

stems which help

y

ou to obtain optimum brakin

g

in complete

s

afet

y

in emer

g

enc

y

situations:

- anti-lock brakin

g

s

y

stem

(

ABS

)

,

- electronic brake force distribution

(

EBFD

)

.

Braking assistance systems

Anti-lock brakin

g

s

y

stem

a

nd electronic brake force

di

str

ib

ut

i

on

Linked s

y

stems which improve the stabilit

y

and

manoeuvrabilit

y

o

f

y

our vehicle when brakin

g

,

in particular on poor or slipper

y

sur

f

aces.

Activation

The anti-lock braking system is active i

f

the

vehicle speed is hi

g

her than 6 mph

(

10 km

/

h

)

.

It is deactivated when the vehicle speed falls

b

elow 3 mph

(

5 km/h

)

.

The anti-lock brakin

g

s

y

stem comes into

operation automaticall

y

when there is a risk o

f

w

heel

lock

.

Normal operation o

f

the AB

S

ma

y

make itsel

f

elt b

y

sli

g

ht vibration o

f

the brake pedal.

Operatin

g

fault

When the vehicle is stationar

y

I

f

this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by

the indication on the instrument panel screen, it

indicates a malfunction of the anti-lock brakin

g

sy

stem which could result in a loss of control o

f

the vehicle when brakin

g

.

The vehicle retains normal brakin

g

.

Drive care

f

ull

y

at moderate speed and contact

a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop as

s

oon as

p

oss

ibl

e.

When braking in an emergency, press

ver

y

f

irml

y

without releasin

g

the

press

u

re

.

The warnin

g

lamp comes on

f

or a

f

ew

s

econ

d

s w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on

(O

N position

)

. I

f

it does not switch o

ff

or

does not come on, contact a CITROËN

dealer or a quali

f

ied workshop.

147

6

Safety

Wh

en t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s mov

i

n

g

If this warnin

g

lamp comes

on continuousl

y

it indicates a

malfunction of the anti-lock brakin

g

sy

stem which could result in a loss o

f

c

ontrol o

f

the vehicle on brakin

g

.

Th

e two warn

i

n

g

l

amps comes on at t

h

e

s

ame t

i

me an

d

t

h

e two warn

i

n

g

s are

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

a

l

ternate

ly

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument

p

anel screen.

When replacin

g

wheels

(

t

y

res and

rims

)

, ensure that the

y

conform to the

m

a

n

u

f

ac

t

u

r

e

r'

s

r

eco

mm

e

n

da

ti

o

n

s

.

Th

e ve

hi

c

l

e reta

i

ns norma

l

b

ra

ki

n

g

.

Drive care

f

ully at moderate speed and contact

a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop as

s

oon as possible.

I

f

these two warnin

g

lamps come on, linked with

the warnings on the instrument panel screen,

the

y

indicate a mal

f

unction o

f

the electronic

b

r

a

k

e

f

o

r

ce

d

i

s

tri

bu

ti

o

n whi

c

h

cou

l

d

r

esu

lt in

a

l

oss of control of the vehicle on brakin

g

.

You must sto

p

as soon as it is safe to do so

.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

or

k

s

h

op.

148

Safety

A

ssociated s

y

stems which

g

uarantee the directional stabilit

y

o

f

the vehicle within the limits o

f

the laws o

f

ph

y

sics:

- traction control

(

T

C

L

)

,

- active stability control

(

A

SC)

.

Traction control and active stabilit

y

control

Traction control optimises traction to prevent

wheel spin, b

y

actin

g

on the brakes of the

drivin

g

wheels and on the en

g

ine.

A

ctive stabilit

y

control acts on the brake of one

or more w

h

ee

l

s an

d

on t

h

e en

gi

ne to

k

eep t

h

e

ve

hi

c

l

e on t

h

e tra

j

ector

y

requ

i

re

d

by

t

h

e

d

r

i

ver.

Activation

These s

y

stems are activated automaticall

y

each

t

i

m

e

t

he

v

ehicle

is

s

t

a

rt

ed

.

The illumination o

f

this warnin

g

lamp

in the instrument

p

anel indicates

that the A

SC

and T

C

L s

y

stems are

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

D

eact

i

vat

i

on

In exceptional conditions

(

startin

g

a vehicle

which is bo

gg

ed down, stuck in snow, on so

f

t

g

round, ...

)

, it ma

y

be advisable to deactivate

the A

SC

s

y

stem, so that the wheels can move

f

reely and regain grip.

This is indicated b

y

f

lashin

g

o

f

this

sy

mbol on the instrument panel

screen

.

Trajectory control systems

)

Press this button, located to the le

f

t o

f

the

s

teering wheel, until the symbol appears in

the instrument

p

anel screen.

O

p

eration

The

y

operate when the vehicle speed is hi

g

he

r

than 10 mph

(

15 km/h

)

.

The

y

come into operation in the event of a

g

rip

or tra

j

ector

y

problem.

149

6

Safety

R

eact

i

vat

i

on Operatin

g

fault

The illumination o

f

one o

f

these warning lamps

a

ccompanied b

y

a messa

g

e in the instrument

p

anel screen indicates a malfunction of these

s

y

stems.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

orkshop to have the ASC/TCL s

y

stems

checked

.

The A

SC/

T

C

L s

y

stems o

ff

er exceptional

s

a

f

et

y

in normal drivin

g

, but this should

not encoura

g

e the driver to take extra

risks or drive at hi

g

h speed.

The correct functionin

g

of these

sy

stems depends on observation of the

m

a

n

u

f

ac

t

u

r

e

r'

s

r

eco

mm

e

n

da

ti

o

n

s

o

n:

- wheels

(

t

y

res and rims

)

,

-

b

ra

ki

n

g

components,

- e

l

ectron

i

c components,

- assem

bly

an

d

repa

i

r proce

d

ures.

A

f

ter an impact, have these s

y

stems

c

hecked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

)

Press this button a

g

ain to reactivate the

A

SC and TCL s

y

stems.

When the warnin

g

lamp

g

oes off, this indicates

the reactivation of the ASC and TCL s

y

stems.

150

Safety

Seat belts

Th

e

f

r

o

nt

sea

t

be

lt

s

a

r

e

f

itt

ed

with

a

p

retensionin

g

and

f

orce limitin

g

s

y

stem.

This s

y

stem improves safet

y

in the front

s

eats in the event of a front or side impact.

Dependin

g

on the severit

y

of the impact, the

p

retensionin

g

s

y

stem instantl

y

ti

g

htens the seat

belts a

g

ainst the bod

y

o

f

the occupants.

Th

e pretens

i

on

i

n

g

seat

b

e

l

ts are act

i

ve w

h

en

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s on.

The

f

orce limiter reduces the

p

ressure o

f

the

s

eat belt on the chest o

f

the occu

p

ant, so

improvin

g

their protection.

Fastenin

g

)

Pull the strap, then insert the ton

g

ue in the

buc

kl

e

A

.

)

C

heck that the seat belt is

f

astened

c

orrect

ly

by

pu

lli

n

g

t

h

e strap.

Unfastenin

g

)

Pr

ess

th

e

r

ed

bu

tt

o

n

o

n th

e

buc

kl

e

A

.

Hei

g

ht ad

j

ustment

)

To lower the attachment point, press the

co

ntr

o

l

B

and slide the fixin

g

C

do

wn.

)

T

o ra

i

se t

h

e attac

h

ment po

i

nt, press t

h

e

co

ntr

ol

B

and slide the

f

ixin

g

C

u

p

.

151

6

Safety

If th

e

d

riv

e

r

does

n

o

t f

as

t

e

n th

e

ir

sea

t

be

lt

w

ithin one minute after switchin

g

on the

ig

nition, the warnin

g

lamp flashes accompanied

by

an

i

nterm

i

ttent au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

an

d

a

di

sp

l

a

y

on t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

screen.

Th

e warn

i

n

g

l

amp, t

h

e au

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

an

d

t

h

e

display stop a

f

ter approximately 90 seconds

a

n

d

r

e

t

u

rn

u

ntil th

e

d

riv

e

r

fas

t

e

n

s

th

e

ir

sea

t

be

lt.

If th

e

sea

t

be

lt i

s

u

nf

as

t

e

n

ed

while the vehicle

i

s movin

g

,

y

ou are alerted b

y

the same

w

arnin

g

s.

Wh

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on

i

s sw

i

tc

h

e

d

on, t

hi

s warn

i

n

g

l

amp comes on

a

ccompanied by an audible signal

f

or

a

fe

w

seco

n

ds

i

f

th

e

d

riv

e

r h

as

n

o

t

f

as

t

e

n

ed

th

e

ir

sea

t

be

lt.

Front seat belt not fastened /

u

nfastened warnin

g

lamp

F

ront passen

g

er

'

s seat

b

e

l

t

D

r

i

ver

'

s seat

b

e

l

t

When the i

g

nition is switched on, this

warnin

g

lamp comes on the centre

c

onsole panel.

It is accompanied b

y

an audible si

g

nal

f

or a

f

ew

s

econds if the passen

g

er has not fastened their

sea

t

be

lt.

If th

e

sea

t

be

lt i

s

u

nf

as

t

e

n

ed

w

hile the vehicle

i

s movin

g

,

y

ou are alerted b

y

the same

warn

i

n

g

s.

152

Safety

Th

e

sea

t

be

lt f

o

r th

e

ce

ntr

e

r

ea

r

sea

t i

s

fitt

ed

in

th

e

r

oo

f.

It has three anchora

g

e points and a reel.

Fittin

g

the belt

)

Pull out the belt and pass it throu

g

h the belt

g

uide A

.

)

Pull on the strap and insert the ton

g

ue B

i

nt

o

th

e

l

e

ft h

a

n

d

buc

kl

e

.

)

I

nsert t

h

e ton

g

ue

C

i

nto t

h

e r

igh

t-

h

an

d

buckle

.

)

C

heck that each buckle has en

g

a

g

ed b

y

p

ullin

g

on the strap.

Removin

g

and stowin

g

the belt

)

Pr

ess

th

e

r

ed

bu

tt

o

n

o

n

buc

kl

e

C , and then

o

n th

e

r

ed

bu

tt

o

n

o

n

buc

kl

e

B

.

)

Guide the belt as it reels in, passin

g

it

throu

g

h the belt

g

uide

A

.

)

S

tow the ton

g

ue

C

i

n t

h

e upper s

l

ot

D

a

n

d

t

h

e ton

g

ue

B

i

n t

he

lo

w

e

r

slo

t

E

.

Outer rear seat belts

Each outer rear seat is fitted with a three-point

in

e

rti

a

r

ee

l

sea

t

be

lt.

Fastenin

g

)

Pull the strap, then insert the ton

g

ue in the

buc

kl

e

.

)

C

heck that the seat belt is fastened

c

orrectl

y

b

y

pullin

g

the strap.

Unfastenin

g

)

P

r

ess

t

he

r

ed

bu

tt

o

n

o

n t

he

buckle

.

153

6

Safety

The driver must ensure that passen

g

ers use

the seat belts correctl

y

and that the

y

are all

restrained securel

y

be

f

ore settin

g

o

ff

.

Wh

erever

y

ou are seate

d

i

n t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e,

alwa

y

s

f

asten

y

our seat belt, even

f

or short

j

ourneys.

Do not interchan

g

e the seat belt buckles as

the

y

will not fulfil their role full

y

.

Th

e

sea

t

be

lt

s

a

r

e

fitt

ed

with

a

n in

e

rti

a

r

ee

l

permittin

g

automatic ad

j

ustment of the len

g

th

o

f the strap to

y

our size. The seat belt is

s

towe

d

automat

i

ca

lly

w

h

en not

i

n use.

Be

f

ore and a

f

ter use, ensure that the seat

b

e

l

t

i

s ree

l

e

d

i

n correct

ly

.

The lower

p

art o

f

the stra

p

must be

p

ositioned as low as

p

ossible on the

p

elvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the

h

o

ll

o

w

o

f th

e

s

h

ou

l

de

r.

Th

e

in

e

rti

a

r

ee

l

s

a

r

e

fitt

ed

with

a

n

au

t

o

m

a

ti

c

l

ockin

g

device which comes into operation in

the event o

f

a collision, emer

g

enc

y

brakin

g

o

r i

f

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

r

o

ll

s

o

v

e

r. Y

ou

ca

n r

e

l

ease

the device b

y

pullin

g

f

irml

y

on the strap and

releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat i

f

the passen

g

er is

l

ess than 12

y

ears old or shorter than one

a

n

d

a

h

a

l

f

m

e

tr

es

.

N

e

v

e

r

use

th

e

sa

m

e

sea

t

be

lt t

o

secu

r

e

m

o

r

e

than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on

y

our lap.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must:

- be ti

g

htened as close to the bod

y

as

poss

ibl

e,

- be pulled in

f

ront o

f

y

ou with a smooth

movement, c

h

ec

ki

n

g

t

h

at

i

t

d

oes not

twist,

- be used to restrain onl

y

one person,

- not bear an

y

trace of cuts or fra

y

in

g

,

- n

o

t

be

co

nv

e

rt

ed

o

r m

od

ifi

ed

t

o

a

v

o

i

d

affectin

g

its performance.

In the event of an im

p

act

D

epen

di

n

g

on t

h

e nature an

d

seriousness of the impac

t

, t

h

e

p

retensioning device may be deployed

be

f

ore and independentl

y

o

f

the airba

g

s.

D

eplo

y

ment of the pretensioners is

a

ccompanied b

y

a sli

g

ht dischar

g

e of

h

armless smoke and a noise, due to the

a

ctivation of the p

y

rotechnic cartrid

g

e

i

ncorporate

d

i

n t

h

e s

y

stem.

I

n a

ll

cases, t

h

e a

i

r

b

a

g

warn

i

n

g

l

amp

comes

on

.

Following an impact, have the seat belts

s

y

stem checked, and i

f

necessar

y

replaced,

b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

In accordance with current sa

f

et

y

r

e

g

ulations,

f

or all repairs on

y

our vehicle,

g

o to a quali

f

ied workshop with the skills and

e

q

ui

p

ment needed, which a CITROËN deale

r

is able to provide.

Have

y

our seat belts checked re

g

ularl

y

b

y

a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,

p

articularl

y

if the straps show si

g

ns o

f

d

ama

g

e.

C

lean the seat belt straps with soap

y

water or a text

il

e c

l

ean

i

n

g

pro

d

uct, so

ld

by

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

s

.

A

f

ter

f

olding or moving a seat or rear bench

seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned

a

nd reeled in correctl

y

.

154

Safety

Airbags

S

y

stem desi

g

ned to maximise the safet

y

of the

occupants

(

with the exception of the rear centre

p

assen

g

er

)

in the event of violent collisions.

It supplements the action of the force-limitin

g

s

eat belts

(

with the exception o

f

the rear centre

p

assen

g

er

)

.

I

f

a collision occurs, the electronic detectors

r

ecord and analyse the

f

ront and side impacts

s

ustained in the impact detection zones:

- in the case of a serious impact, the airba

g

s

a

re deplo

y

ed instantl

y

and protect the

occupants of the vehicle

(

with the exception

of the rear centre passen

g

er

)

; immediatel

y

af

ter the impact, the airba

g

s de

f

late rapidl

y

so t

h

at t

h

e

y

d

o not

hi

n

d

er v

i

s

ibili

t

y

or t

h

e

exit o

f

the occu

p

ants,

- in the case o

f

a minor or rear im

p

act or in

c

ertain roll-over conditions, the airba

g

s

will not be deplo

y

ed; the seat belt alone is

sufficient to provide optimum protection in

th

ese

s

it

ua

ti

o

n

s

.

T

he airba

g

s do not operate when the

ig

nition is switched off

.

This equipment will onl

y

deplo

y

once.

I

f a second impact occurs

(

durin

g

the

s

ame or a subsequent accident

)

, the

a

i

r

b

a

g

w

ill

not

b

e

d

ep

l

o

y

e

d

a

g

a

i

n.

Deplo

y

ment o

f

the airba

g(

s

)

is

a

ccompanied by a slight emission o

f

h

armless smoke and a noise, due to the

a

ctivation of the p

y

rotechnic cartrid

g

e

i

ncorporated in the s

y

stem.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive

i

ndividuals ma

y

experience sli

g

ht

i

rr

i

t

a

t

io

n.

The noise o

f

the detonation ma

y

result

i

n a sli

g

ht loss o

f

hearin

g

f

or a short

tim

e

.

I

m

p

act

d

etect

i

on zones

A.

F

ront

i

mpact zone.

B.

S

ide im

p

act zone.

Front airba

g

s

Deplo

y

ment

The airba

g

s are deplo

y

ed simultaneousl

y

,

unless the passen

g

er's front airba

g

is

deactivated

,

in the event of a serious front

impact applied to all or part o

f

the

f

ront impact

z

one

A

, in the lon

g

itudinal centreline o

f

the

vehicle on a horizontal

p

lane and directed

f

rom

th

e

f

r

o

nt t

o

th

e

r

ea

r

of

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The

f

ront airba

g

in

f

lates between the

f

ront

occupant of the vehicle and the dashboard to

cus

hi

o

n th

e

ir f

o

rw

a

r

d

m

o

v

e

m

e

nt.

S

ystem which protects the head and chest o

f

the driver and

f

ront passen

g

er in the event o

f

a

front impact.

The driver's airba

g

is fitted in the centre of the

s

teerin

g

wheel; the front passen

g

er's airba

g

is

fitted in the dashboard above the

g

love box.

155

6

Safety

D

eact

i

vat

i

on

Onl

y

the front passen

g

er's airba

g

can be

deac

t

i

v

a

t

ed

:

)

with the ignition off

, insert the key in the

f

p

assen

g

er a

i

r

b

a

g

d

eact

i

vat

i

on sw

i

tc

h

A

,

)

t

u

rn it t

o

th

e

"OFF"

p

osition,

)

remove the ke

y

.

This warning lamp comes on in

the centre console panel when the

ig

nition is on and until the airba

g

is

r

eac

tiv

a

t

ed

.

To ensure the safet

y

of

y

our child, the

p

assen

g

er's airba

g

must be deactivated

when

y

ou install a "rear

f

acin

g

" child

s

eat on the

f

ront passen

g

er seat.

O

therwise, the child would risk bein

g

s

eriously injured or killed i

f

the airbag

were tri

gg

ered.

If the airba

g

warnin

g

lamp and the

displa

y

come on continuousl

y

, do not

install a "rear facin

g

" child seat on the

f

ront passen

g

er seat.

Co

nt

ac

t

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

R

eact

i

vat

i

on

Wh

en

y

ou remove t

h

e c

hild

seat, turn

s

w

i

t

ch

A

t

o

t

he

"

ON"

p

os

i

t

i

on to react

i

vate t

h

e

a

irbag and so ensure the sa

f

ety o

f

your

f

ront

p

assen

g

er in the event o

f

an impact.

The associated warnin

g

lamp

g

oes off.

Operatin

g

fault

I

f

this warning lamp comes on in the

instrument panel and this displa

y

appears

on the instrument panel screen, contact a

C

ITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop

to have the s

y

stem checked. The airba

g

s ma

y

no

l

on

g

er be deplo

y

ed in the event of a serious impact.

156

Safety

K

nee airba

g

*

Deplo

y

ment

It is deplo

y

ed at the same time as the

f

ront

a

irbags.

S

ystem which protects the driver's knees in the

e

vent o

f

a serious

f

ront impact.

This airba

g

is fitted in the dashboard below the

s

teerin

g

column.

S

ystem which protects the driver and

passen

g

er in the event o

f

a serious side impact

in order to limit the risk of in

j

ur

y

to the chest.

Each lateral airba

g

is fitted in the front seat

b

ack frame, on the door side.

Deplo

y

ment

Th

e

l

atera

l

a

i

r

b

a

g

i

s

d

ep

l

o

y

e

d

un

il

atera

lly

i

n t

h

e

vent o

f

a serious side im

p

act a

pp

lied to all or

p

art o

f

the side im

p

act zone B ,

p

er

p

endicula

r

to the lon

g

itudinal centreline of the vehicle on a

horizontal plane and directed from the outside

t

o

w

a

r

ds

th

e

in

s

i

de

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The lateral airba

g

inflates between the front

occupant o

f

the vehicle and the correspondin

g

d

oor tr

i

m pane

l

.

Impact detection zones

A

.

Front impact zone.

B

.

Side impact zone.

*

According to country.

L

ateral airba

g

s

157

6

Safety

In the event of a minor impact or bump

o

n th

e

s

i

de

of

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

o

r i

f

th

e

ve

hi

c

l

e ro

ll

s over, t

h

e a

i

r

b

a

g

ma

y

not

b

e

d

ep

l

o

y

e

d

.

In the event o

f

a rear or

f

ront collision,

the airba

g

is not deplo

y

ed.

S

ystem which protects the driver and

p

assen

g

ers

(

with the exception o

f

the

r

ear centre passen

g

er

)

in the event o

f

a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of

in

j

ur

y

to the head.

Each curtain airba

g

is fitted in the pillars

and the upper section o

f

the passen

g

er

c

ompartment.

Curtain airba

g

s

Deplo

y

ment

The curtain airba

g

is deplo

y

ed at the same

time as the correspondin

g

lateral airba

g

in the

event of a serious side impact applied to all or

p

art of the side impact zone

B

, perpendicular

to the lon

g

itudinal centreline of the vehicle on a

h

orizontal plane and directed

f

rom the outside

t

o

w

a

r

ds

th

e

in

s

i

de

of

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

The curtain airba

g

in

f

lates between the

f

ront or

r

ear occu

p

ant o

f

the vehicle and the windows.

Operatin

g

fault

If this warnin

g

lamp comes on in the instrument

panel and this displa

y

appears in the instrument

panel screen, contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop to have the s

y

stem checked.

Th

e a

i

r

b

a

g

s ma

y

no

l

on

g

er

b

e

d

ep

l

o

y

e

d

i

n t

h

e

vent o

f

a serious im

p

act.

158

Safety

S

it in a normal upri

g

ht position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave an

y

thin

g

between the

o

ccupants and the airba

g

s

(

a child, pet,

o

b

j

ect...

)

. This could hamper the operation o

f

the airba

g

s or in

j

ure the occupants.

A

ft

e

r

a

n

acc

i

de

nt

o

r if th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

h

as

bee

n

s

to

l

en or

b

ro

k

en

i

nto,

h

ave t

h

e a

i

r

b

a

g

sy

stems c

h

ec

k

e

d

.

All

wor

k

on t

h

e a

i

r

b

a

g

s

y

stem must

b

e

c

arried out by a CITROËN dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned

are observed, a risk of in

j

ur

y

or of minor

burns to the head

,

chest or arms when an

airba

g

is deplo

y

ed cannot be ruled out. The

ba

g

in

f

lates almost instantl

y

(

within a

f

ew

m

illiseconds

)

then de

f

lates within the same

t

i

me

di

sc

h

ar

gi

n

g

t

h

e

h

ot

g

as v

i

a open

i

n

g

s

p

rovided

f

or this

p

ur

p

ose.

K

nee airba

g

*

D

o not s

i

t w

i

t

h

y

our

k

nees an

y

nearer to t

h

e

steering wheel than necessary.

Front airba

g

s

Do not drive holdin

g

the steerin

g

wheel b

y

its

s

pokes or restin

g

y

our hands on the centre

part of the wheel.

Passen

g

ers must not place their feet on the

dashboa

r

d

.

I

f

possible, do not smoke as deplo

y

ment o

f

the airba

g

s can cause burns or the risk o

f

in

j

ur

y

f

rom a ci

g

arette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or

hit it violentl

y

.

For the airba

g

s to be full

y

effective, observe the followin

g

safet

y

rules:

Lateral airba

g

s

Use onl

y

approved covers on the seats,

c

ompatible with the deplo

y

ment the lateral

a

irba

g

s. For information on the ran

g

e of seat

c

overs suitable for

y

our vehicle,

y

ou can

c

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer.

R

efe

r t

o

th

e

"A

ccesso

ri

es

"

sec

ti

o

n.

Do not

f

ix or attach an

y

thin

g

to the seat

backs

(

clothin

g

...

)

. This could cause in

j

ur

y

to the chest or arms i

f

the lateral airbag is

deplo

y

ed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the bod

y

an

y

n

earer to the door than necessar

y

.

*

Accordin

g

to countr

y

.

A

vo

id

attac

hi

n

g

a

h

eav

y

o

bj

ect to t

h

e

k

e

y

as

it could become a dan

g

erous pro

j

ectile i

f

the

a

i

r

b

a

g

were

d

ep

l

o

y

e

d

.

Curtain airba

g

s

Do not

f

ix or attach an

y

thin

g

to the roo

f

. This

c

ould cause injury to the head i

f

the curtain

airba

g

is deplo

y

ed.

If fitted on

y

our vehicle, do not remove the

g

rab handles installed on the roof, the

y

pla

y

a part in securin

g

the curtain airba

g

s.

159

6

Safety

General points relating to child seats

For maximum sa

f

et

y

, please observe the

f

ollowin

g

recommendations:

- in accordance with European regulations,

a

ll children under the a

g

e of 12 or less

than one and a half metres tall must

travel in a

pp

roved child seats suited to

their wei

g

h

t

,

on seats fitted with a seat

belt or ISOFIX mountin

g

s * ,

-

statisticall

y

, the safest seats in

y

ou

r

vehicle for carr

y

in

g

children are the

r

ear seats

,

-

a

child weighing less than 9 kg must

travel in the "rearwards-facin

g

" position

b

oth in the front and in the rear

.

CITROËN recommend

s

th

a

t

c

hil

d

r

e

n

s

h

ou

l

d

tr

a

v

e

l in th

e

r

ear seat

s

o

f

y

our

v

e

hi

c

l

e

:

-

"rearwards-facin

g

" up to the a

g

e of 2,

-

"forwards-facin

g

" over the a

g

e of 2.

A

lthou

g

h one of CITROËN's main criteria when desi

g

nin

g

y

our vehicle, the safet

y

of

y

our children

also depends on

y

ou.

*

The rules

f

or carrying children are speci

f

ic to

e

ach countr

y

. Re

f

er to the current le

g

islation

in

y

our countr

y

.

160

Safety

Child seat in the front

"Rearwards-facin

g

"

When a "rearwards-facin

g

" child seat is

i

n

s

t

alled

o

n t

he

f

ront passen

g

er sea

t

,

i

t

i

s essent

i

a

l

t

h

at t

h

e passen

g

er a

i

r

b

a

g

i

s

deactivated.

O

therwise,

th

e c

hild

wou

ld

r

isk being seriously injured or killed if the

a

irba

g

were to inflat

e

.

"Forwards-facin

g

"

When a "forwards-facin

g

" child seat is installed

o

n t

he

f

ront passen

g

er sea

t

, a

dj

ust t

h

e

ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s seat to t

h

e

i

nterme

di

ate

l

on

gi

tu

di

na

l

pos

i

t

i

on w

i

t

h

t

h

e seat

b

ac

k

upr

igh

t an

d

l

eave

the passenger airbag activated.

Intermediate lon

g

itudinal

p

os

i

t

i

on

161

6

Safety

Passen

g

er airba

g

OFF

Refer to the advice

g

iven on the label present

on both sides of the passen

g

er's sun visor.

To assure the sa

f

ety o

f

your child, you must deactivate the passenger's

f

ront airbag when

y

ou install a child seat in the rearwards

f

acin

g

position on the

f

ront passen

g

er's seat.

O

therwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriousl

y

in

j

ured or killed if the airba

g

were

deplo

y

ed.

162

Safety

Child seats recommended by CITROËN

Group 0+: from birth to 13 k

g

L1

"

R

Ö

MER Bab

y

-Safe Plus"

Installed in the rearwards-

f

acin

g

position.

G

roup 1: from 9 to 18 k

g

L2

"FAIR

G

0/

1

S

I

SO

FIX"

Installed

f

orwards-

f

acing, without the I

SO

FIX base.

6

positions o

f

inclination o

f

the shell.

L

3

"

R

Ö

MER Duo Plus I

SO

FIX"

Installed forwards-facin

g

.

C

an be secured with the seat belt.

3 positions o

f

inclination o

f

the shell.

CITRO

Ë

N offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat

b

el

t

:

Th

ese seats can a

l

so

b

e

i

nsta

ll

e

d

us

i

n

g

the I

SO

FIX mountin

g

s

(

see

f

ollowin

g

pa

g

es

)

.

Follow the instructions for fitting

t

he child seat

g

iven in the seat

m

anufacturer's installation

g

uide

.

163

6

Safety

Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options

f

or installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved

(

a

)

in relation to the wei

g

ht o

f

the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Sea

t

Wei

g

ht of the child and indicative a

ge

L

ess than 13 k

g

(g

roups 0

(

b

)

and 0+

)

Up to ≈ 1

y

ear

From 9 to 18 k

g

(g

roup 1

)

F

rom 1 to ≈ 3

y

ears

From 15 to 25 k

g

(g

roup 2

)

From 3 to ≈ 6

y

ears

From 22 to 36 k

g

(g

roup 3

)

F

rom 6 to ≈ 10

y

ears

Front passen

g

er seat

(

c

)

with

passen

g

er a

i

r

b

a

g

act

i

vate

d

X

Front passen

g

er seat

(

c

)

with

passen

g

er airba

g

deactivated

L1

L

2

,

L

3

X

O

uter rear seats

(

row 2

)

U

C

entre rear seat

(

row 2

)

L1

L

2, L

3

X

(

a

)

Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles usin

g

the seat belt.

(

b

)

G

roup 0:

f

rom birth to 10 kg. In

f

ant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the

f

ront passenger seat.

(

c

)

C

onsult the le

g

islation in

f

orce in

y

our countr

y

be

f

ore installin

g

y

our child on this seat.

U:

seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured usin

g

the seat belt and universall

y

approved, "rear facin

g

" and/or "forward facin

g

".

X

:

seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat of the wei

g

ht

g

roup indicated.

L

-: onl

y

the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned

(

accordin

g

to countr

y)

.

164

Safety

"ISOFIX" mountings

with th

e

l

ates

t

I

SO

FIX

r

e

g

ulation

s

.

The seats, represented below, are

f

itted with

r

e

g

ulation I

SO

FIX mountin

g

s:

- two rings

A

, located between the vehicle

s

eat back and cushion, indicated b

y

a label,

- a rin

g

B

,

behind the seat

,

referred to as the

T

OP TETHER

f

or

f

ixin

g

the upper strap.

This IS

O

FIX mountin

g

s

y

stem provides fast,

reliable and safe fittin

g

of the child seat in

y

our

v

ehicle

.

The

ISOFIX child seats

a

r

e

f

itt

ed

with tw

o

l

atc

h

es w

hi

c

h

are eas

ily

secure

d

on t

h

e two

rings

A

.

S

ome also have an

upp

er stra

p

whi

c

h i

s

attached to rin

g

B

.

To attach this strap, raise the vehicle seat's

h

ead restraint then pass the hook between its

rods. Then fix the hook on rin

g

B

and ti

g

hten

t

h

e upper strap.

Th

e

in

co

rr

ec

t in

s

t

a

ll

a

ti

o

n

of

a

c

hil

d

sea

t

i

n a ve

hi

c

l

e com

p

rom

i

ses t

h

e c

hild'

s

p

rotection in the event o

f

an accident.

For in

f

ormation re

g

ardin

g

the I

SO

FIX

c

hil

d

sea

t

s

whi

c

h

ca

n

be

in

s

t

a

ll

ed

in

y

our vehicle, re

f

er to the table showin

g

the locations for installin

g

IS

O

FIX child

sea

t

s

.

There are three rin

g

s for each seat:

165

6

Safety

ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and approved for your vehicle

These child seats can also be used on seats which are not fitted with IS

O

FIX mountin

g

s.

In this case, the

y

must be attached to the vehicle seat usin

g

the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fittin

g

the child seat

g

iven in the seat manufacturer's installation

g

uide

.

CITROËN offers a ran

g

e of child seats secured usin

g

the ISOFIX mountin

g

s.

G

roup 0+: up to 13 k

g

IL

1

RÖMER Bab

y

-Safe Plus and its Bab

y

-Safe plus ISOFIX bas

e

Installed in the rearwards-

f

acin

g

position usin

g

its I

SO

FIX base, which is attached to the rin

g

s

A

.

The base has a height-adjustable stay.

IL2

FAIR G 0/1 S and its RWF ISOFIX bas

e

Installed in the rearwards-facin

g

position usin

g

its IS

O

FIX base, which is attached to the rin

g

s A .

The base has a sta

y

.

6

positions of inclination for the shell.

This confi

g

uration is reserved for children wei

g

hin

g

up to 13 k

g

.

166

Safety

G

roup 1: from 9 to 18 kg

I

L3

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX

Installed

f

orwards-

f

acin

g

.

A

ttac

h

e

d

to t

h

e r

i

n

g

s

A

, as we

ll

as r

i

n

g

B

, known as the T

O

P TETHER,

u

sing an upper strap.

3

p

ositions o

f

inclination o

f

the shell.

IL4

FAIR G 0/1 S and its FWF ISOFIX

b

as

e

Installed in the rearwards-facin

g

position usin

g

its IS

O

FIX base, which is attached to the rin

g

s

A

.

the base has a sta

y

.

6

positions of inclination of the shell.

This confi

g

uration is suitable for children wei

g

hin

g

more than 13 k

g

.

These child seats can also be used on seats which are not

f

itted with I

SO

FIX mountin

g

s.

I

n t

hi

s case, t

h

e

y

must

b

e attac

h

e

d

to t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e seat us

i

n

g

t

h

e t

h

ree po

i

nt seat

b

e

l

t.

Follow the instructions for fittin

g

the child seat

g

iven in the seat manufacturer's installation

g

uide

.

167

6

Safety

Locations for ISOFIX child seats

m

ountin

g

s.

In the case of universal and semi-universal IS

O

FIX child seats, the IS

O

FIX size cate

g

or

y

, determined b

y

a letter between

A

a

n

d

G

, is indicated on the

c

hild seat next to the IS

O

FIX lo

g

o.

Wei

g

ht of the child

/

indicative a

g

e

L

ess than 10 kg

(g

roup 0

)

U

p to approx.

6

months

L

ess than 10 k

g

(g

roup 0

)

L

ess t

h

an 13 k

g

(g

roup 0+

)

Up to approx. 1

y

ear

From 9 to 18 k

g

(g

roup 1

)

F

rom approx.

1

to

3

y

ears

Ty

pe of ISOFIX child sea

t

i

nfant car sea

t

"rear facin

g

""rear facin

g

" "forward facin

g

"

ISOFIX size cate

g

or

y

F

G

C

D

E

C

D

A

B

B1

U

niversal and semi-universal ISOFIX child

s

eats which can be installed on the outer

rear sea

t

s

X

IL1

IL2

X

IUF

I

UF

:

sea

t

su

it

ab

l

e

fo

r th

e

in

s

t

a

ll

a

ti

o

n

of

a

n

I

sof

ix

U

niversal seat, "F orward

f

acin

g

" secured usin

g

the "Top Tether" upper strap.

For advice on securin

g

of the "Top Tether" upper strap, refer to the "IS

O

FIX mountin

g

s" section.

I

L-

:

onl

y

the child seats indicated can be installed usin

g

the IS

O

FIX mountin

g

s.

X

:

seat not suitable for the installation of an IS

O

FIX seat of the size cate

g

or

y

indicated.

If in the wa

y

, the head restraint of the vehicle's ISOFIX seat must be removed and stowed safel

y

.

168

Safety

Th

e

in

co

rr

ec

t in

s

t

a

ll

a

ti

o

n

o

f

a

c

hil

d

sea

t in

a

ve

hi

c

l

e comprom

i

ses t

h

e c

hild'

s protect

i

on

i

n

th

e

v

e

nt

of

a

n

acc

i

de

nt.

R

e

m

e

m

be

r t

o

fas

t

e

n th

e

sea

t

be

lt

s

o

r th

e

c

hil

d

sea

t h

a

rn

esses

k

eeping the slac

k

in

relation to the child's bod

y

t

o a minimu

m

,

e

ven for short

j

ourne

y

s.

For optimum installation of the "forward

facin

g

" child seat, ensure that the back o

f

th

e

c

hil

d

sea

t i

s

in

co

nt

ac

t with th

e

bac

k

of

t

he

v

ehicle's

sea

t

a

n

d

t

ha

t t

he

head

r

es

tr

ai

nt

does not cause an

y

discom

f

ort.

I

f

the head restraint has to be removed,

e

nsure that it is stored or attached securely

to prevent it

f

rom bein

g

thrown around the

vehicle in the event of sharp brakin

g

.

Advice on child seats

Installin

g

a booster seat

The chest

p

art o

f

the seat belt must be

p

ositioned on the child's shoulder without

touchin

g

the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt

p

asses correctl

y

over the child's thi

g

hs.

C

ITR

O

ËN recommends the use of a booste

r

seat which has a back

,

fitted with a seat belt

g

u

id

e at s

h

ou

ld

er

l

eve

l

.

As a sa

f

et

y

precaution, do not leave:

-

o

n

e

o

r m

o

r

e

child

r

e

n

alo

n

e

a

n

d

u

nsu

p

ervised in a vehicle,

-

a

c

hil

d

o

r

a

n

a

nim

a

l in

a

v

e

hi

c

l

e

whi

c

h

is exposed to the sun, with the windows

c

losed,

- the ke

y

s within reach of children inside

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

To prevent accidental openin

g

o

f

the doors,

use

th

e

"

C

hil

d

l

oc

k".

T

a

k

e care not to open t

h

e rear w

i

n

d

ows

by

m

o

r

e

th

a

n

o

n

e

thir

d

.

To protect

y

oun

g

children

f

rom the ra

y

s o

f

the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.

Children under the a

g

e of 10 must not travel

in the "

f

orward

f

acin

g

" position on the

f

ront

passen

g

er seat, un

l

ess t

h

e rear seats are

a

l

rea

dy

occup

i

e

d

by

ot

h

er c

hild

ren, cannot

be

used

o

r

a

r

e

abse

nt.

Deactivate the passen

g

er's airba

g

when a

"

rear facin

g

" child seat is installed on the

f

ront seat.

O

therwise, the child would risk

bein

g

seriousl

y

in

j

ured or killed if the airba

g

w

e

r

e

t

o

infl

a

t

e

.

169

6

Safety

Child lock

Mechanical s

y

stem to prevent openin

g

of the rear doors usin

g

their interior controls.

The control is located on the ed

g

e of each rear door.

Child lock on

)

M

o

v

e

th

e

co

ntr

o

l

A

towards position

1

.

Child lock off

)

M

o

v

e

th

e

co

ntr

o

l

A

towards position

2

.

170

Practical information

Thi

s

kit i

s

in

s

t

a

ll

ed

in th

e

boo

t

u

n

de

r th

e

fl

oo

r.

Complete s

y

stem consistin

g

of a compressor

a

nd a sealant cartrid

g

e which permits the

temporar

y

repai

r

of a tyre so that you can

r

drive to the nearest

g

ara

g

e.

I

t

i

s

d

es

ig

ne

d

to repa

i

r most punctures w

hi

c

h

c

ould a

ff

ect the t

y

re, located on the t

y

re tread

o

r

shoulde

r.

Temporary puncture repair kit

A

ccess to t

h

e

ki

t

1

.

12 V compressor with inte

g

ral pressure

g

au

g

e, to measure and ad

j

ust the t

y

re

press

u

re

.

F

o

r

access

t

o

it:

)

O

pen the boot.

)

Lift

a

n

d

r

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

fl

oo

r.

)

Take

ou

t t

he

ki

t.

Com

p

osition of the kit

The speed restriction sticker must be

affixed to the vehicle's steerin

g

wheel to

remind

y

ou that a wheel is in temporar

y

use

.

Do not exceed a speed o

f

50 mph

(

80 km

/

h

)

when drivin

g

with a t

y

re

repaired usin

g

this t

y

pe o

f

kit.

2.

Sealant cartrid

g

e for the temporar

y

repair

of a t

y

re.

3.

R

ep

l

acement va

l

ve core.

4.

Valve core removal

/f

ittin

g

tool.

5

.

I

n

j

ect

i

on p

i

pe.

6

.

S

uction

p

i

p

e, to remove the sealant

p

roduct

i

f

necessar

y

.

7

.

Speed limit sticker.

171

7

Practical information

1. Sealin

g

Re

p

air

p

rocedure

Avoid removin

g

an

y

f

orei

g

n bodies

which have penetrated into the tyre.

)

S

top the vehicle in as sa

f

e a location as

p

ossible and on a level and stable sur

f

ace.

)

Apply the parking brake.

)

Place the

g

ear lever in position R

fo

r

vehicle with a manual

g

earbox, or in

p

osition

P

for vehicles fitted with a

C

VT

g

earbox.

)

Switch off the i

g

nition.

)

I

n

di

cate on t

h

e spee

d

restr

i

ct

i

on st

i

c

k

er

p

rovided, the wheel to be repaired, then

f

ix

i

t to t

h

e steer

i

n

g

w

h

ee

l

as a rem

i

n

d

er t

h

at a

wheel is in temporary use.

)

Remove the valve cap

f

or the t

y

re to be

re

p

aired.

)

Remove the valve core usin

g

the tool

p

rovided, and store in in a clean place.

)

Connect the in

j

ection pipe to the valve o

f

the t

y

re to be repaired.

)

S

hake the sealant cartrid

g

e, remove the

c

ap and screw on the injection pipe.

172

Practical information

Tap the sealant cartrid

g

e

(

top down

)

several times with your hand, so as to inject

a

ll of the

p

roduc

t

into the t

y

re.

)

Remove the in

j

ection pipe.

)

Refit the valve core and ti

g

hten it usin

g

the

tool provided.

Take care, this product is harmful

(

e.

g

. eth

y

lene-

g

l

y

col, colophon

y

...

)

if swallowed and

c

auses

i

rr

i

tat

i

on to t

h

e e

y

es.

Keep it out o

f

reach o

f

children.

The use-b

y

date o

f

the sealant is marked on the cartrid

g

e.

After use, do not discard the empt

y

cartrid

g

e but take it to a CITROËN dealer

(

France

)

or an

a

uthorised waste dis

p

osal site.

Don't for

g

et to obtain a replacement cartrid

g

e; the

y

are available from a CITROËN dealer or

a

qualified workshop.

173

7

Practical information

2. Inﬂ ation

)

C

heck that the com

p

ressor switch

A

is

i

n

th

e

"OFF"

p

osition.

)

Uncoil the com

p

ressor

p

i

p

e

B

.

)

C

onnect this pipe to the valve o

f

the

r

e

p

a

i

re

d

w

h

ee

l

.

)

C

onnect the compressor's electric plug to

the vehicle's 12 V socket

(

i

g

nition switch in

position "ACC" or ACC mode

)

.

)

Start the compressor b

y

turnin

g

the

s

wit

c

h A t

o

th

e

"ON" position.

)

Usin

g

the compressor, ad

j

ust the pressure

i

n accor

d

ance w

i

t

h

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s t

y

re

pressure label

(

located in the driver's doo

r

aperture

)

.

A loss o

f

p

ressure indicates that the

puncture has not been

f

ull

y

plu

gg

ed;

c

ontact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop for assistance.

)

Remove the compressor and stow the kit.

)

Drive off strai

g

ht awa

y

at reduced speed

(

50 mph [80 km

/

h] max

)

f

or around 3 miles

(

5 km

)

or 10 minutes.

As soon as possible,

g

o to a CITROËN

dealer or a qualified workshop.

Tell the technician that

y

ou have used

the kit. After checkin

g

, the technician

will advise

y

ou whether the t

y

re can be

repa

i

re

d

or must

b

e rep

l

ace

d

.

If after around 10 minutes the pressure

is not attained, this indicates that

the t

y

re is not repairable; contact

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop for assistance.

174

Practical information

Changing a wheel

Th

e

t

oo

l

s

a

r

e

s

t

o

r

ed

in th

e

boo

t

u

n

de

r th

e

fl

oo

r.

To

g

ain access to them:

)

O

pen the boot.

)

Lift

a

n

d

r

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

boo

t fl

oo

r.

)

Take

ou

t t

he

t

ools

.

A

ccess to the tools

List of tools

All of these tools are specific to

y

our vehicle.

D

o not use them

f

or an

y

thin

g

else.

1.

Wheelb

r

ace

.

Used

t

o

r

e

m

o

v

e

t

he

w

heel

tr

i

m

a

n

d

t

he

wheel

f

ixing bolts.

2

.

Jack.

Used to raise the vehicle.

3.

H

a

n

d

l

e

.

Used to operate the

j

ack.

4.

Removable towin

g

e

y

e.

S

ee "Recoverin

g

the vehicle".

5

.

S

ecurit

y

wheel bolt socket

(

available as an

accessor

y)

.

Used to ada

p

t the wheelbrace to the

s

pecial "securit

y

" wheel bolts.

Procedure for replacin

g

a fault

y

wheel with the spare wheel usin

g

the tools supplied with the vehicle.

Wheel with trim

When removin

g

the whee

l

,

remove the

trim first usin

g

the handle

3

, pullin

g

at

t

he

cu

t

ou

t.

When refittin

g

the whee

l

, re

f

it the trim

s

tart

i

n

g

by

p

l

ac

i

n

g

i

ts cutout oppos

i

te

the valve and press on its outer edge

with the palm o

f

y

our hand.

175

7

Practical information

th

e

f

l

oo

r.

Dependin

g

on version, the spare wheel ma

y

be

a standard size steel or allo

y

wheel, or for some

c

ountries it is the "space saver" t

y

pe.

For access to the spare wheel, see "Access to

t

he

t

ools"

.

Access to the s

p

are wheel

Takin

g

out the standard wheel

)

U

nscrew the central bolt A

.

)

Raise the spare wheel towards

y

ou from

th

e

r

ea

r.

)

T

a

k

e

th

e

wh

ee

l

ou

t

of

th

e

boo

t.

Puttin

g

the standard wheel back

i

n

p

lace

)

Put the wheel back in its housin

g

.

)

P

u

t th

e

ce

ntr

a

l

bo

lt

A

in place in the centre

of

th

e

wh

ee

l.

)

Ti

g

hten

f

ull

y

to retain the wheel correctl

y

.

176

Practical information

Removin

g

a wheel

Parkin

g

the vehicle

Imm

ob

ili

se

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

wh

e

r

e

it

does

n

ot block traffic: if possible, park the

ve

hi

c

l

e on

l

eve

l

, sta

bl

e an

d

non-s

li

pper

y

g

roun

d

.

Appl

y

the parkin

g

brake, switch o

ff

the

i

gnition and engage

f

irst gear to lock the

w

h

ee

l

s

.

If necessar

y

, place a chock under the

w

heel dia

g

onall

y

opposite the wheel to

be chan

g

ed.

Never

g

o underneath a vehicle raised

u

s

i

n

g

a

j

ac

k

; use a stan

d

.

List of o

p

erations

)

If

y

our vehicle is equipped with securit

y

wheel bolts

(

equipment available as an

a

ccessor

y)

fit the securit

y

socket 5

o

n th

e

w

heelb

r

ace

1

to s

l

ac

k

en t

h

e secur

i

t

y

b

o

l

t.

)

S

lacken the other bolts usin

g

the

w

heelb

r

ace

1

on

ly

.

177

7

Practical information

Place the

j

ack

2

in

co

nt

ac

t with

o

n

e

of

th

e

tw

o

fr

o

nt

A

or

rear

B locations provided on

the underbod

y

, whichever is closest to the

wheel to be chan

g

ed.

)

Extend the

j

ack

2

until its base plate is in

c

ontact w

i

t

h

t

h

e

g

roun

d

.

E

nsure t

h

at t

h

e

c

entreline o

f

the

j

ack base plate is directl

y

belo

w t

he

loca

t

io

n

A

or

B

used

.

)

R

a

i

se

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

u

ntil th

e

r

e

i

s

suff

i

c

i

e

nt

s

pace between the wheel and the

g

round

to admit the spare

(

not punctured

)

wheel

e

asil

y

.

)

R

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

bo

lt

s

a

n

d

s

t

o

r

e

th

e

m in

a

c

l

ea

n

p

l

ace.

)

Re

m

o

v

e

t

he

w

heel

.

178

Practical information

Fittin

g

a wheel

A

fter chan

g

in

g

a wheel

When usin

g

the "space-saver" spare

w

heel, do not exceed a speed o

f

5

0 mph

(

80 km

/

h

)

.

Have the ti

g

htenin

g

o

f

the bolts and the

p

ressure o

f

the s

p

are wheel checked

by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

w

orkshop without dela

y

.

Have the punctured wheel repaired and

r

eplace it on the vehicle as soon as

p

ossible.

List of o

p

erations

)

P

ut t

h

e w

h

ee

l

i

n p

l

ace on t

h

e

h

u

b

.

)

S

crew in the bolts

f

ull

y

b

y

hand.

)

P

re-t

igh

ten t

h

e secur

i

t

y

b

o

l

t us

i

n

g

t

h

e

wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

1

f

itted with the security

soc

k

e

t 5

(

i

f

y

our vehicle is equipped with

s

ecurit

y

wheel bolts

)

.

)

Pre-ti

g

hten the other bolts usin

g

the

wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

1

onl

y

.

Fi

tt

i

n

g

snow t

y

res

If

y

ou equip

y

our vehicle with snow

t

y

res

f

itted on steel wheel rims, special

bolts available from

y

our CITRO

Ë

N

dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied worksho

p

mus

t

be

used

.

179

7

Practical information

Lower the vehicle full

y

.

)

Fold the

j

ack

2

a

n

d

de

t

ac

h it.

)

Ti

g

hten the securit

y

bolt usin

g

the

wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

1

fitted with the securit

y

socke

t 5

(

i

f

y

our vehicle is equipped with

s

ecurit

y

wheel bolts

)

.

)

Tigh

ten t

h

e ot

h

er

b

o

l

ts us

i

n

g

t

h

e

wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

1

only.

)

S

tore the tools

(

re

f

er to the para

g

raph

"

Access to the tools"

)

.

180

Practical information

Changing a bulb

For bulbs that have ali

g

nment lu

g

s

(

H1, H7...

)

ensure that the

y

are

fitted correctl

y

for the best li

g

htin

g

p

erformance.

The headlamps have

p

ol

y

carbonate lenses with

a protect

i

ve coat

i

n

g

:

)

d

o not c

l

ean t

h

em us

i

n

g

a

d

r

y

or a

b

ras

i

ve c

l

ot

h

,

nor with a detergent or

solvent

p

roduct

,

)

use a spon

g

e and soap

y

water,

)

when usin

g

a hi

g

h pressure

washer on persistent marks,

do not keep the lance directed

towar

d

s t

h

e

l

amps or t

h

e

i

r

e

d

g

es

f

or too lon

g

, so as

n

ot to

d

ama

g

e t

h

e

i

r protect

i

ve

c

oating and seals.

)

D

o not touc

h

t

h

e

b

u

lb

di

rect

ly

w

i

t

h

y

our

f

in

g

ers, use lint-

f

ree cloths.

C

han

g

in

g

a bulb should onl

y

be done

af

ter the headlam

p

has been switched

o

ff

f

or a

f

ew minutes

(

risk o

f

serious

burns

)

.

It is imperative to use onl

y

anti-

ultraviolet

(

UV

)

t

y

pe bulbs in order not

to dama

g

e the headlamp.

A

lwa

y

s replace a

f

ailed bulb with a

n

ew

b

u

lb

w

i

t

h

t

h

e same t

y

pe an

d

sp

eci

f

ication.

Risk of electrocution

Replacement of the xenon bulbs

(

D1

S

-35W

)

must be carried out b

y

a

CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

w

or

k

s

h

o

p

.

Front lam

p

s

1.

Di

rect

i

on

i

n

di

cators

(

WY21W-21W

).

2.

M

ain beam headlamps

(

H1-55W

).

3.

D

ipped beam headlamps

(

H11-55W

)

or

Xenon bulb

(

D1S-35W

).

4.

Sidelamps

(

W5W-5W

).

5

.

D

a

y

time runnin

g

lamps

(

P13W-13W

).

6

.

D

a

y

time runnin

g

lamps / sidelamps

(

li

g

ht emittin

g

doides-LEDs

).

7.

Front fo

g

lamps

(

H11-55W

).

181

7

Practical information

C

arry out the

f

ollowing operations

f

or access

the bulb protective covers:

)

Remove the retainin

g

pins

A

.

)

Remove the protective cover B

.

Access to bulbs Chan

g

in

g

direction indicator

b

ulbs

(

1

)

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn to

the left and pull it out.

)

Pull out the bulb and chan

g

e it.

Rapid flashin

g

of the direction indicator

warnin

g

lamp

(

ri

g

ht or left

)

indicates the

f

a

il

u

r

e

o

f

a

bu

l

b

o

n th

a

t

s

i

de

.

To reassemble, carr

y

out these

operations in reverse order.

Amber coloured bulbs, such as the

direction indicators, must be replaced

with bulbs o

f

identical speci

f

ications

a

n

d

colou

r.

182

Practical information

)

R

emove t

h

e protect

i

ve p

l

ast

i

c cover.

)

Turn the bulb holder to the le

f

t and

p

ull it

ou

t.

)

Remove the bulb and its base b

y

pressin

g

o

n the lu

g

at the bottom.

)

Chan

g

e the bulb.

For reassembl

y

, carr

y

out these operations in

re

v

e

r

se

o

r

de

r.

Chan

g

in

g

main beam headlamp

b

ulbs

(

2

)

T

urn t

h

e

b

u

lb

h

o

ld

er a quarter turn to t

h

e

le

f

t and

p

ull it out.

)

Pull out the bulb and re

p

lace it.

To reassemble, carr

y

out these operations in

re

v

e

r

se

o

r

de

r.

Chan

g

in

g

the da

y

time runnin

g

l

amps

/

sidelamps

(

li

g

ht-emittin

g

diodes - LEDs

)

(

6

)

For the replacement of this t

y

pe of LED lamp,

c

ontact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

op.

Chan

g

in

g

dipped headlamp

bulbs

(

3

)

For the re

p

lacement o

f

these bulbs, contact a

C

ITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

To replace these bulbs contact a CITROËN

dealer or a qualified workshop.

Chan

g

in

g

front fo

g

lamp

bulbs

(

7

)

/ da

y

time runnin

g

l

amp bulbs

(

5

)

183

7

Practical information

P

us

h

t

h

e repeater towar

d

s t

h

e rear to

di

sen

g

a

g

e

i

t.

)

Disconnect the re

p

eater connector.

)

Chan

g

e the repeater unit.

To reassemble, carr

y

out these operations in reverse order.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain replacement repeaters.

Chan

g

in

g

direction indicator side repeaters

D

oor mirror spotlamps

You should contact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of the li

g

ht

e

m

i

tt

i

n

g

di

o

d

e -

LED

.

184

Practical information

1.

T

hird brake lamp

(

LEDs

).

2.

Number plate lamps

(

W5W-5W

).

3.

Rear fo

g

lamp

(

W21W-21W

)

.

4.

Reversin

g

lamp

(

W16W-16W

).

5.

D

irection indicators

(

WY21W-21W

).

6

.

Sidelamps / brake lamps

(

W21-5W

).

Rear lam

p

s

A

mber coloured bulbs, such as the

direction indicators, must be replaced

with bulbs o

f

identical speci

f

ication and

colou

r.

These bulbs are chan

g

ed

f

rom outside the

boo

t.

)

Op

en the boot.

)

Remove the two

f

ixin

g

screws.

)

Unclip the lamp unit carefull

y

extract it

pullin

g

it towards the rear.

)

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn to

the left and pull it out.

)

P

u

ll

t

h

e

b

u

lb

out an

d

c

h

an

g

e

i

t.

T

o reassem

bl

e, carr

y

out t

h

ese operat

i

ons

i

n

re

v

e

r

se

o

r

de

r.

Take care to align the pins on the lamp unit with

the locations on the bod

y

work.

Chan

g

in

g

sidelamp / brake

lamp

(

6

)

, direction indicator

(

5

)

,

and fo

g

lamp

(

3

)

bulbs

)

O

pen the boot.

)

Insert a screwdriver into the aperture o

f

the

c

over an

d

l

ever

i

t o

p

en.

)

Turn the bulb holder a

q

uarter o

f

a turn to

th

e

l

ef

t.

)

Pull the bulb out and chan

g

e it.

To reassemble, carr

y

out these operations in

r

e

v

e

r

se

o

r

de

r.

You can also contact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop

f

or the replacement o

f

these

bulbs

.

Chan

g

in

g

reversin

g

lamp

bulbs

(

4

)

185

7

Practical information

Chan

g

in

g

number plate lamps

(

2

)

P

us

h th

e

l

e

n

s

t

o

th

e

l

ef

t

a

n

d

th

e

n

do

wn.

)

Turn the bulb holder a

q

uarter turn to the

le

f

t and

p

ull it out.

)

Remove the bulb and chan

g

e it.

To refit, carr

y

out these operations in reverse

order and press on the lens to clip it in place.

T

hird brake lamp

(

li

g

ht emittin

g

diodes - LEDs

)

(

1

)

Contact a CITROËN dealer or

q

ualified

w

orkshop

f

or the replacement o

f

this t

y

pe o

f

l

amp.

186

Practical information

Changing a fuse

The extraction tweezer and spare

f

uses are

fitted in the en

g

ine compartment fusebox.

To

g

ain access to them:

)

O

pen the bonnet

(

refer to the "Checks"

section

)

.

)

U

nc

li

p t

h

e an

d

remove t

h

e cover.

)

Re

m

o

v

e

t

he

tw

ee

z

e

r.

)

C

are

f

ull

y

close the cover to ensure correct

sealing o

f

the

f

usebox.

A

ccess to the tools

Before chan

g

in

g

a fuse, the cause of the failure

m

us

t

be

i

de

nti

f

i

ed

a

n

d

r

ec

ti

f

i

ed

.

)

C

h

ec

k th

a

t th

e

s

wit

c

h i

s

in th

e

"

L

OCK

"

p

os

i

t

i

on or t

h

at t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e mo

d

e

i

s

"

OFF

".

)

Identi

f

y the

f

aulty

f

use by checking the

co

n

d

iti

o

n

of

it

s

f

il

a

m

e

nt.

)

Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse

f

r

o

m it

s

l

oca

ti

o

n.

)

Alwa

y

s replace the fault

y

fuse with a fuse

o

f the same ratin

g

.

)

C

heck that the number etched on the box,

t

h

e rat

i

n

g

etc

h

e

d

on t

h

e top an

d

t

h

e ta

bl

es

b

e

l

ow a

ll

a

g

ree.

Chan

g

in

g

a fuse

Good Failed

CITROËN will not accept responsibilit

y

f

or the cost incurred in repairin

g

y

ou

r

vehicle or for rectif

y

in

g

the malfunctions

resultin

g

f

rom the installation o

f

accessor

i

es not supp

li

e

d

an

d

not

recommended b

y

CITRO

Ë

N and

n

o

t in

s

t

a

ll

ed

in

acco

r

da

n

ce

with it

s

instructions, in particular when the

c

onsumption of all of the additional

e

quipment connected exceeds

10 milliamperes.

Y

our ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s e

l

ectr

i

ca

l

s

y

stem

i

s

d

es

ig

ne

d

to operate w

i

t

h

stan

d

ar

d

or

o

pt

i

ona

l

equ

i

pment.

Be

f

ore installin

g

other electrical

e

quipment or accessories in your

vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified workshop.

The replacement of a fuse not

mentioned in the followin

g

tables ma

y

c

ause a serious fault on

y

our vehicle.

C

ontact a

C

ITR

O

ËN dealer or a

q

uali

f

ied workshop.

187

7

Practical information

Dashboard fuses

Th

e

f

usebo

x i

s

l

oca

t

ed

in th

e

l

o

w

e

r

das

h

boa

r

d

(

left-hand side

)

.

Access to the fuses

)

O

pen the cover and remove it completely

b

y

pullin

g

it towards

y

ou.

Fuse N

°

Ratin

g

Functions

1

*

3

0

A

C

abin fan.

2 15 A Brake lam

p

s, third brake lam

p

.

3

10 A Rear

f

o

g

lamps.

4

3

0

A

Wi

n

d

screen w

i

per, screenwas

h

.

6

2

0

A

Central lockin

g

, electric door mirrors.

7 15 A Audio equipment, telematics, USB unit, Bluetooth s

y

stem.

8

7.5

A

Remote control ke

y

, air conditionin

g

control unit, instrument

panel, electric windows, rain and sunshine sensors, alarm,

s

witch panel, steerin

g

mounted controls.

9

15 A Instrument panel and interior li

g

htin

g

.

10

15 A Hazard warnin

g

lamps

11

15 A

R

ear w

ip

er.

12 7.5

A

Instrument panel, multi

f

unction screen, parking sensors, heated

s

eats, heated rear screen, electric blind, automatic headlam

p

ad

j

ustment.

1

3

15 A Ci

g

arette li

g

hter, accessor

y

socket.

15

2

0

A

El

ec

tri

c

b

lin

d

.

1

6

10 A

D

oor m

i

rrors, au

di

o equ

i

pment.

188

Practical information

* The maxi-fuses provide additional protection for the electrical s

y

stems. All work on the

maxi-fuses must be carried out b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Fuse N

°

Ratin

g

Functions

1

87.5 A Reversin

g

lamps.

1

9

15 A Accessor

y

socket.

2

0

*

3

0

A

Elec

tr

ic

w

i

n

do

w

co

ntr

ols

.

21

*

3

0

A

Hea

t

ed

r

ea

r

sc

r

ee

n.

22

7.5 A H

ea

t

ed

doo

r mirr

o

r

s

.

2

4

2

5 A Driver's and passen

g

er's electric seat.

2

5

3

0 A

Hea

t

ed

sea

t

s

.

189

7

Practical information

En

g

ine compartment fuses

Access to the fuses

)

U

nc

li

p t

h

e cover an

d

remove

i

t comp

l

ete

ly

.

Fuse N

°

R

at

i

n

g

F

unct

i

ons

1

15 A Front fo

g

lamps.

4

10 A H

o

rn.

57.5

A

Al

t

e

rn

a

t

o

r.

6

2

0

A

H

ea

dl

amp was

h

.

7 10 A Air conditionin

g

.

9

2

0

A

Al

a

rm.

10

15 A Demisting, wipers.

11

-

No

t

used

.

12

-

N

o

t

used

.

The fusebox is placed in the en

g

ine

c

ompartment

(

left-hand side

)

.

190

Practical information

Fuse N

°

R

at

i

n

g

F

unct

i

ons

1

3

10 A Da

y

time runnin

g

lamps.

1

4 10 A Le

f

t-hand main beam headlamp.

15

10 A

Righ

t-

h

an

d

ma

i

n

b

eam

h

ea

dl

amp.

1

6

20

A

Le

f

t-hand dipped beam headlamp

(

xenon

)

.

1

7

20

A

Ri

g

ht-hand dipped beam headlamp

(

xenon

)

.

18

10 A

Le

f

t-hand dipped beam headlamp

(

halo

g

en

)

, manual and

automatic headlamp ad

j

ustment.

1

9

10 A Ri

g

ht-hand dipped beam headlamp

(

halo

g

en

)

.

31

3

0 A Audio ampli

f

ier.

The maxi-

f

uses provide additional

p

rotection

f

or the electrical s

y

stems. All

w

o

rk

o

n th

e

m

a

xi-

fuses

m

us

t

be

ca

rri

ed

o

ut b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Carefull

y

close the cover after replacin

g

a

f

use

so

as

t

o

e

n

su

r

e

th

e

co

rr

ec

t

s

ealin

g

o

f

the

f

usebox.

191

7

Practical information

S

p

are fuses

The spare

f

uses are located under the en

g

ine

c

om

p

artment

f

usebox cover.

Th

e cover

d

oes not conta

i

n spare

f

uses with an ampera

g

e o

f

7.5 A, 25 A

o

r

30

A. I

f

o

n

e

of

th

e

fuses

with th

ese

amperages develops a

f

ault, replace it

with the

f

ollowin

g

f

use:

A 7.5 A fus

e

must be replaced with the

10 A s

p

are fus

e

,

a

2

5 A fus

e

with

a

20 A s

p

are fus

e

a

n

d

a

3

0 A fus

e

with

th

e

a

udio s

y

stem fuse

(

N° 31

)

.

Fuse N

°

Rating

33 10 A

34

15 A

35

20

A

192

Practical information

12 V battery

The battery is located under the bonnet.

To

g

ain access to it:

)

open the bonnet usin

g

the interior release

l

ever, then the exterior safet

y

catch,

)

secure the bonnet sta

y

,

A

ccess to the batter

y

Procedure for char

g

in

g

y

our batter

y

when it is flat or for startin

g

the en

g

ine usin

g

another batter

y

and

j

ump leads.

)

remove t

h

e reta

i

n

i

n

g

p

i

ns

A

,

)

remove t

h

e

p

rotect

i

ve cover

B

,

)

remove t

h

e reta

i

n

i

n

g

p

i

ns

C

,

)

r

e

m

o

v

e

t

he

ai

r

duc

t

D

.

193

7

Practical information

n

ecessar

y

(

see "

C

heckin

g

levels"

)

.

Startin

g

usin

g

another

b

atter

y

)

Connect the red cable to the positive

terminal

(

+

)

of the flat batter

y

A , then to the

positive terminal

(

+

)

of the slave batter

y

B

.

)

Connect one end of the

g

reen or black

c

able to the ne

g

ative terminal

(

-

)

of the

s

lave batter

y

B

.

)

C

onnect the other end o

f

the

g

reen or black

c

a

bl

e to t

h

e eart

h

po

i

nt

C

on

y

our ve

hi

c

l

e

(

en

g

ine mountin

g)

.

)

O

perate the starter, let the engine run.

)

Wait until the en

g

ine returns to idle and

d

i

sco

nn

ec

t th

e

cab

l

es

.

)

Raise the protective cover on the

(

+

)

t

e

rmin

a

l.

194

Practical information

Th

e

ba

tt

e

ri

es

co

nt

a

in h

a

rmf

u

l

s

ubstances such as sul

p

huric acid

and lead. The

y

must be disposed of in

accordance with re

g

ulations and must

n

ot,

i

n an

y

c

i

rcumstances,

b

e

di

scar

d

e

d

with h

ouse

h

o

l

d

w

as

t

e

.

Take

used

r

e

m

o

t

e

co

ntr

ol

ba

tt

e

r

ies

a

n

d

vehicle batteries to a special collection

p

o

i

nt.

Do not reverse the polarit

y

and use onl

y

a 12 V char

g

er.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the en

g

ine is runnin

g

.

Do not char

g

e the batteries without disconnectin

g

the terminals

f

irst.

Do not push the vehicle to start the en

g

ine i

f

it is

f

itted with a

C

VT

g

earbox.

I

t

i

s a

d

v

i

sa

bl

e to

di

sconnect t

h

e

b

atter

y

i

f

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

i

s

t

o

be

l

ef

t

u

n

used

fo

r

mo

r

e

th

a

n

o

n

e

m

o

nth.

Before disconnectin

g

the batter

y

Wait 2 minutes after switchin

g

off the

ig

nition before disconnectin

g

the batter

y

.

C

lose the windows and the doors before

disconnectin

g

the batter

y

.

Followin

g

reconnection

of the batter

y

Followin

g

reconnection of the batter

y

,

s

witch on the i

g

nition and wait

1

minute

before startin

g

to permit initialisation of the

e

lectronic s

y

stems. However, if problems

remain

f

ollowin

g

this operation, contact a

C

ITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified workshop.

)

Disconnect the batter

y

from the vehicle,

if

necessar

y

.

)

Follow the instructions

f

or use provided b

y

the manu

f

acturer o

f

the char

g

er.

)

Reconnect starting with the negative

terminal

(

-

)

.

)

Check that the terminals and connectors

a

re clean. If the

y

are covered with sulphate

(

whitish or

g

reenish deposit

)

, remove them

a

n

d

c

l

ea

n th

e

m.

Char

g

in

g

the batter

y

usin

g

a

batter

y

char

g

er

195

7

Practical information

Removin

g

a front or rea

r

wiper blade

)

Raise the correspondin

g

wiper arm.

)

Remove the wiper blade, slidin

g

it towards

th

e

ou

t

s

i

de

.

Changing a wiper

blade

Fittin

g

a front or rear wiper

blade

)

At the front, check the size of the wiper

b

l

ade

as

th

e

s

h

o

rt

e

r

b

l

ade

i

s

fitt

ed

o

n th

e

ri

g

ht-hand side of the vehicle.

)

P

ut t

h

e correspon

di

n

g

new w

i

per

bl

a

d

e

i

n

p

lace and

f

ix it.

)

Fold down the wiper arm care

f

ully.

Automatic power cut-off to accessories

Af

ter the engine has stopped, when the

ig

nition switch is in the "ACC" position

(

or the vehicle in "ACC" mode

)

yo

u

ca

n

s

till

use

f

u

n

c

ti

o

n

s

suc

h

as

th

e

aud

i

o

e

quipment, windscreen wipers, dipped beam

h

eadlamps, courtes

y

lamps, etc. for about

t

hi

rt

y

m

i

nutes.

Cuttin

g

off

O

nce the thirty minutes have expired, the

p

ower suppl

y

to the accessories will be

a

utomaticall

y

cut off.

Restorin

g

power

The power supply will be restored the next time

the i

g

nition is switched on.

The

p

eriod be

f

ore cut-o

ff

can be

e

xtended up to about sixt

y

minutes

or deactivated, via the colour screen

"Equipment" menu.

196

Practical information

Recovering the vehicle

General

r

ecommendations

Observe the le

g

islation in force in

y

our

c

ountr

y

.

Ensure that the wei

g

ht o

f

the towin

g

vehicle is hi

g

her than that of the towed

v

ehicle

.

The person at the wheel of the towed

ve

hi

c

l

e must

h

ave a va

lid

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

li

ce

n

ce

.

When towin

g

a vehicle with all

f

our

wheels on the

g

round, alwa

y

s use an

approved towin

g

bar; rope and straps

are pro

hibi

te

d

.

When towin

g

a vehicle with the en

g

ine

off

, there is no lon

g

er an

y

power

assistance for brakin

g

or steerin

g

.

In the

f

ollowin

g

cases,

y

ou must alwa

y

s

c

all on a professional recover

y

service:

- vehicle broken down on a motorwa

y

or fast road

,

- 4 wheel drive vehicle,

- w

h

en

i

t

i

s not poss

ibl

e to put t

h

e

g

earbox into neutral, unlock the

s

teer

i

n

g

, or re

l

ease t

h

e par

ki

n

g

brake,

- tow

i

n

g

w

i

t

h

on

ly

two w

h

ee

l

s on t

h

e

g

round,

- where there is no approved towin

g

ba

r

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

...

T

ow

i

n

g

w

i

t

h

t

h

e w

h

ee

l

s on t

h

e

g

roun

d

i

s onl

y

possible on 2 wheel drive

(

2WD

)

v

e

r

sio

n

s

.

Recover

y

of

y

our vehicle

2 wheel drive

(

2WD

)

versions: towin

g

w

i

t

h

t

h

e w

h

ee

l

s on t

h

e

g

roun

d

)

Put the

g

ear lever into neutral

(

position

N

f

or the

C

VT gearbox

)

.

)

Unlock the steerin

g

b

y

b

y

turnin

g

the

i

g

nition switch to the " O

N

" position

(

o

r

t

o

"

ON

" m

ode

f

o

r v

e

hi

c

l

e

fitt

ed

with th

e

"Ke

y

less Entr

y

and Startin

g

" s

y

stem

)

.

)

Release the parkin

g

brake.

)

S

witch on the hazard warnin

g

lamps on

bo

t

h

v

ehicles

.

)

Move o

ff

g

entl

y

and travel slowl

y

f

or a short

distance only.

)

Fi

t t

h

e tow

i

n

g

b

ar to t

h

e tow

i

n

g

e

y

e on t

h

e

c

hassis, located under the

f

ront bum

p

er.

197

7

Practical information

V

ehicles fitted with the 4 wheel drive

s

y

stem must alwa

y

s be recovered on a

f

latbed

.

Ne

v

e

r

ha

v

e

t

he

v

ehicle

t

o

w

ed

w

i

t

h

t

he

f

our wheels on the

g

round, this could

d

ama

g

e t

h

e transm

i

ss

i

on.

Th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

m

us

t n

o

t

be

t

o

w

ed

with th

e

f

ront or rear wheels on the

g

round even

if it is in front "2WD"

(

2 wheel drive

)

mode

.

4 wheel drive

(

4WD

)

versions: recover

y

on a ﬂ atbed

198

Practical information

)

O

n the rear bumper, remove the cover by

pullin

g

at the bottom usin

g

the

j

ack handle

1

.

)

S

crew in the towing eye 2

f

ully using the

wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

3

.

)

Install the towin

g

bar.

)

Switch on the hazard warnin

g

lamps on

bo

th v

e

hi

c

l

es

.

)

Move off

g

entl

y

and travel slowl

y

for a short

di

stance on

ly

.

Towin

g

another vehicle

A

ccess to the toolin

g

The towin

g

e

y

e and the tools are stored under

th

e

boo

t fl

oo

r.

T

o

g

a

i

n access to t

h

em:

)

open t

h

e

b

oot,

)

li

f

t and remove the boot

f

loor,

)

take the towing eye and the tools required.

L

ist of tools

1.

Jac

k h

a

n

d

l

e

.

2.

Towin

g

e

y

e.

3.

Wh

ee

l

b

r

ace

.

199

7

Practical information

Towing a trailer, a caravan...

We recommend the use o

f

g

enuine

C

ITR

OË

N t

o

w

ba

r

s

a

n

d

th

e

ir h

a

rn

esses

t

h

at

h

ave

b

een teste

d

an

d

a

pp

rove

d

f

rom the design stage o

f

your vehicle

a

nd that the

f

ittin

g

o

f

the towbar is

e

ntrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a

qualified workshop.

If the towbar is not fitted b

y

a

CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that

it is

f

itted

f

ollowin

g

the manu

f

acturer's

i

n

s

tr

uc

t

io

n

s

.

Your vehicle is primaril

y

desi

g

ned for

transport

i

n

g

peop

l

e an

d

l

u

gg

a

g

e,

b

ut

i

t ma

y

also be used

f

or towin

g

a trailer.

Drivin

g

with a trailer sub

j

ects the towin

g

vehicle

to more si

g

nificant stress and its driver must be

particularl

y

care

f

ul.

200

Practical information

Drivin

g

advice

Distribution of loads

)

Di

s

tri

bu

t

e

th

e

l

oad

in th

e

tr

a

il

e

r

so

th

a

t th

e

h

eaviest items are as close as possible to

the axle and the nose wei

g

ht approaches the

m

aximum permitted without exceedin

g

it.

Ai

r

d

ens

i

t

y

d

ecreases w

i

t

h

a

l

t

i

tu

d

e, t

h

us

r

educin

g

en

g

ine per

f

ormance. Above

1 000 metres, the maximum towin

g

load must

be reduced by 10

%

o

f

the

G

TW and so on

f

or

e

ver

y

1 000 metres o

f

altitude.

R

e

f

e

r t

o

th

e

"T

ec

hni

ca

l D

a

t

a

"

sec

ti

o

n f

o

r

de

t

a

il

s

of the wei

g

hts and towin

g

loads which appl

y

to

y

our vehicle.

Side wind

)

Take into account the increased sensitivit

y

t

o

side

w

i

n

d

.

Coolin

g

Towin

g

a trailer on a slope increases the

temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electricall

y

controlled, its coolin

g

c

apacit

y

is not dependent on the en

g

ine speed.

)

T

o

l

ower t

h

e en

gi

ne spee

d

, re

d

uce

y

our

s

pee

d

.

Th

e max

i

mum tow

i

n

g

l

oa

d

on a

l

on

g

s

l

ope

depends on the gradient and the outside

tem

p

erature.

In all cases, pa

y

attention to the coolant

temperature.

)

I

f

this messa

g

e is displa

y

ed, stop

y

our

v

ehicle as soon as it is safe to do so

.

Brakin

g

Towin

g

a trailer increases the brakin

g

distance.

T

y

res

)

Check the t

y

re pressures of the towin

g

vehicle and of the trailer, observin

g

the

r

ecommended pressures.

Li

g

htin

g

)

Check the li

g

htin

g

and si

g

nallin

g

on the

tr

a

il

e

r.

I

f

the messa

g

e

f

lashes slowl

y

, wait

f

or the

e

ngine to cool be

f

ore topping up the level, i

f

necessary

.

If the messa

g

e flashes rapidl

y

, contact a

C

ITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop

without dela

y

.

201

7

Practical information

Fitting roof bars

The bod

y

sill

f

inishers should not be

u

sed as a step when fittin

g

roof bars.

U

se accessor

i

es recommen

d

e

d

by

C

ITRO

Ë

N and follow the accessory

manu

f

acturer's

f

ittin

g

instructions.

Maximum authorised wei

g

ht on the roo

f

bars, for a loadin

g

hei

g

ht not exceedin

g

40 cm

(

except bic

y

cle carriers

)

: 80 k

g

.

If the hei

g

ht exceeds 40 cm, adapt the

s

peed o

f

the vehicle to the condition o

f

the road, to avoid dama

g

in

g

the roo

f

bars and the

f

ixin

g

s on the roo

f

.

Please re

f

er to national legislation to

c

ompl

y

with the re

g

ulations re

g

ardin

g

the transportation of ob

j

ects which are

lon

g

er than the vehicle.

The transverse roof bars are fitted to the lon

g

itudinal bars at the 8 fixin

g

points masked b

y

covers.

Usin

g

a small screwdriver, remove the 8 covers on the inner faces of the lon

g

itudinal bars.

The transverse bars are fitted directl

y

to the roof of the vehicle, at the 4 anchora

g

e points masked

b

y

covers.

S

lide the covers towards the front of the vehicle to remove them.

Retain the protective covers

f

or re

f

ittin

g

a

f

ter removal o

f

the roo

f

bars.

V

ehicles fitted with lon

g

itudinal bars

V

ehicles not fitted with lon

g

itudinal bars

For reasons of safet

y

and to avoid dama

g

in

g

the roof, it is essential to use transverse bars that are

approved for

y

our vehicle.

202

Practical information

Accessories

A

wide ran

g

e of accessories and

g

enuine parts is available from the CITROËN dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliabilit

y

and safet

y

.

The

y

are all adapted to

y

our vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warrant

y

.

"

Comfort":

f

ront and rear parkin

g

sensors, smoker's

ki

t, coat

h

an

g

er on

h

ea

d

restra

i

nt,

i

nsu

l

ate

d

m

odule, aluminium

f

ootrest, reading lamp, air

de

f

lectors, sun blinds...

"Trans

p

ort solutions":

towbar with quickl

y

detachable ball, rear

c

arr

y

in

g

platform

(

eas

y

base

)

, roof bars, boot

liner, boot spacers, bic

y

cle carrier for roof bars,

s

ki carrier, canoe carrier, ri

g

id roo

f

boxes,

f

lexible roo

f

boxes, boot net...

"St

y

le":

16 inch allo

y

wheels, 18 inch allo

y

wheels,

ch

rome

d

oor

h

an

dl

e s

h

e

ll

s, c

h

rome

d

m

i

rror

shells,

f

ront s

p

oiler, brushed aluminium interior

trim kit,

g

loss black interior trim kit, parkin

g

b

rake lever trim, aluminium

g

ear knob, leather

steerin

g

wheel...

"Securit

y

and safet

y

":

anti-intrusion alarm, warnin

g

trian

g

le, hi

g

h

visibilit

y

vest, breathal

y

ser, first aid kit, snow

c

hains, anti-slip covers, wheel securit

y

bolts,

c

hild seats,

f

ire extin

g

uisher,

f

o

g

lamp kit,

d

o

g

uar

d

, sto

l

en ve

hi

c

l

e trac

ki

n

g

s

y

stem,

accessories

f

or pets

(

seat belts, seat and boot

protectors, cage

)

...

"P

rotect

i

on

"

:

mat

*

, boot carpet, side protective mouldin

g

s,

d

oor s

ill

p

rotectors,

b

oot s

ill

p

rotector, ve

hi

c

l

e

c

over,

f

ront and rear bum

p

er

p

rotective

m

ouldin

g

s...

Conversion kits

You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a

trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa.

I

f

a

t

o

w

ba

r

a

n

d

it

s

h

a

rn

ess

i

s

f

itt

ed

o

utside the CITROËN dealer network,

thi

s

m

us

t

be

do

n

e

in lin

e

with th

e

ma

n

u

f

ac

t

u

r

e

r'

s

in

s

tr

uc

ti

o

n

s

.

*

To prevent an

y

risk o

f

j

ammin

g

o

f

the

p

e

d

a

l

s:

- ensure that the mat is

p

ositioned and

secured correctl

y

,

- never fit one mat on top of another.

203

7

Practical information

The

f

ittin

g

o

f

electrical equipment

o

r

accesso

ri

es

whi

c

h

a

r

e

n

o

t

recommended b

y

CITROËN ma

y

result

in a failure of

y

our vehicle's electronic

sy

stem and excessive electrical

c

onsumption.

Please note this precaution. You

are advised to contact a

C

ITR

OË

N

representat

i

ve to

b

e s

h

own t

h

e ran

g

e

o

f

recommended e

q

ui

p

ment and

accesso

ri

es

.

Installation of radio

c

ommunication

transmitters

Before installin

g

an

y

after-market radio

c

ommunication transmitter,

y

ou can

c

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer for the

s

peci

f

ication o

f

transmitters which can

be

f

itted

(f

requenc

y

, maximum power,

a

erial

p

osition, s

p

eci

f

ic installation

r

equirements

)

, in line with the Vehicle

E

lectroma

g

netic Compatibilit

y

Directive

(

2004/104/EC

)

.

Dependin

g

on the le

g

islation in

f

orce

in the country, it may be compulsory

to have a hi

g

h visibilit

y

sa

f

et

y

vest,

warnin

g

trian

g

le and spare bulbs and

f

uses

a

v

a

il

ab

l

e

in th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

"M

u

l

t

i

me

di

a

"

:

sem

i

-

i

nte

g

ra

l

sate

lli

te nav

ig

at

i

on s

y

stems,

p

orta

bl

e sate

lli

te nav

ig

at

i

on s

y

stems, au

di

o

s

ystems, speakers, rear shel

f

with speakers,

h

ands-

f

ree kit, DVD pla

y

er, mappin

g

update

DVD, speed camera detector, Wi-Fi on board,

230

V socket, head-up displa

y

, iPhone char

g

er,

r

ea

r m

u

ltim

ed

i

a

ca

rri

e

r...

204

Checks

TOTAL & CITROËN

205

8

Checks

Bonnet

)

O

pen the left-hand front door.

)

P

u

ll th

e

int

e

ri

o

r

bo

nn

e

t r

e

l

ease

l

e

v

e

r

A

,

located at the bottom o

f

the door aperture.

D

o not open t

h

e

b

onnet

i

n

high

w

i

n

d

s.

Wh

en t

h

e en

gi

ne

i

s

h

ot,

h

an

dl

e t

h

e

xterior sa

f

et

y

catch and the bonnet

s

ta

y

with care

(

risk o

f

burns

)

.

)

Unclip the stay

C

f

rom its housing on the

bac

k

of

th

e

bo

nn

e

t.

)

Fix the sta

y

in the notch to hold the bonnet

open

.

Closin

g

)

Take the sta

y

out of the support notch.

)

Clip the sta

y

in its housin

g

on the back o

f

t

he

bo

nn

e

t.

)

Lo

w

e

r t

he

bo

nn

e

t

a

n

d

r

elease

i

t

a

t t

he

e

n

d

of

it

s

tr

a

v

e

l.

)

P

u

ll

o

n th

e

bo

nn

e

t t

o

c

h

ec

k th

a

t it i

s

ecured correctl

y

.

Th

e

l

oca

ti

o

n

o

f th

e

int

e

ri

o

r

bo

nn

e

t r

e

l

ease

l

ever prevents openin

g

of the bonnet while

th

e

fr

o

nt l

e

ft

doo

r i

s

c

l

osed

.

Openin

g

)

Push the exterior safet

y

catch B t

o

th

e

l

e

ft

a

n

d

r

a

i

se

th

e

bo

nn

e

t.

This messa

g

e appears in the instrument panel

s

creen if the bonnet is not full

y

closed.

T

he coolin

g

fan ma

y

start after

switchin

g

off the en

g

ine: take care

with articles and clothin

g

that mi

g

ht

b

ecome cau

g

ht b

y

the fan blades

.

206

Checks

fluids and the replacement of certain

c

omponen

t

s.

Petrol engines

1.

Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid

rese

rv

oi

r.

2.

Coo

l

a

nt h

eade

r t

a

nk.

3.

Br

a

k

e

f

l

u

i

d

r

ese

rv

o

ir.

4.

Battery.

5.

F

usebo

x.

6

.

Air filt

e

r.

7

.

En

g

ine oil dipstick.

8.

En

g

ine oil filler cap.

1.6 litre 115

2

.0 litre 150

207

8

Checks

c

heckin

g

the levels of the various fluids, for

replacin

g

certain components and for primin

g

the fuel s

y

stem.

Diesel engines

1.

Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid

rese

rv

oi

r.

2.

Coo

l

a

nt r

ese

rv

o

ir.

3.

Br

a

k

e

f

l

u

i

d

r

ese

rv

o

ir.

4.

Battery.

5

.

F

usebo

x.

6

.

Air filt

e

r.

7

.

En

g

ine oil dipstick.

8.

En

g

ine oil filler cap.

9.

Primin

g

pump * .

1

.

6

H

Di 110

1

.

8

HDi 150

*

Accordin

g

to en

g

ine.

208

Checks

When the symbol begins to flash

r

apidl

y

(

approximatel

y

twice per

s

econd

)

, there is not much fuel

remainin

g

in

y

our tank

(

approximatel

y

5

litres

)

.

You must fill the tank to avoid runnin

g

ou

t

of

fue

l.

Fuel tank

Capacit

y

of the tank: approximatel

y

60 litres

.

Low fuel level

Filli

n

g

A

label, a

ff

ixed on the inside o

f

the

f

la

p

,

r

eminds you o

f

the type o

f

uel to be used

a

ccordin

g

to

y

our en

g

ine.

More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in

order to be re

g

istered b

y

the fuel

g

au

g

e.

Location of the ca

p

When the low fuel level is reached

,

t

hi

s

i

n

di

cat

i

on appears

i

n t

h

e

instrument panel screen. When it

f

irst

c

omes on,

y

ou

h

ave approx

i

mate

ly

10 litres o

f

uel remaining.

The s

y

mbol

f

lashes slowl

y

(

approximatel

y

once per second

)

.

1.

O

penin

g

the filler flap.

2.

Removin

g

the filler cap.

3.

Hookin

g

the filler cap.

To

f

ill the tank sa

f

el

y

:

)

t

he en

g

ine must be switched off

,

)

pull the control A l

oca

t

ed

a

t th

e

bo

tt

o

m l

e

ft

o

f th

e

d

riv

e

r'

s

sea

t t

o

r

e

l

ease

th

e

f

ue

l fill

e

r

f

lap,

)

open the

f

uel

f

iller

f

lap

B

,

)

turn the

f

iller cap

C

to the le

f

t,

)

remove the

f

iller ca

p

C

,

)

f

ill the tank, but do not continue after the

3

r

d

cut-off of the nozzl

e

; this could cause

m

a

lf

u

n

c

ti

o

n

s

.

When

y

ou have filled the tank:

)

refit the filler cap, insertin

g

the upper part

f

irst

,

)

screw in the

f

iller cap to the ri

g

ht,

)

close the

f

lap.

Ensure that the

f

uel

f

iller

f

la

p

is closed

c

orrectly.

This symbol indicates that the

f

uel

tank cap is located on the le

f

t-hand

s

i

de

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

Openin

g

the cap ma

y

cause an inrush of air.

Thi

s vacuum, w

hi

c

h

i

s comp

l

ete

ly

norma

l

,

i

s

c

aused b

y

the sealin

g

o

f

the

f

uel s

y

stem.

209

8

Checks

p

etro

l

en

gi

nes

The petrol en

g

ines are perfectl

y

compatible

with E10 or E24 t

y

pe petrol bio

f

uels

(

containin

g

10

%

or 24

%

ethanol

)

, con

f

ormin

g

to European

s

t

a

n

da

r

ds

EN 22

8

a

n

d

EN 1

53

7

6

.

E85 type

f

uels

(

containing up to 85

%

ethanol

)

are reserved exclusivel

y

f

or vehicles marketed

for the use of this t

y

pe of fuel

(

BioFlex

vehicles

)

. The qualit

y

of the ethanol must

c

ompl

y

with European standard EN 15293.

For Brazil onl

y

, special vehicles are marketed

to run on

f

uels containin

g

up to 100

%

ethanol

(

E100 t

y

pe

)

.

Qualit

y

of the fuel used for

Di

ese

l

en

gi

nes

The Diesel en

g

ines are perfectl

y

compatible

with

b

i

ofue

l

s

whi

c

h

co

n

fo

rm t

o

cu

rr

e

nt

a

n

d

f

uture European standards

(

Diesel

f

uel which

c

om

p

lies with standard EN 590 mixed with a

bio

f

uel which complies with standard EN 14214

)

available at the pumps

(

containin

g

up to 7

%

Fatt

y

Acid Meth

y

l Ester

)

.

The B

30

biofuel can be used in certain Diesel

e

n

g

ines; however, this use is sub

j

ect to strict

application of the special servicin

g

conditions.

C

ontact a CITRO

Ë

N dealer or a qualified

wor

k

s

h

op.

The use o

f

an

y

other t

y

pe o

f

(

bio

)f

uel

(

vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,

domestic

f

uel...

)

is strictl

y

prohibited

(

risk o

f

dama

g

e to the en

g

ine and fuel s

y

stem

)

.

1.6 litre petrol en

g

ines, even thou

g

h the

y

have

been desi

g

ned to operate on 95 R

O

N petrol,

c

an accept 90 R

O

N petrol without en

g

ine

adj

ustments,

b

ut w

i

t

h

a s

ligh

t

d

eter

i

orat

i

on

i

n

p

er

f

ormance.

2.0 litre petrol en

g

ines can accept 90 R

O

N or

h

i

g

her petrol.

210

Checks

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

e

n

g

ine, the

f

uel s

y

stem must be manuall

y

p

rimed i

f

you run out o

f

uel; re

f

er to the

c

orrespondin

g

Diesel en

g

ine compartment

vi

e

w.

1.6 litre HDi en

g

ine

)

Fill th

e

f

ue

l t

a

nk with

a

t l

eas

t fiv

e

litr

es

of

d

i

ese

l.

)

O

pen the bonnet.

)

If necessar

y

, unclip the st

y

lin

g

cover for

access to t

h

e pr

i

m

i

n

g

pump.

)

S

queeze and release the primin

g

pump

repeatedl

y

until resistance is

f

elt

(

there ma

y

be resistance at the

f

irst press

)

.

)

O

perate the starter until the en

g

ine starts

(

if the en

g

ine does not start at the first

attempt, wait around 15 seconds before

tr

y

in

g

a

g

ain

)

.

)

If the en

g

ine does not start after a few

attempts, operate t

h

e pr

i

m

i

n

g

pump a

g

a

i

n

t

h

en start t

h

e en

gi

ne.

)

C

lip the st

y

lin

g

cover back in place.

)

C

lose the bonnet.

211

8

Checks

Checking levels

Take care when workin

g

under the bonnet, as certain areas of the en

g

ine ma

y

be extremel

y

hot

(

risk of burns

)

.

Oil level

Th

e

c

h

ec

k i

s

ca

rri

ed

ou

t with th

e

di

pst

i

c

k

.

This check will onl

y

be correct i

f

the

ve

hi

c

l

e

i

s on

l

eve

l

g

roun

d

an

d

t

h

e

ngine has been o

ff

f

or more than 30 minutes.

It is normal to top up the oil level between

two services

(

or oil chan

g

es

)

. CITROËN

recommends that

y

ou check the level, and top

up if necessar

y

, ever

y

3 000 miles

(

5 000 km

)

.

A

fter toppin

g

up the oil, the check when

s

w

i

tc

hi

n

g

on t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on w

i

t

h

t

h

e o

il

l

eve

l

i

n

di

cator

i

n t

h

e

i

nstrument pane

l

i

s not va

lid

durin

g

the 30 minutes a

f

ter toppin

g

up.

E

n

gi

ne o

il

c

h

an

g

e

Re

f

er to the servicin

g

booklet

f

or details o

f

the

i

nterval

f

or this o

p

eration.

In order to maintain the reliabilit

y

o

f

the en

g

ine

a

nd emission control s

y

stem, the use o

f

a

dditives in the en

g

ine oil is prohibited.

Oil s

p

eciﬁ cation

The oil must be the correct

g

rade for

y

our

en

g

ine and con

f

orm to the manu

f

acturer's

reco

mm

e

n

da

t

io

n

s

.

If a level drops si

g

nificantl

y

, have the correspondin

g

s

y

stem checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Check all of these levels re

g

ularl

y

, in line with the servicin

g

booklet and the requirements of the warrant

y

. Top them up if necessar

y

, unless otherwise indicated.

D

i

p

stick

There are two marks on the dipstick:

A = m

a

xim

u

m

If

y

ou fill past this mark,

c

ontact a

C

ITR

OË

N dealer

o

r a quali

f

ied workshop.

B

= m

i

n

i

m

u

m

N

e

v

e

r

a

ll

o

w th

e

l

e

v

e

l t

o

fa

ll

be

l

o

w thi

s

m

a

rk.

212

Checks

Th

e

coo

l

a

nt l

e

v

e

l

s

h

ou

l

d

be

c

l

ose

t

o

th

e

"MAX" m

a

rk

bu

t

s

h

ou

l

d

n

e

v

e

r

e

x

ceed

i

t.

I

n a

ddi

t

i

on, as t

h

e coo

li

n

g

s

y

stem

i

s pressur

i

se

d

,

wait at least one hour a

f

ter switchin

g

o

ff

the

e

ngine be

f

ore carrying out any work.

To avoid an

y

risk o

f

scaldin

g

, unscrew the cap

by

two turns to allow the pressure to drop.

When the pressure has dropped, remove the

c

ap and top up the level.

Chan

g

in

g

the coolant

Th

e coo

l

ant

d

oes not

h

ave to

b

e c

h

an

g

e

d

.

Fluid s

p

eciﬁ cation

Th

e

coo

l

a

nt m

us

t

co

n

fo

rm t

o

th

e

ma

n

ufac

t

u

r

e

r'

s

r

eco

mm

e

n

da

ti

o

n

s

.

Th

e

b

r

a

k

e

fl

u

i

d

l

e

v

e

l

s

h

ou

l

d

be

c

l

ose

to the "MAX" mark. I

f

it is not, check

t

h

e

b

ra

k

e pa

d

wear.

Brake fluid level

Chan

g

in

g

the ﬂ uid

Re

f

er to the servicing booklet

f

or details o

f

the

interval

f

or this o

p

eration.

Fluid s

p

eciﬁ cation

Th

e

b

r

a

k

e

f

l

u

i

d

m

us

t

co

n

fo

rm t

o

th

e

ma

n

ufac

t

u

r

e

r'

s

r

eco

mm

e

n

da

ti

o

n

s

a

n

d

m

ee

t th

e

D

O

T

3

or D

O

T4 standard.

T

he coolin

g

fan ma

y

start after switchin

g

o

ff the en

g

ine: take care with articles and

c

l

ot

hi

n

g

t

h

at m

igh

t

b

ecome cau

gh

t

by

t

h

e

fan blades

.

When the en

g

ine is warm, the temperature o

f

the coolant is re

g

ulated b

y

the

f

an.

213

8

Checks

Avoid prolon

g

ed contact o

f

used oil or

f

l

u

i

ds

with th

e

s

kin.

M

os

t

of

th

ese

f

l

u

i

ds

a

r

e

h

a

rm

fu

l t

o

health or indeed ver

y

corrosive.

D

o

n

o

t

d

i

sca

r

d

used

o

il

o

r fl

u

i

ds

int

o

s

ewers or onto t

h

e

g

roun

d

.

T

a

k

e

used

o

il t

o

a

C

ITR

OË

N

dea

l

e

r

o

r

a quali

f

ied workshop

(

France

)

or to an

authorised waste dis

p

osal site.

Used

p

roducts

Toppin

g

up

The reservoir must be topped up without dela

y

b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

A

dditive level

(

1.6 HDi 110 Diesel versions

with particle emissions filter

)

The additive reservoir low level is indicated b

y

the displa

y

o

f

this messa

g

e.

Fluid speciﬁ cation

For optimum cleanin

g

and to avoid freezin

g

,

this fluid must not be topped up with or

replaced with plain water.

Screenwash and headlam

p

wash fluid

In th

e

case

of

v

e

hi

c

l

es

f

itt

ed

with

h

eadlam

p

washers, the low

f

luid level

is indicated by an audible signal and

a messa

g

e in the instrument panel

screen

.

Top up the reservoir when

y

ou next stop the

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

214

Checks

12 V batter

y

Electrol

y

te level

For access to the batter

y

, refer to the

"

12V batter

y

" section.

Th

e e

l

ectro

ly

te

l

eve

l

must

b

e

be

tw

ee

n th

e

"L

O

WER LEVEL"

a

n

d

"

U

PPER

LEVEL"

m

a

r

ks

.

Refer to the servicin

g

booklet for

details of the replacement intervals

for these components.

Air filter and passen

g

er compartment filter

Replace the oil filter each time the

e

n

g

ine oil is chan

g

ed.

Refer to the servicin

g

booklet for

details of the replacement interval fo

r

t

hi

s component.

Oil filter

If necessar

y

, top up usin

g

distilled water,

removin

g

the batter

y

cap from each cell.

Check the electrol

y

te level at least once

a

m

o

nth.

When carr

y

in

g

out work on the batter

y

, re

f

e

r

to "12V batter

y

" section

f

or details o

f

the

precautions to be taken be

f

ore disconnectin

g

the battery and

f

ollowing its reconnection.

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the servicin

g

booklet and accordin

g

to

y

our en

g

ine.

Otherwise, have them checked b

y

a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Dependin

g

on the environment

(

e.

g

. dust

y

atmosphere

)

and the use of the vehicle

(

e.

g

.

c

it

y

drivin

g)

, re

p

lace them twice as often if

necessary

.

y

A

clo

gg

ed passen

g

er compartment

f

ilter ma

y

h

ave an adverse e

ff

ect on the per

f

ormance

o

f

the air conditionin

g

s

y

stem and

g

enerate

u

n

des

ir

ab

l

e

odou

r

s

.

215

8

Checks

M

anual

g

earbox

Refer to the servicin

g

booklet for

m

aintenance of the

g

earbox.

"CVT"

g

earbox

Refer to the servicin

g

booklet for

m

aintenance of the "CVT"

g

earbox.

Particle emissions filter

(

Diesel

)

The start o

f

saturation o

f

the particle

f

ilter is

indicated b

y

the temporar

y

illumination o

f

this

warning lamp accompanied by a message in

the instrument panel screen.

As soon as the traffic conditions permit,

r

e

g

enerate the filter b

y

drivin

g

at a

s

peed of at least 25 mph

(

40 km/h

)

for

a

bout 20 minutes

(

with the 1.6 litre HDi

e

n

g

ine the minimum speed is 36 mph

(

60 km

/

h

))

.

I

f

the warning lamp stays on, this

in

d

i

ca

t

es

a

l

o

w

add

itiv

e

l

e

v

e

l.

O

n a new vehicle, the

f

irst

p

article

f

ilter re

g

eneration operations ma

y

be

a

ccompanied b

y

a "burnin

g

" smell,

which is perfectl

y

normal.

Followin

g

prolon

g

ed operation of the

vehicle at ver

y

low speed or at idle,

y

ou ma

y

,

i

n except

i

ona

l

c

i

rcumstances,

n

otice the emission o

f

water vapour at

t

he

e

x

haus

t

o

n

accele

r

a

t

io

n.

This

does

no

t

affec

t th

e

be

h

a

vi

ou

r

of

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

o

r

th

e

nvir

o

nm

e

nt.

216

Checks

Brake wear depends on the st

y

le

of drivin

g

, particularl

y

in the case

of vehicles used in town

,

over short

di

stances.

I

t ma

y

b

e necessar

y

to

h

ave the condition o

f

the brakes checked, even

be

tw

ee

n v

ehicle

se

rv

ices

.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a dro

p

in

th

e

b

r

a

k

e

f

l

u

i

d

l

e

v

e

l in

d

i

ca

t

es

th

a

t th

e

b

r

a

k

e

p

ads are worn.

B

ra

k

e

p

a

d

s

For information on checkin

g

brake

disc wear, contact a CITRO

Ë

N deale

r

or a quali

f

ied workshop.

Brake disc wear

P

arkin

g

brake

If

e

x

cess

iv

e

tr

a

v

e

l

o

r

a

l

oss

of

e

ffectiveness of this s

y

stem is

n

oticed, the parkin

g

brake must be

ch

ec

k

e

d

, even

b

etween two serv

i

ces.

O

nl

y

use products recommended b

y

CITROËN or products of equivalent

q

ualit

y

and specification.

I

n or

d

er to opt

i

m

i

se t

h

e operat

i

on

o

f

units as important as the brakin

g

s

y

stem, CITRO

Ë

N selects and offers

very speci

f

ic products.

To avoid dama

g

in

g

the electrical units,

the use of a hi

g

h pressure washe

r

i

n the en

g

ine compartment is strictl

y

p

rohibited

.

C

hecking this system must be done by a

C

ITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified worksho

p

.

9

217

Technical data

PETROL ENGINE

S

1

.6 litre 11

5

2.0 litre 15

0

M

odel codes:

BU

...

NKZ7

NKZ7/

S

NKZ0

NKZ0/

S

AFYR

AFZ7

AFYV

AFZM

AFYT

AFZH

AFYW

AFZP

T

ransm

i

ss

i

on mo

de

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

C

ubic capacit

y

(

cc

)

1

590

1

998

Bore x stroke

(

mm

)

7

5

x

90

86

x

86

Max power: EU standard

(

kW

)

86

113

Max power engine speed

(

rpm

)

6 000 6 000

Max torque: EU standard

(

Nm

)

1

5

4 1

99

Max torque en

g

ine speed

(

rpm

)

4

000

4 2

00

F

ue

l

U

nleaded

U

nleaded

C

atalytic converte

r

Y

es

Y

es

GEARBOXE

S

Ma

n

ual

(

5-speed

)

Ma

n

ual

(

5-speed

)

C

VT

(

6-speed

)

OIL CAPACITY

(

in litres

)

En

g

ine

(

with filter replacement

)

4.

2

4.

3

.../

S

: model

f

itted with the

S

top

&

S

tart

(

A

S&G)

f

unction.

Engines and gearboxes

218

Technical data

Caution, towin

g

with a li

g

htl

y

loaded towin

g

vehicle can have an adverse affect on its roadholdin

g

.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced b

y

10 % fo

r

e

ach additional 1

000

metres of altitude.

The speed of a towin

g

vehicle must not exceed 60 mph

(

100 km/h

)

(

compl

y

with the le

g

islation in force in

y

our countr

y)

.

Hi

g

h ambient temperatures ma

y

result in a reduction in the per

f

ormance o

f

the vehicle to protect the en

g

ine; i

f

the ambient temperature is above 37

°C

,

li

m

i

t t

he

t

o

w

ed

load

.

P

ETROL ENGINE

S

1.6 litre 115

2

.0 litre 150

Gearboxe

s

M

anual

(

5-speed

)

Manual

(

5-speed

)

C

VT

(

6-speed

)

Model codes

:

B

U..

.

NKZ7

NKZ7/

S

NKZ0

NKZ0/

S

AFYR

AFZ7

AFYV

A

FZ

M

AFYT

A

FZ

H

AFYW

A

FZ

P

T

ransm

i

ss

i

on mo

de

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

- Unladen wei

g

ht

1

320

1

30

5

1

36

5

1

4

30

1

39

5

1

4

60

- Kerb weight 1

3

95 1

3

80 1 440 1 505 1 470 1 5

3

5

-

G

ross vehicle wei

g

ht

(G

VW

)

1

8

7

0

1

8

7

0

1

9

7

0

1

9

7

0

1

9

7

0

1

9

7

0

-

G

ross vehicle wei

g

ht

(G

VW

)

when towin

g

1

9

2

5

1

9

2

5

2

035

2

035

2

035

2

035

-

G

ross train wei

g

ht

(G

TW

)

on a 12

%

g

radient

3

0

2

5

3

0

2

5

3

335

3

335

3

335

3

335

- Braked trailer

(

within GTW limit

)

on a 10% or 12%

g

radient

1 1

00

1 1

00

1

300

1

300

1

300

1

300

-

U

nbraked traile

r

685

7

20

7

50

7

20

7

50

- Recommended nose wei

g

ht 55 55 65 65 65 65

Weights and towed loads (kg)

9

219

Technical data

D

IESEL ENGINE

S

1.6 HDi 11

0

1.8 HDi 150

M

odel codes:

B

U..

.

9

HD

8

/

S

9

HDB/

S

6HZ

8

/

S

6HZB

6HZB/

S

T

ransmission mod

e

2

W

D

4

W

D

2

WD

4

W

D

C

ubic capacity

(

cc

)

1 560 1 798

Bore x stroke

(

mm

)

77 x

88

.

3

83

x

83

.1

Max power: EU standard

(

kW

)

8

4 11

0

Max power en

g

ine speed

(

rpm

)

3

600

4

000

Max torque: EU standard

(

Nm

)

270

3

00

Max torque en

g

ine speed

(

rpm

)

1 7

50

2

000

t

o

3

000

F

ue

l Di

ese

l Di

ese

l

Catal

y

tic converte

r

Y

es

Y

es

Particle emission

f

ilter

(

PEF

)

Y

es

Y

es

GEARBOXE

S

Ma

n

ual

(

6-speed

)

Ma

n

ual

(

6-speed

)

OIL CAPACITY

(

in litres

)

En

g

ine

(

with

f

ilter replacement

)

3

.7

5

.

3

.../

S

: model fitted with the Stop & Start

(

AS&G

)

function.

Engines and gearboxes

220

Technical data

The

G

TW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude o

f

1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10

%

f

o

r

e

ach additional 1 000 metres o

f

altitude.

The speed of a towin

g

vehicle must not exceed 60 mph

(

100 km/h

)

(

compl

y

with the le

g

islation in force in

y

our countr

y)

.

Hi

g

h ambient temperatures ma

y

result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the en

g

ine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,

limit th

e

t

o

w

ed

l

oad

.

D

IESEL ENGINE

S

1.6 HDi 11

0

1

.8 HDi 150

Gearboxe

s

Manual

(

6-speed

)

M

anual

(

6-speed

)

Model codes

:

B

U..

.

9HD8/

S

9HDB/

S

6HZ8/

S

6HZB

6HZB/

S

T

ransm

i

ss

i

on

m

o

de

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

- Unladen wei

g

ht 1

3

1

5

1 42

5

1 4

30

1 4

95

- Kerb wei

g

ht

1

390

1

5

00

1

5

0

5

1

57

0

- Gross vehicle wei

g

ht

(

GVW

)

2

060

2

060

2

060

- Gross vehicle wei

g

ht

(

GVW

)

when towin

g

2 1

30

2 1

30

2 1

30

-

G

ross train wei

g

ht

(G

TW

)

on a 12

%

g

radient

3

2

60

3

2

60

3

530

- Braked trailer

(

within

G

TW limit

)

o

n a 10

%

or 12

%

gradient

1 1

30

1 1

30

1 4

00

- Braked trailer

*

(

with trans

f

er o

f

load within

the

G

TW limit

)

1

3

00 1

3

00

-

U

nbraked traile

r

695

7

50

7

50

- Recommended nose wei

g

ht 7

0

7

0

7

0

Weights and towed loads (kg)

* The wei

g

ht of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit provided that the wei

g

ht of the towin

g

vehicle is reduced b

y

the same amount.

Caution, towin

g

with a li

g

htl

y

loaded vehicle ma

y

adversel

y

affect roadholdin

g

.

9

221

Technical data

Dimensions (in mm)

Th

ese

d

im

e

n

s

i

o

n

s

h

a

v

e

bee

n m

easu

r

ed

o

n

a

v

e

hi

c

l

e

th

a

t i

s

n

o

t l

oaded

.

*

M

222

Technical data

Identiﬁ cation markings

Various visible markings

f

or the identi

f

ication and tracing o

f

your vehicle.

A.

M

anufacturer's plate

.

It is riveted to the right hand middle pilla

r

a

nd carries the

f

ollowin

g

in

f

ormation:

- manufacturer,

- EU t

y

pe approval number,

- vehicle identification number

(

VIN

)

,

-

g

ross vehicle wei

g

ht,

-

g

ross tra

i

n we

igh

t,

- maximum

f

ront axle wei

g

ht,

- max

i

mum rear ax

l

e we

igh

t.

The t

y

re pressures must be checked

when the t

y

res are cold, at least once

a

m

o

nth.

If the t

y

re pressures are too low, this

increases fuel consumption.

B.

Ty

re

l

a

b

e

l.

Thi

s

l

abe

l i

s

aff

ix

ed

t

o

th

e

th

e

d

riv

e

r'

s

ide middle pillar and carries the

f

ollowin

g

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n:

- t

y

re sizes,

-

ty

re pressures.

C.

V

ehicle Identification Number

(

VIN

)

u

n

d

er t

h

e

b

onnet

.

Thi

s num

b

er

i

s en

g

rave

d

on t

h

e

b

o

dy

wor

k

n

ear the dam

p

er su

pp

ort.

O

ri

g

inal equipment t

y

res can be

c

hained using 9 mm chains.

C

ontact

a CITROËN dealer or a

q

ualified

workshop.

22

3

A

UDIO-TELEMATIC s

y

stem

The s

y

stem is protected in such a wa

y

that it will onl

y

operate in

y

our vehicle.

01 First steps - Control panel

For safet

y

reasons, the driver must carr

y

out operations

which require prolon

g

ed attention while the vehicle is

s

tationar

y

.

When the en

g

ine is switched off and to prevent

dischar

g

in

g

o

f

the batter

y

, the s

y

stem switches o

ff

f

ollowin

g

the activation o

f

the ener

gy

econom

y

mode.

CONTENTS

02 General operation

03 Navigation - Guidance

04 Audio / Video

05 Settings

06 Information

07 USB player

p.

224

225

226

236

258

261

264

08 BLUETOOTH

®

streaming - telephone

09 BLUETOOTH

®

telephone

p.

269

271

224

01

FIRST STEPS

AUDI

O

: select Audio-video

(

FM, CD, music

s

erver, ...

)

or Navi

g

ation

(

map

)

displa

y

.

V

O

L: ad

j

ust audio-video volume.

SC

ALE: chan

g

e the scale o

f

the map.

P

O

WER: audio system on

/

o

ff

(

only

)

.

O

PEN: opens the screen and

g

ives access to

C

D

/

DVD.

A second press closes the

screen

.

ENT:

co

nﬁ rm

s

th

e

c

h

o

i

ce

o

f th

e

it

e

m

selec

t

ed

i

n t

he

sc

r

ee

n.

For certain operations, con

ﬁ

rmation is

g

iven b

y

pressin

g

the touch screen.

Scroll the map displa

y

ed or selection of an

it

e

m.

Move a ﬁ n

g

er over the screen to operate

the s

y

stem.

Use the buttons o

ff

ered on the screen.

For safet

y

reasons, the driver

must onl

y

carr

y

out operations

which require prolon

g

ed

attent

i

on w

i

t

h

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

stat

i

onar

y.

Mute on

/

off.

Next or

p

revious selection for:

- a radio station,

- an audio track

(

CD

)

,

- a chapter

(

DVD

)

.

S

et the audio volume.

Chan

g

e the audio-video source

(

FM, CD,

m

usic server, ...

)

.

22

5

02

GENERAL OPERATION

M

O

DE: Audio-video m

e

n

u

fo

r:

- radio,

- audio, MP3 or WMA

C

D,

- music server,

-

DVD.

MEN

U

: Navi

g

ation-

g

uidanc

e

m

e

n

u

f

o

r

selectin

g

:

- a

d

est

i

nat

i

on

,

- a point o

f

interest

(

P

O

I

)

,

- an advanced search by P

O

I,

- one o

f

the 20 previous destinations,

- an address stored in the address book,

- the return home,

- certain navi

g

ation settin

g

s,

-

a

r

ou

t

e

de

m

o

n

s

tr

a

t

io

n.

NAVI: displa

y

of the current location on

th

e

map

.

S

ET: Settin

gs

m

e

n

u

f

o

r:

- switchin

g

off the screen,

- se

l

ect

i

n

g

t

h

e soun

d

sett

i

n

g

,

- se

l

ect

i

n

g

t

h

e p

i

cture qua

li

t

y

,

- selecting the language, the time zone

o

r the units,

- selectin

g

the size of the DVD picture,

- selectin

g

the

g

uidance voice, the

s

creen colour schemes or displa

y

o

f

t

h

e au

di

o-v

id

eo

i

con

,

- sett

i

n

g

certa

i

n equ

i

pment ava

il

a

bl

e

i

n

y

our ve

hi

c

l

e.

INF

O

:

I

nformation m

e

n

u

fo

r th

e

c

onsultation or adjustment o

f

certain

s

ettin

g

s

f

or

y

our vehicle.

DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTROLS - MENUS

22

6

03

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

The satellite navi

g

ation s

y

stem

g

uides the driver to the destination

th

a

t h

e

h

as

se

t in

acco

r

da

n

ce

with

a

c

h

ose

n r

ou

t

e

.

Initiall

y

, it searches for the destination required b

y

the user, then

i

t calculates the route and ﬁ nall

y

it provides the visual and vocal

g

u

id

ance

i

nstruct

i

ons.

A

point o

f

interest

(

P

O

I

)

is represented by an icon on

the map, it represents an airport, a station, a town

h

all, ...

WHAT IS A POINT OF INTEREST

(

POI

)

?

Up to 40 different icons ma

y

be displa

y

ed

(

refer to the

section "Points of interest icon"

)

.

The

y

are classiﬁ ed in 5

g

roups and identiﬁ ed b

y

one

c

olour

f

or each

g

roup:

-

S

hops,

ﬁ

nance and businesses

(G

reen

)

,

- Vehicles and travel

(

Dark blue

)

,

- Restaurants

(O

ran

g

e

)

,

- Public places and emer

g

enc

y

services

(

Brown

)

,

- Entertainment and attractions

(

Blue

)

.

GPS

(

Global Positionin

g

S

y

stem

)

consists of several

s

atellites arran

g

ed around the earth. The

y

continuousl

y

transmit di

g

ital si

g

nals which travel at the speed o

f

li

g

ht, on 2 different frequencies.

A

t an

y

gi

ven t

i

me, t

h

e s

y

stem rece

i

ves

i

ts pos

i

t

i

on

in r

e

l

a

ti

o

n t

o

th

e

sa

t

e

llit

es

de

t

ec

t

ed

a

n

d

th

e

tim

e

of

transmission o

f

the si

g

nal.

This enables the telematic unit to calculate its position

a

n

d

th

e

r

e

f

o

r

e

th

a

t

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

.

A

repositionin

g

process usin

g

the map database stored

o

n the hard disk allows the vehicle to be positioned

o

n the road network, so improvin

g

the accurac

y

of the

v

e

hi

c

l

e

l

oca

ti

o

n

fu

n

c

ti

o

n.

GPS SYSTEM

WHAT I

S

THE NAVIGATION

S

Y

S

TEM AND GP

S

?

The s

y

stem's measurements ma

y

be inaccurate if the vehicle is:

- in a tunnel or under

g

round car park,

- underneath a two-level motorwa

y

,

-

i

n an area w

i

t

h

severa

l

ver

y

high

b

u

ildi

n

g

s,

- surroun

d

e

d

by

c

l

ose

ly

p

l

ante

d

trees.

Depending on the vehicle's situation and the reception o

f

the

G

P

S

in

f

ormation, the displa

y

ed in

f

ormation ma

y

disappear

f

rom the

screen temporaril

y

.

WHAT PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE OBSERVED IN

ORDER TO MAKE BEST USE OF THE SYSTEM?

Do not place anything on or near the

G

P

S

aerial.

Do not use an

y

di

g

ital communication equipment

(

personal

c

omputers, etc.

)

near the

G

P

S

aerial.

Do not afﬁ x an

y

reﬂ ective ﬁ lms or ﬁ lms containin

g

carbon to the

win

do

w

s

.

227

03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

Manoeuvre icon: indicates whether the

A.

driver should turn left or ri

g

ht at the next

j

unction indicated b

y

the

g

uidance and the

di

stance to t

hi

s

j

unct

i

on.

Guidance route: indicates the route to the

B.

des

t

i

n

a

t

io

n.

Vehicle marker: indicates the position of

C.

the vehicle while drivin

g

.

TMC icon: displays trafﬁ c information

D.

s

uch as trafﬁ c

j

ams, road works, etc.

When the icon is touched, detailed TMC

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n

ca

n

be

vi

e

w

ed

.

Orientation mark: indicates the orientation

E.

o

f

the map displa

y

ed.

Map scale: indicates the scale of the map

F.

displa

y

ed.

Name of the street: indicates the name of

G.

th

e

cu

rr

e

nt

s

tr

ee

t.

Direction frame: displays the number of

H.

th

e

n

e

xt r

oad

o

r th

e

n

a

m

e

o

f th

e

n

e

xt

s

tr

ee

t w

hich

t

he

d

r

i

v

e

r

should

t

u

rn

i

nt

o

.

Destination/intermediate destination icon:

I.

in

d

i

ca

t

es

th

e

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

of

th

e

des

tin

a

ti

o

n

o

r int

e

rm

ed

i

a

t

e

des

tin

a

ti

o

n.

Two-map displa

y

.

S

in

g

le map displa

y

.

INFORMATION DISPLAYED ON THE MAP

D

URING NAVIGATION

Destination/intermediate destination

J.

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n: in

d

i

ca

t

es

th

e

d

i

s

t

a

n

ce

a

n

d

the time remaining until the destination o

r

int

e

rm

ed

i

a

t

e

des

tin

a

ti

o

n i

s

r

eac

h

ed

.

Press for access to the

K.

R

oute Menu

in

o

r

de

r t

o

:

- change the route in favour of another

K1

m

akin

g

a detour throu

g

h a speci

ﬁ

ed

r

e

gi

on,

- change the position of the destination,

K2

add

a

n int

e

rm

ed

i

a

t

e

des

tin

a

ti

o

n

a

n

d

c

han

g

e the route calculation conditions,

- display a route by various methods,

K3

- delete a route created,

K4

- search for points of interest (POI)

K5

a

r

ou

n

d

t

he

cu

rr

e

nt

loca

t

io

n.

K

H

E

F

B CA

D

G

I

J

22

8

03

- Select a location using the name of a point of

B

interest

(

P

O

I

)

.

Select:

- the country,

B1

- the city,

B2

- the name of a stored POI,

B3

- a POI category (airport, bowling alley, bus station,

B4

c

ar park, service station, hotel, cinema, ...

)

,

- a detailed POI list.

B5

- Select a location using an advanced search based

C

on a P

O

I:

- around the current location,

C1

- on the current route,

C2

- in the vicinity of the destination,

C3

- on a chosen street,

C4

- along a motorway or in the vicinity of the exit,

C5

- by scrolling the map,

C6

- taking the point of departure of the current route,

C7

- specifying the latitude/longitude coordinates.

C8

- Select a location using the address or street name

A

of the destination.

S

elect:

- the country,

A1

- the city,

A2

- the street,

A3

- the house number,

A4

- the name of a junction,

A5

- to select the search using either a number or a

A6

j

unction.

You have a maximum of 100 points of interest

(

P

O

I

)

within a radius o

f

approximatel

y

60 miles

(

100 km

)

.

SEARCHING FOR A DESTINATION USING

AN ADDRESS OR POINTS OF INTEREST

(

POI

)

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

C3

C6

A

B C

A4

A3

A2

A1

A6

A5

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

C1 C2

C4 C5

C7 C8

22

9

03

SEARCHING USING PREVIOUS

D

ESTINATIONS

,

A STORED ADDRESS OR

A

RETURN HOME

- Select a location using an address stored in the

E

address book.

S

ort b

y

:

- Icon,

E1

- Name,

E2

- Date.

E3

- Select a location using one of the 20 previous

D

des

tin

a

ti

o

n

s

.

- Select a return home directly.

F

Press YES to store your home address

(

the ﬁ rst time

)

.

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

E2E1 E3

D E F

2

30

03

NAVIGATION SETTINGS AND

INFORMATION

(

1/2

)

- Select the settings of functions linked with the

G

navi

g

ation to:

- set the screen display parameters such as:

G1

- display 1 or 2 maps,

- display or do not display the POIs on the map,

displa

y

selected icons,

- change the colours of the map,

- display or do not display the name of the current

st

r

eet

.

- display or do not display the address of the

cu

rr

e

nt

s

tr

ee

t.

- set route conditions, such as:

G2

- avoiding trafﬁ c problems,

- avoiding selected areas,

- avoiding roads at a certain time.

- set the route guidance mode and the displaying

G3

of

th

e

r

esu

lt

s

of

th

e

r

ou

t

e

sea

r

c

h.

- save, change or delete a location in the address

G4

book,

- display and select the trafﬁ c information such as

G5

trafﬁ c

j

ams or road works b

y

selectin

g

d

y

namic

g

u

id

ance.

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

G1 G2 G3

G4 G5

G

2

31

03

- Select basic information relating to the

H

navi

g

ation as well as a pre-set route

de

m

o

n

s

tr

a

ti

o

n t

o

:

- choose to divert your route to avoid certain

H1

areas

,

- select a location using an advanced search

H2

based on a P

O

I alon

g

a motorwa

y

or in the

vicinit

y

o

f

the motorwa

y

exit,

- start/stop the demonstration,

H3

- recall a stored map screen.

H4

NAVIGATION SETTINGS AND

INFORMATION

(

2/2

)

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

H1 H2

H3 H4

H

2

32

03

SELECTING POINTS OF INTEREST

(

POI

)

I

CONS DISPLAYED ON THE MAP

You can select up to 40 t

y

pes o

f

point o

f

i

nterest

i

con w

hi

c

h

are

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

on

y

our map

screen

.

Press the MENU button then [Navi

g

ation

S

ettin

g

s].

Press [

S

creen] then [

S

elect] on the P

O

I line.

P

ress

[



]

w

hi

c

h

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

.

Press each P

O

I re

q

uired.

At each contact with a P

O

I, the displa

y

of [α] chan

g

es

(

α = the P

O

I will be displa

y

ed on the screen

)

.

G

eneral

T

o

wn

ce

ntr

e

Localit

y

S

hops,

ﬁ

nance and businesses

(G

reen

)

M

a

j

or compan

i

es

S

hoppin

g

centre

Vehicles and travel

(

Dark blue

)

C

ITR

O

ËN

Air

p

ort

B

us stop

Vehicle

hi

r

e

S

uburban

/

main line station

Ferr

y

terminal

H

o

t

e

l

P

a

rk

a

n

d

ri

de

Car park

(

press +

)

S

ervice station

Res

t

a

r

ea

T

o

ll

boo

th

T

ou

ri

s

t in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n

Railwa

y

station

Restaurant

(O

ran

g

e

)

Ni

g

ht li

f

e

/

ni

g

ht club

Res

t

au

r

a

nt

Public places and emergency services

(

Brown

)

To

wn

Hall

C

ommunit

y

centre

y

Co

nv

e

nti

o

n

/

e

xhi

b

iti

o

n

ce

ntr

e

Hos

p

ital

p

Universit

y

/ colle

g

e

Entertainment and attractions

(

Blue

)

Theme

p

ark

p

Bowlin

g

alle

y

gy

C

asino

C

inema

G

olf course

His

t

o

r

ical

m

o

n

u

m

e

nt

S

katin

g

rink

g

M

a

rin

a

M

useu

m

Fl

y

in

g

club

yg

Leisu

r

e

a

r

ea

S

ki station

Sp

orts centre

p

Theatre

/

o

p

era

p

T

ou

ri

s

t

a

ttr

ac

ti

o

n

Vine

y

ard / wine and spirit store

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

2

33

03

Enterin

g

an address and startin

g

uidance

(

1

/

2

)

Pr

ess

Ex

p

lanation

R

esu

lt

Pr

ess

th

e

MEN

U

bu

tt

o

n.

Press [Address

/

Junction].

Press [Countr

y

] and enter the name of the countr

y

usin

g

the touch ke

y

pad.

When a character of the name of the countr

y

is entered, if 5 countries or fewer are

reco

g

nised,

y

ou can select a countr

y

from a list which is displa

y

ed or press [List].

You can select one o

f

the 5 most recentl

y

selected countries b

y

pressin

g

[Last 5]

on the "

C

ountry" line.

Press [

C

ity] then [Keyword] and enter the name o

f

the city using the touch keypad.

When a character o

f

the name o

f

the cit

y

is entered, i

f

5 cities or

f

ewer are reco

g

nised,

y

ou can select a cit

y

f

rom a list which is displa

y

ed or press [List].

Y

ou can se

l

ect a c

i

t

y

us

i

n

g

t

h

e post co

d

e.

Press

[

Post Code

]

and enter the number.

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

You can select one of the 5 most recentl

y

selected cities b

y

pressin

g

[Last 5]

on the "

C

it

y

" line.

2

3

4

03

Enterin

g

an address and startin

g

uidance

(

2

/

2

)

Pr

ess

Explanation

Resul

t

Press [Street] and enter the name of a street usin

g

the touch ke

y

pad.

When a character of the name of the street is entered, if 5 streets or fewer are

reco

g

nised,

y

ou can select a street from a list which is displa

y

ed or press [List].

Press [House

#

] and enter the number o

f

the house usin

g

the touch ke

y

pad.

You can enter the name o

f

a

j

unction instead o

f

the number o

f

the

street. Press [Junction] and select the name

f

rom a list which is

displa

y

ed.

Thi

s

i

s

th

e

r

esu

lt

o

n

ce

a

ll

o

f th

e

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n h

as

bee

n

e

nt

e

r

ed

:

If

y

ou a

g

ree with the information press [Set], otherwise press one of the buttons to

co

rr

ec

t.

Press [Start] to start the navi

g

ation.

/

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

2

35

03

TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Pr

ess

Explanation

R

esu

lt

P

ress

[R

oute

]

.

Press [Displa

y

new route].

The s

y

stem offers a detour route

(

d

y

namic

g

uidance

)

.

Press [Back] and enter to return to the previous screen.

The s

y

stem asks

y

ou to con

ﬁ

rm or not the new route.

Press [Yes] to conﬁ rm

y

our choice. The s

y

stem displa

y

s the name of the new route.

P

ress

[N

o

]

to not re

gi

ster t

h

e route.

Durin

g

navi

g

ation, the s

y

stem

g

ives

y

ou trafﬁ c

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n r

ece

iv

ed

in r

ea

l tim

e

.

The s

y

stem can then su

gg

est a detour route, i

f

dy

nam

i

c

g

u

id

ance

h

as

b

een act

i

vate

d

by

press

i

n

g

M

ENU, [Navi

g

ation settin

g

s] then [TM

C

].

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

2

36

04

WHAT IS RDS?

The Radio Data

Sy

stem

(

RD

S)

f

unction on the FM waveband permits:

- automatic retuning to alternative frequencies carrying the same

station while travelling through different regions (if the transmitters

gqyg

of

thi

s s

t

a

ti

on cover

th

e area

th

rou

gh

w

hi

c

h

y

ou are

t

rave

lli

n

g)

,

gg g(

- temporar

y

tunin

g

to tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation announcements,

- displa

y

o

f

the name o

f

the station, etc...

Most FM stations use RD

S

.

Th

ese

s

t

a

ti

o

n

s

tr

a

n

s

mit n

o

n-

aud

i

b

l

e

da

t

a

in

add

iti

o

n t

o

th

e

ir

programmes

.

The data transmitted in this way allows you access to various

functions, mainly displaying of the name of the station, temporary

yy

tuning to trafﬁ c information announcements or automatic retuning to

y pyg p y

y pyg p

alt

erna

ti

ve

f

requenc

i

es.

g

RDS allows you to continue listening to the same station automatically

by means of alternative frequencies. However, alternative frequencies

yg y

yg

ma

y

no

t

b

e

p

rov

id

e

d

th

rou

gh

ou

t

th

e coun

t

r

y

.

R

a

di

o s

t

a

ti

ons

d

o no

t

yq q

qq

cover the whole country, which explains the loss of reception of the

yp g ypg y

station during a journey.

y

REGIONAL MODE

S

ome stations are or

g

anised in a network.

In different regions, they broadcast different or shared programmes

d

epen

di

n

g

on

th

e

ti

me o

f

d

a

y

.

gy

g,y

Y

ou

ca

n

fo

ll

o

w:

- a re

g

ional station onl

y

,

- the entire network, with the possibility that you will be listening

t

o a

diff

eren

t

pro

g

ramme.

RADIO, RDS, AF, REG, TP, PTY

AUDIO / VIDEO

RDS ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES

Your radio automatically checks and selects the best frequency for

the radio station to which it is tuned (if the station broadcasts on

yqy

yq

s

evera

l

t

ransm

itt

ers or

f

requenc

i

es

)

.

The frequency of a radio station covers approximately 30 miles

(50 km). The change from one frequency to another explains the

q y pp y

l

oss o

f

recep

ti

on

d

ur

i

n

g

a

j

ourne

y

.

() g q

() g

If the station to which you are listening does not have several

frequencies in the region in which you are currently located, you can

yg

d

eac

ti

va

t

e au

t

oma

ti

c a

lt

erna

ti

ve

f

requenc

i

es.

qgy

TRAFFIC INFORMATION FUNCTION

The Tra

fﬁ

c Programme

(

TP

)

f

unction permits automatic and

temporar

y

switchin

g

to an FM station broadcastin

g

tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation.

The radio station or the source that

y

ou are listenin

g

to at this point is

p

aused.

O

nce the trafﬁ c information has ended, the s

y

stem switches back to

the radio station or the source that

y

ou were listenin

g

to initiall

y

.

PROGRAMME TYPES

S

ome stations o

ff

er the option o

f

listenin

g

to a themed t

y

pe o

f

pro

g

ramme as a priorit

y

, selected from the list available below:

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INF

O

S, SP

O

RT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

S

CIENCE

,

VARIED

,

P

O

P M

,

R

O

CK M

,

EASY M

,

LIGHT M

,

C

LA

SS

I

CS

,

O

THER M, WEATHER, FINAN

C

E,

C

HILDREN,

SOC

IAL, RELI

G

I

O

N, PH

O

NE IN, TRAVEL, LEI

S

URE, JAZZ,

CO

UNTRY, NATI

O

N M,

O

LDIE

S

, F

O

LK M, D

OC

UMENT.

2

37

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN RADIO MODE

A preset number is displayed when a

A.

p

reset station has been selected.

The name of the station is displayed

B.

durin

g

the reception of RDS information. I

f

t

h

e stat

i

on name

h

as not

b

een transm

i

tte

d

,

the

f

requenc

y

is displa

y

ed.

Stereo is displayed when a stereo

C.

tr

a

n

s

mi

ss

i

o

n i

s

r

ece

iv

ed

.

AF is displayed when the AF function is on.

D.

PTY (programme type) is displayed if the

E.

R

DS information received is displa

y

ed.

TRAFINF is displayed, during an

interruption,

f

or tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation.

ALARM is displayed, during an

interruption,

f

or urgent in

f

ormation.

Display of 6 preset stations.

F.

To receive the preset station.

G.

Press and hold to store a station.

To change the frequency step by step.

H.

Press and hold for continuous frequency

c

han

g

in

g

.

To search for currently broadcasting

I.

s

t

a

t

io

n

s

w

hich

ca

n

be

r

ecei

v

ed

i

n t

he

c

urrent location, until a station is

f

ound.

To display the programme type setting

J.

screen, e.

g

.: sport, rock, classical, news, ...

Press PTY a

g

ain to exit.

Press this button to display the secondary

K.

m

e

n

u

.

REG is displayed during the reception of

L.

re

g

ional frequencies information.

RDS is displayed during the reception of

M.

R

D

S

in

f

ormation.

TP is displayed when the trafﬁ c

N.

in

f

ormation is in standb

y

mode.

A B C D E

G

HIJK

L

M

N

F

2

38

04

AUDIO / VIDEO

RADIO

,

SELECTING AN FM STATION AND PRESETTING

Pr

ess

th

e

M

O

DE

bu

tt

o

n.

Pr

ess

Explanation R

esu

lt

Y

ou can se

l

ect

[



S

eek] or [

S

eek



]

to start a cont

i

nuous searc

h

unt

il

t

h

e

s

t

a

t

io

n

s

w

hich

ca

n

be

r

ecei

v

ed

i

n t

he

cu

rr

e

nt

loca

t

io

n

a

r

e

de

t

ec

t

ed

.

Press FM. B

y

de

f

ault the screen shows the FM1 stations.

Press [



Tune] to decrease the frequenc

y

or [Tune



] to increase the frequenc

y

. The

frequenc

y

is chan

g

ed in steps of 0.1 MHz.

C

ontinue to press to tune to a station automaticall

y

.

O

nce the

f

requenc

y

has been selected, a lon

g

press on the station

(

e.

g

. 3

)

will preset it.

The name of the station is displa

y

ed if it is available.

You can start automatic presettin

g

on FM3 for 6 stations, which can be

r

eceived in the current location, b

y

pressin

g

[^] then [Auto-Store].

You can also start a search b

y

t

y

pe o

f

pro

g

ramme b

y

pressin

g

[PTY].

2

39

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

RADIO

,

RDS SETTINGS

Pr

ess

Explanation R

esu

lt

Press the M

O

DE button.

Press FM. B

y

default the screen shows the stations on FM1.

Press [

^

].

Press [RDS Settin

g

s].

Press

[O

n

]

or

[O

ff

]

to activate or deactivate the functions:

- AF: automatic search for the best frequenc

y

,

- REG: switch to the re

g

ional frequencies,

- TP: automatic selection o

f

stations broadcastin

g

tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation.

24

0

04

PLAYING AN AUDIO CD

When the audio

C

D is inserted in the player,

p

la

y

in

g

o

f

the tracks is automatic and the

y

can be

reco

r

ded

o

nt

o

th

e

h

a

r

d

i

s

k.

Simultaneous access to the music reco

g

nition

s

ervice "Gracenote CDDB" on the hard disk permits displa

y

of the

titl

e

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n.

The recording speed may be slower than 4x due to the processing

load on the equipment or the condition o

f

the audio

C

D.

I

f

j

umps or other errors occur, return to the be

g

innin

g

o

f

the track

and start the recordin

g

a

g

ain.

Even if there is no

g

ap between the tracks on the CD, a brief silence

be

tw

ee

n tr

acks

is

s

t

o

r

ed

o

n t

he

ha

r

d

disk

.

CD PLAYER

AUDIO / VIDEO

RECORDING ONTO THE MUSIC SERVER

The tracks o

f

audio

C

Ds

(

not MP3

/

WMA

)

can be

r

ecor

d

e

d

onto t

h

e

h

ar

d

di

s

k

at approx

i

mate

ly

4

x spee

d

(

e.g.: 60 minutes converted to 15 minutes

)

and stored on the music

ser

v

er

.

The sounds recorded ma

y

be altered b

y

the noise present and the

q

ualit

y

of the sound ma

y

differ from the ori

g

inal.

The tracks recorded on the music server cannot be re

p

roduced on

a

nother medium

(

CD-R/RW, HDD, etc ...

)

.

Previousl

y

recorded tracks cannot be recorded a

g

ain

f

rom

the same

C

D.

S

witching o

ff

the engine or removing the

C

D during recording will

result in the tracks bein

g

f

ault

y

.

The operation o

f

the navi

g

ation s

y

stem ma

y

slow down durin

g

recordin

g

.

WHAT IS THE GRACENOTE CDDB?

The title information for the track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed

c

an be obtained from the "

G

racenote

C

DDB" database

s

t

o

r

ed

o

n th

e

h

a

r

d

i

s

k.

The

G

racenote compan

y

uses this standard to identi

fy

th

e

m

us

i

c

a

n

d

th

e

assoc

i

a

t

ed

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n

suc

h

as

:

- the title o

f

the album,

- the name o

f

the artist,

- the title o

f

the tracks,

- the

g

enre, ...

For further details, consult the site: www.

g

racenote.com.

The Gracenote CDDB database incorporated in this equipment

c

annot

g

uarantee the content o

f

the data 100

%

. You can update this

d

ata

b

ase us

i

n

g

a

DVD

so

ld

separate

ly

.

COPYRIGH

T

Your Audio equipment ma

y

allow

y

ou to listen to music which is

usuall

y

protected b

y

cop

y

ri

g

ht in accordance with current national

a

n

d

i

nt

e

rn

a

t

io

n

al

s

t

a

n

da

r

ds

.

Please

co

n

sul

t t

hese

s

t

a

n

da

r

ds

a

n

d

c

omp

ly

w

i

t

h

t

h

em.

Your Audio-Telematic s

y

stem allows

y

ou to listen to audio CDs

(

CDDA, CD-Text, CD-R/RW

)

or MP3 and WMA CDs.

241

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN CD MODE AND COPYING A CD

The name of the album is displayed for the

A.

trac

k

current

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

The name of the artist is displayed for the

B.

album currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The playing time of the track currently

C.

bein

g

pla

y

ed is displa

y

ed.

The playing mode currently selected is

D.

displa

y

ed.

Position of the cursor and total number of

E.

tr

acks

o

n t

he

albu

m.

Displays the item currently selected.

F.

To scroll up or down through the tracks.

G.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

forwards pla

y

in

g

of a track.

Displays the number and the name of the

H.

track. While drivin

g

, the

y

are not available

a

n

d

ca

nn

o

t

be

se

l

ec

t

ed

.

To display the secondary menu.

I.

Move the cursor onto the track currently

J.

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

The number and the name of the track

K.

c

urrently being played are displayed.

During copying, this symbol is displayed

L.

in red and it

g

oes off when all cop

y

in

g

operations are complete. The number

indicates the percenta

g

e of the total

number o

f

tracks on the

C

D alread

y

c

opied onto the hard disk. 00

%

when onl

y

one track has been copied.

The tracks which have not been copied

M.

a

re displa

y

ed in blue.

No symbol is displayed for tracks for

which cop

y

in

g

has ﬁ nished.

The CD button is onl

y

active if the pla

y

er

c

ontains a

C

D.

Press

Op

en to return the screen to the vertical

p

osition.

A B C

D

E

F

GHI

J

K

L

M

242

04

AUDIO / VIDEO

P

LAYING A CD

Press the M

O

DE button then

C

D, i

f

the pla

y

er alread

y

contains a

C

D.

Pr

ess

Explanation

Resul

t

O

therwise, insert a

C

D in the pla

y

er, pla

y

be

g

ins automaticall

y

.

P

ress

[



Track] to select the previous track or return to the be

g

innin

g

of the track

c

urrent

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast backwards play.

P

ress

[T

rac

k



]

to se

l

ect t

h

e next trac

k

.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast

f

orwards pla

y

.

Press [

^

] to access the secondar

y

menu.

Press [Repeat] to play the track in a loop

(

repetition

)

.

Press [

^

] then [Repeat] to stop.

Press [

S

can] to play the beginning o

f

each track

f

or approximately 9 seconds

(

scan

)

.

Press [

^

] then [

S

can] to stop or press the current track

(

durin

g

the 9 seconds

)

and pla

y

be

g

ins.

Press [Random] to pla

y

the tracks in random order. Press [

^

] then [Random] to stop.

Selectin

g

a track

Chan

g

in

g

the pla

y

mod

e

24

3

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

Cop

y

in

g

a CD onto the music server

(

1/3

)

Pr

ess

Explanation R

esu

lt

A

ll of the tracks are copied automaticall

y

when a CD is inserted.

This automatic cop

y

is pro

g

rammed b

y

default on leavin

g

the factor

y

.

Automatic copying of all of the tracks

I

f

y

ou have chan

g

ed the cop

y

mode

(

manual or

ﬁ

rst track

)

, while a

C

D is bein

g

pla

y

ed

p

ress [

^

]

f

or access to the secondar

y

menu.

Press [REC. Settin

g

].

Press [Auto RE

C

.] and con

ﬁ

rm by pressing [Back].

Next, e

j

ect the CD currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed then insert a CD and cop

y

in

g

of all of the

tracks be

g

ins.

If

y

ou wish to cop

y

the CD which is currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed, press [^] for access to the

s

econdar

y

menu and press [RE

C

.

S

tart].

I

f

another track

(

alread

y

copied

)

is selected durin

g

cop

y

in

g

, the cop

y

in

g

continues and

t

h

e new trac

k

se

l

ecte

d

i

s p

l

a

y

e

d

.

I

f

another track

(

not copied

)

is selected, the copying which is in progress stops and the

c

op

y

in

g

o

f

the new track selected be

g

ins. This track is pla

y

ed durin

g

cop

y

in

g

.

244

04

AUDIO / VIDEO

Cop

y

in

g

a CD onto the music server

(

2/3

)

Pr

ess

Explanation R

esu

lt

Manual cop

y

in

g

of individual tracks

You can cop

y

the tracks manuall

y

, one b

y

one.

Af

ter insertin

g

a

C

D and while it is bein

g

pla

y

ed, press [

^

]

f

or access to the secondar

y

me

n

u

.

Press [RE

C

.

S

ettin

g

].

Press [Manual RE

C

.] and con

ﬁ

rm b

y

pressin

g

[Back].

O

nce the manual pro

g

rammin

g

has been carried out, select the track to be copied then

p

ress [

^

].

Press [REC. Start], the cop

y

in

g

of the track selected be

g

ins.

I

f

another track is selected durin

g

cop

y

in

g

, the cop

y

in

g

stops and the new track selected is

p

la

y

ed.

24

5

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

Cop

y

in

g

a CD onto the music server

(

3/3

)

Pr

ess

Explanation R

esu

lt

Automatic cop

y

in

g

of the ﬁ rst track

You can pro

g

ramme the automatic cop

y

in

g

of the ﬁ rst track when a CD is inserted.

Af

ter insertin

g

a

C

D and while it is bein

g

pla

y

ed, press [

^

]

f

or access to the secondar

y

menu

.

Press [REC. Settin

g

] then [Sin

g

le REC.] and conﬁ rm b

y

pressin

g

[Back].

Next, e

j

ect the

C

D which is currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed then insert a

C

D and the cop

y

in

g

o

f

the

ﬁ

rst track be

g

ins.

I

f

y

ou wish to cop

y

the

ﬁ

rst track o

f

the

C

D which is currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed, press [

^

]

f

o

r

a

ccess to the secondar

y

menu and press [RE

C

.

S

tart].

I

f

another track is selected durin

g

cop

y

in

g

, the cop

y

in

g

stops and the track selected is

p

layed.

Stoppin

g

automatic or manual cop

y

in

g

During the copying o

f

a

C

D or o

f

a track on a

C

D, press [

^

]

f

or access to the secondary

menu

.

Press [REC. Stop], the cop

y

in

g

stops.

24

6

04

WHAT IS THE MUSIC SERVER?

GENERAL NOTES ON THE MUSIC SERVER

AUDIO / VIDEO

Your Audio-Telematic s

y

stem allows

y

ou to cop

y

audio

C

Ds onto a

music server, up to 2,500 songs on a 10

G

b hard disk.

The tracks on audio

C

Ds

(

not MP3 or WMA

)

can be recorded onto

the hard disk at approximatel

y

4x speed and stored in the music

se

rv

e

r.

Refer to the "Recordin

g

a CD" section.

The music server then allows

y

ou to mana

g

e

g

roups and lists o

f

tr

acks

.

247

04

"ORIGINAL" GROUP, NUMBER 01:

This is the location of the ori

g

inal pla

y

list created

automaticall

y

(

not manual

)

when a track of an

audio

C

D is recorded.

I

t

i

s not poss

ibl

e to c

h

an

g

e

i

ts name or

d

e

l

ete

i

t.

You can record up to 9999 pla

y

lists in this

g

roup.

"MY BEST" GROUP, NUMBER 02:

This is the location o

f

the pla

y

lists, etc ... created

automatically

f

rom the in

f

ormation read in the

m

us

i

c

se

rv

e

r.

It is not possible to chan

g

e its name or delete it.

The

g

roups "M

y

Favorites" and "M

y

Frequenc

y

" are stored here.

"NEW GROUP" GROUP FOR THE USER,

NUMBER

S

03 TO

99

:

This is the location of the user's pla

y

lists.

You can record up to 9999 pla

y

lists in this

g

roup.

Th

e

g

roup can

b

e create

d

, rename

d

or

d

e

l

ete

d

.

A

UDIO / VIDEO

"ORIGINAL PLAYLIST" LISTS:

These are ori

g

inal pla

y

lists created automaticall

y

(

not manual

)

when an audio

C

D is copied.

Th

e

li

s

t

s

a

n

d

th

e

a

rti

s

t

s

ca

n

be

r

e

n

a

m

ed

o

r

deleted. The

g

enres can also be set.

24

8

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

"MY FAVORITES" LIST:

This is the location

f

or storin

g

y

our

f

avourite

tr

acks

.

They can be deleted

f

rom the list and the order in which they are

pla

y

ed can be chan

g

ed.

"MY MO

S

T PLAYED" LI

S

T:

This is the location o

f

the pla

y

lists used most

f

requentl

y

f

rom the ori

g

ina

l

li

s

t.

It is not possible to add tracks or chan

g

e their order.

"USER PLAYLIST" LIST:

This is the location of a pla

y

list of tracks selected

b

y

the user from the

o

ri

g

ina

l

li

s

t.

If

y

ou delete a track from the ori

g

inal list, it will be deleted from the

use

r

lis

t.

The

lis

t

a

n

d

t

he

a

rt

is

t

ca

n

be

r

e

n

a

m

ed

o

r

dele

t

ed

.

It is possible to add tracks or change their order.

24

9

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN MUSIC SERVER MODE

The number and the name of the track

A.

c

urrentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed are displa

y

ed.

The number and the name of the playlist

B.

c

urrentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed are displa

y

ed.

The name of the artist is displayed for the

C.

pl

a

yli

st current

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

The playing time of the track currently

D.

being played is displayed.

The playing mode currently selected is

E.

displa

y

ed.

Group lists: position of the cursor and total

F.

n

umber of

g

roups.

Playlists: position of the cursor and total

n

umber o

f

pla

y

lists.

Track lists: position of the cursor and total

nu

m

be

r

of

tr

ac

k

s

.

To display the list of groups, the playlist

G.

a

n

d

th

e

li

s

t

of

tr

ac

k

s

.

To scroll up or down through the tracks.

H.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

forwards pla

y

in

g

of a track.

To scroll up or down through the playlists.

I.

Group lists: number and name of the

J.

gro

u

p

.

Playlists: number and name of the playlist.

Track lists: number and name of the track.

To display the secondary menu.

K.

Displays the item currently selected.

L.

Move the cursor onto the track currently

M.

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

A B C D

E

F

G

HIJK

L

M

2

50

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

P

LAYING A TRACK OR A PLAYLIST IN THE MUSIC SERVER

E

xp

l

anat

i

on

Resul

t

P

r

ess

Press the M

O

DE button then Music

S

erver.

The pla

y

lists are pla

y

ed in a loop.

The server can pla

y

a track while recordin

g

another track from a CD. You must wait

u

ntil recordin

g

is complete before pla

y

in

g

the recorded track.

Selectin

g

a track

Press these buttons to switch between

g

roups, pla

y

lists and tracks.

You cannot switch directl

y

from

g

roups to tracks.

P

ress

[

 Track] to select the previous track or return to the be

g

innin

g

o

f

the track

c

urrently being played.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

fo

r

fas

t

bac

kw

a

r

ds

.

Press [Track



]

to select the next track.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

f

o

r f

as

t f

o

rw

a

r

ds

.

Selectin

g

a pla

y

list

Press

[



Pla

y

list] to select the previous pla

y

list.

Press [Pla

y

list



] to select the next pla

y

list.

2

51

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

CREATING A GROUP AND A PLAYLIST IN THE MUSIC SERVER

E

xp

l

anat

i

on

Resul

t

Press [

^

] to access the secondar

y

menu.

Creatin

g

a

g

roup

Press [New Group], enter the name of the

g

roup and press [SET].

Th

e

g

roup

i

s store

d

on t

h

e server.

Creatin

g

a pla

y

list

Press [

^

] to access the secondary menu then press [Function

S

ettings].

Press [New Pla

y

list].

S

elect the

g

roup to which the pla

y

list is to be attached. The

g

roup must be created

ﬁ

rst.

Enter the name of the pla

y

list and conﬁ rm b

y

pressin

g

[SET].

Then select the search method attached to this new list

(

either from the list or b

y

c

onditions

)

.

Th

e

li

s

t i

s

t

o

r

ed

o

n th

e

se

rv

e

r.

P

r

ess

2

52

04

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA CD

When the MP3/WMA CD is inserted in the pla

y

er,

p

la

y

in

g

of the tracks is automatic.

The

tr

acks

ca

nn

o

t

be

r

eco

r

ded

o

nt

o

t

he

m

usic

se

rv

e

r.

You can pla

y

C

Ds with up to 8 levels, 255

f

olders and

400

ﬁ

les maximum.

Windows Media and Microsoft Cor

p

oration are trademarks

re

g

istered in the United States and/or other countries.

GENERAL NOTES ON MP3/WMA CDs

AUDIO / VIDEO

WHAT IS THE MP3/WMA FILE FORMAT?

MP3 is the abbreviation of MPEG-1 Audio La

y

er 3 and

M

P

G

is the abbreviation o

f

Motion Pictures Experts

G

roup, a di

g

ital video data compression standard used on media

s

uch as video

C

Ds.

The MP3 compression reduces the number o

f

b

y

tes in a son

g

b

y

eliminatin

g

the lon

g

sound waves in the ran

g

e o

f

requencies which

a

re imperceptible to the human ear, so producin

g

hi

g

h qualit

y

audio

ﬁ l

es

with

a

l

o

w v

o

l

u

m

e

o

f

da

t

a

.

This compression divides the size of the content of a conventional

a

udio

C

D b

y

approximatel

y

10, which means that the content o

f

10 audio

C

Ds can be recorded onto a sin

g

le

C

D-R or

C

D-RW.

WMA is the abbreviation o

f

Windows Media Audio, another audio

data compression standard o

ff

ered b

y

Microso

f

t.

It can be used to create and save audio

ﬁ

les at a compression rate

hi

g

her than that of the MP3 format.

ACCEPTANCE OF THE FILES

Some blank CDs ma

y

not be pla

y

ed b

y

our equipment

(

qualit

y

,

recordin

g

speed...

)

.

When

y

ou burn a CD-R or CD-RW, select the IS

O

9660 level 1.2 o

r

J

o

li

et

b

urn

i

n

g

stan

d

ar

d

.

T

o o

b

ta

i

n t

h

e

b

est acoust

i

c qua

li

t

y

poss

ibl

e, se

l

ect t

h

e

l

owest

burning speed.

The MPE

G

1 and MPE

G

2 standards are accepted.

Transmission s

p

eeds between 32 and 320 kbits/s and scans

between 16 kHz and 48 kHz are acce

p

ted.

To displa

y

the title information

(

the name of the artist, the title of the

album, etc...

)

, the information contained in the ID3 Ta

g

s or the WMA

Ta

g

s must be included in the MP3

/

WMA

ﬁ

les burned onto the disc.

COPYRIGH

T

Your audio s

y

stem ma

y

allow

y

ou to listen to music which is usuall

y

protecte

d

by

cop

y

r

igh

t

i

n accor

d

ance w

i

t

h

current nat

i

ona

l

an

d

i

nternat

i

ona

l

stan

d

ar

d

s.

Pl

ease consu

l

t t

h

ese stan

d

ar

d

s an

d

comp

ly

w

i

t

h

t

he

m.

2

53

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN MP3/WMA CD MODE

The number and the name of the track

A.

c

urrentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed are displa

y

ed.

The name of the album/folder is displayed

B.

for the track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The name of the artist is displayed for the

C.

track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The playing time of the current track is

D.

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

.

The playing mode currently selected is

E.

displa

y

ed.

Position of the cursor and total number of

F.

f

o

l

de

r

s

o

r tr

ac

k

s

o

n th

e

cu

rr

e

nt l

e

v

e

l.

To display the list of folders of a higher

G.

l

e

v

e

l.

Displays the item currently selected.

H.

To scroll up or down through the tracks.

I.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

forwards pla

y

in

g

of a track.

To scroll up or down through the folders.

J.

Displays the folder number and the folder

K.

na

m

e

. Pl

us

th

e

li

s

t

s

a

n

d

n

u

m

be

r

s

of

tracks and the name o

f

the

ﬁ

le

(

without

e

xtension

)

.

To display the secondary menu.

L.

Move the cursor onto the track currently

M.

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

Displays the type of medium, MP3 or

N.

WMA

.

The

C

D button is onl

y

active i

f

the pla

y

e

r

co

nt

a

in

s

a

C

D.

Press

O

pen to return the screen to the vertical

p

osition.

A B C

E

F

G

IKL

M

N

D

H

J

2

5

4

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA CD

(

1/2

)

Pr

ess

Ex

p

lanation R

esu

lt

Press the M

O

DE button then CD, if the pla

y

er alread

y

contains a CD.

Movin

g

around the folders

Selectin

g

a folder

O

therwise, insert a CD in the pla

y

er, pla

y

be

g

ins automaticall

y

.

You can move b

y

one level at a time.

Press on the name o

f

a

f

older and at each press the list o

f

olders o

f

the level below is

displa

y

ed.

Press on the folder above to move up and/or select a level.

Press [



Folder] to select the previous folder.

Press [Folder



] to select the next

f

older.

Th

ese

di

sp

l

a

y

s

i

n

di

cate t

h

e current

l

eve

l

:

C

D: level 0,

f

older below: level,

f

older below that, level 2, etc ...

Up to 8 levels.

2

55

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA CD

(

2/2

)

Chan

g

in

g

the pla

y

in

g

mode

P

ress

[

 Track] to select the previous track or return to the be

g

innin

g

o

f

the track

c

urrent

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast backwards play.

Selectin

g

a track

Press [Track



] to select the next track.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast

f

orwards pla

y

.

Press [Repeat] to play the track selected in a loop

(

repetition

)

.

Press [Repeat] a

g

ain to pla

y

all o

f

the tracks in the selected

f

older in a loop.

Press a

g

ain to stop.

Press [

S

can] to pla

y

the be

g

innin

g

o

f

each track in each

f

older

f

or approximatel

y

10 seconds

(

scannin

g)

.

Press [Scan] a

g

ain the pla

y

the be

g

innin

g

of each track in the selected folder in a loop.

Press a

g

ain to stop or press on the current track

(

durin

g

the 10 seconds

)

and pla

y

b

e

gi

ns.

Press [Random] to pla

y

all of the tracks in the selected folder in random order.

Press [Random] a

g

ain to pla

y

all of the tracks on the CD in random order.

P

ress a

g

a

i

n to stop.

Press [

^

] to access the secondary menu.

Pr

ess

Ex

p

lanation R

esu

lt

2

56

04

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN DVD MODE

A

UDIO / VIDEO

The DVD button is onl

y

active if the pla

y

er

co

nt

a

in

s

a

DVD.

Press

Op

en to return the screen to the vertical

p

osition.

For safet

y

reasons, the video is not

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

w

hil

e

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

,

h

owever t

h

e au

di

o

c

an

b

e p

l

a

y

e

d

.

To displa

y

the picture and watch a DVD,

p

ark the vehicle in a sa

f

e place.

To play the previously selected zone on

J.

t

he

disc

.

To display the DVD title menu.

K.

To scroll up or down through the chapters.

L.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

forwards pla

y

.

To scroll up or down through the titles.

M.

To enter a title or chapter number.

N.

To change the angle.

O.

To change the language of the subtitles.

P.

To change the language.

Q.

To select a chapter or title or specify a

R.

nu

m

be

r.

This icon is displayed when the operation

A.

requested cannot be carried out.

The number of the chapter currently being

B.

pla

y

ed is displa

y

ed.

The number of the title currently being

C.

p

l

a

y

e

d

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

.

Symbols display the current status of the

D.

p

l

a

y

er.

The playing time is displayed.

E.

To resume normal play when play is

F.

paused or durin

g

slow-motion pla

y

.

To stop play temporarily.

G.

To stop play. Press the screen to access

H.

t

he

m

e

n

u

.

For slow-motion play.

I.

A B C D E

F

G

H

I

J

KLM

R

Q

P

O

N

2

57

04

A

UDIO / VIDEO

R

esu

lt Ex

p

lanation

Selectin

g

a chapte

r

Press the M

O

DE button then DVD, if the pla

y

er alread

y

contains a DVD.

O

therwise, insert a DVD in the pla

y

er, the picture is displa

y

ed

a

utomat

i

ca

lly

.

P

ress t

h

e screen to access t

h

e menus.

Whil

e

d

r

i

v

i

n

g

, on

ly

t

h

e soun

d

trac

k

i

s p

l

a

y

e

d

an

d

no p

i

cture

i

s

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

.

P

ress

[



C

hapter] to select the previous chapter or return to the be

g

innin

g

o

f

the

ch

apter current

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast backwards play.

Press [

C

hapter



]

to se

l

ect t

h

e next c

h

apter.

Press and hold

f

or

f

ast

f

orwards pla

y

.

Selectin

g

a title

P

ress

[



Ti

t

l

e

]

to se

l

ect t

h

e prev

i

ous t

i

t

l

e.

P

ress

[Ti

t

l

e



]

to se

l

ect t

h

e next t

i

t

l

e.

Pr

ess

P

LAYING A DVD

2

58

05

D

ISPLAY SCREEN, SOUND, PICTURE

SETTINGS

- Choose to switch off the screen.

A

To switch it back on, touch the screen or

press an

y

button.

- Choose the settings of the sound in the

B

vehicle, i

f

an audio source is selected

(

FM,

C

D, ...

)

,

f

or:

- the sound distribution or the volume

B1

such as the front-rear balance, the bass,

the medium, the treble, the volume

a

d

j

ustment in relation to the vehicle

spee

d

,

- the type of music (with surround option)

B2

suc

h

as c

l

ass

i

c,

j

azz, pop, roc

k

,

hi

p

h

op,

c

ountry, normal, ...

- the sound ﬁ eld (with surround option)

B3

such as sta

g

e, live, hall, normal, ...

- Choose the quality of the picture for:

C

- the colour (when playing DVDs),

C1

- the intensity of the colours (when playing

C2

DVDs

)

,

- the brightness,

C3

- the contrast,

C4

- the level of black.

C5

B1

B2

B3

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

A B C

2

59

05 SETTINGS

TIME AND DATE, LANGUAGE, UNIT, PICTURE SIZE

- Choose the size of the DVD picture for:

E

- normal 4/3,

E1

- extends the picture evenly to the right and to

E2

the le

f

t in wide screen mode,

- extends the right and left parts only leaving

E3

the centre as it stands in wide screen mode,

- enlarges the picture in 4/3 format. The top

E4

a

n

d

th

e

bo

tt

o

m

a

r

e

ou

t

s

i

de

th

e

f

r

a

m

e

.

- Choose the base settings of the system for:

D

- setting of the time by the RDS signal, time

D1

zone, summer time,

- the language (English, Français, Deutsch,

D2

N

ederlands, Portu

g

uese, Español, Svenska,

I

taliano, Dansk

)

,

- the units for calculation of the distances (km

D3

or miles and

°C

or

°

F

)

,

- other settings such as:

D4

- the voice

g

uidance volume,

- the t

y

pe o

f

voice

g

uidance voice

(f

emale or

m

ale

)

,

- the volume of the operation bleeps

(

1 to

3 and 0=no bleep

)

,

- the t

y

pe o

f

ke

y

pad

(

alphabet or P

C)

,

- the ran

g

e o

f

menu colours

(

red or blue

)

,

- the displa

y

or not o

f

the audio pla

y

icons in

the map screen,

- the reinitialisation of the vehicle sensor,

- the interruption or not of the displa

y

when

the air conditionin

g

is used.

E1 E2 E3 E4

D1 D2

D3 D4

D E

2

60

05

EQUIPMENT, CONTRAST, TRAFFIC INFORMATION

(

TP

)

SETTINGS

- Choose to adjust or set the parameters of

F

c

ertain equipment o

ff

ered in your vehicle

(

e.

g

.: un

f

oldin

g/f

oldin

g

o

f

the mirrors,

c

losin

g

the windows on lockin

g

, timin

g

and sensitivit

y

o

f

the automatic li

g

htin

g

,

direction indicators motorwa

y

function, ...

)

:

- to scroll up the list,

F1

- to scroll down the list,

F2

- to reinitialise all of the settings

F3

(

manu

f

acturer's settin

g

s

)

.

Press each setting to select or change

the parameters.

- Choose to adjust the contrast of the

G

di

sp

l

a

y

i

n re

l

at

i

on to t

h

e am

bi

ent

ligh

t

l

eve

l

(

day, night or automatic

)

.

- Choose to activate or deactivate the

H

trafﬁ c information

(

TP

)

.

H

G

F

F1

F2

F3

2

61

06 INFORMATION

SYSTEM VERSION, SATELLITE

- View the system information:

A

- the software version,

A1

- the map data version,

A2

- the system information database version.

A3

To update the versions, insert the DVD

c

ontainin

g

the new data and

f

ollow the

i

n

s

tr

uc

t

io

n

s

o

n t

he

sc

r

ee

n.

- View the GPS information:

B

- the satellite positions diagram with the

B1

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

o

f m

o

v

e

m

e

nt

o

f th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

. Pl

us

the position of the satellite si

g

nal receivers,

- the name of the current location,

B2

- the longitude and latitude of the current

B3

location,

- the position measurement status

B4

(

2D=3 satellites or

f

ewer, 3D=4 satellites or

more

)

,

- the number of receiving satellites,

B5

- to have north at the top of the map,

B6

- to have the direction of the vehicle at the

B7

top o

f

the map,

- to pivot the map from overhead or change

B8

the an

g

le o

f

the map.

A2

A1

A3

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A B

2

62

06

CALENDAR, TRIP

INFORMATION

These double arrows permit

access to the drivin

g

information

s

creen, prev

i

ous or next.

- View the driving information:

D

- the average speed,

D1

- the average fuel consumption,

D2

- the current fuel consumption,

D3

- for speed and fuel consumption graphs in

D4

5 m

i

nute

i

nterva

l

s,

- choose an automatic reset (key at off for

D5

m

ore than 4 hours

)

or manual reset

(

press

[

Reset]

)

,

- the distance which can still be travelled

D6

(

based on the fuel remainin

g

and the

r

ecent avera

g

e consumption

)

,

- the distance travelled since the fuel

D7

tank was last

ﬁ

lled

(

press [Re

f

uel] to

r

einitialise

)

,

- the driving time (duration between the key

D8

bein

g

turned to on then to off

)

.

- press [Start] to measure intermediate

tim

es

with:

- the duration,

D9

D1

0

- the distance,

- the speed,

D11

D12

- the fuel consumption.

- Make a note on the calendar of special

C

da

y

s, birthda

y

s, ...

Use the arrows to ﬁ nd a date and press

directl

y

on the da

y

required to enter the

e

v

e

nt.

D1

D2

D3

D4 D5

D6

D7

D8

D7

D9

D10 D11 D12

D

C

2

63

06 INFORMATION

ENVIRONMENT, AIR CONDITIONING, TELEPHONE

- View the air conditioning settings:

F

- the fan speed indicator,

F1

- the air selection indicator,

F2

- the windscreen demisting indicator,

F3

- the air conditioning indicator,

F4

- the rear screen demisting indicator,

F5

- the AUTO mode indicator.

F6

- View the environment information:

E

- the altitude,

E1

- the atmospheric pressure,

E2

- the ambient temperature. The ice

E3

sy

mbol ﬂ ashes if there is a risk of ice.

- Make and receive telephone calls:

G

- enter the telephone number,

G1

- delete a character,

G2

- make the call.

G3

Refer to the hands-free telephone

s

ect

i

on to connect

y

our

Bl

uetoot

h

®

m

o

bil

e te

l

ep

h

one.

F1 F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

E1

E2

E3

G1 G2

G3

G

E F

2

6

4

07

2

USB PLAYER

USING THE USB PORT

With the vehicle stationar

y

, i

g

nition

s

wit

c

h in th

e

L

OCK position, connect a

s

u

i

ta

bl

e ca

bl

e to t

h

e porta

bl

e p

l

a

y

er.

The USB port is used to connect a portable device

(

MP3 pla

y

er,

A

pp

l

e

®

player, ...). The ﬁ les are sent from the player to your audio

®

sy

stem an

d

h

ear

d

t

h

rou

gh

t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e

'

s spea

k

ers.

Th

e

n

co

nn

ec

t th

e

cab

l

e

t

o

th

e

v

e

hi

c

l

e

'

s

USB port.

Models supported:

- iP

od

t

ouc

h

®

: FW version 1.1.1 or later.

®

- iP

od

c

l

ass

i

c

®

: FW version 1.

0

or later.

- iPod

5

t

h

g

eneration

®

: FW version 1.2.2 or later.

®

-

iP

o

d

nano 5

th

g

enerat

i

on

®

: FW v

e

r

s

i

o

n 1.2

o

r l

a

t

e

r.

- iP

od

n

a

n

o

2 n

d

g

enerat

i

on

®

: FW version 1.1.2 or later.

®

-

C

ompatible U

S

B mass storage device: 256 Mb capacity or

g

reater.

File

f

ormats: MP3, WMA, AA

C

, WAV.

M

aximum number o

f

levels

(

includin

g

root

)

: 8.

N

umber of folders: 7

00

.

N

umber of ﬁ les:

65

535

.

Do not connect the portable device directly to the U

S

B port, use a

cab

l

e

.

To disconnect the cable, the i

g

nition switch must be in the

L

OCK

p

osition.

N

avi

g

ation in the ﬁ le base is done via the portable device / iPod

®

.

T

a

k

e care not to trap t

h

e ca

bl

e w

h

en c

l

os

i

n

g

t

h

e armrest.

2

65

07 USB PLAYER

The number and the name of the track

A.

c

urrentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed are displa

y

ed.

The name of the album/folder is displayed

B.

for the track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The name of the artist is displayed for the

C.

trac

k

current

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

.

The playing time of the current track is

D.

di

sp

l

aye

d

.

To display the list of folders of higher

E.

l

e

v

e

l

s

.

To display in list mode.

F.

To scroll up or down through the tracks.

G.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

f

orwards pla

y

in

g

o

f

a track.

To scroll up or down through the folders.

H.

To display the secondary menu.

I.

Move the cursor to the track being played.

J.

Display the format of the current ﬁ le: MP3,

K.

WMA, AAC, WAV.

Displays the type of medium: USB or iPod.

L.

INFORMATION DI

S

PLAYED IN U

S

B OR AUX MODE

or

A B C

D

E

GI

J

K

F

L

H

2

66

07 USB PLAYER

The number and the name of the track

A.

c

urrent

ly

b

e

i

n

g

p

l

a

y

e

d

are

di

sp

l

a

y

e

d

.

The name of the album/folder is displayed

B.

f

or the track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The name of the artist is displayed for the

C.

track currentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

The playing time of the current track is

D.

displa

y

ed.

To display/sort each category:

E.

The item currently selected and being

F.

p

la

y

ed is hi

g

hli

g

hted.

To scroll up or down through the tracks.

G.

Press and hold for fast backwards or

forwards pla

y

in

g

of a track.

To display the secondary menu.

H.

Move the cursor onto the track currently

I.

being played.

Displays the type of medium: USB or iPod.

J.

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN IPOD (OR APPLE

®

PLAYER) MODE

®

G

o to the root

A

rt

is

t

s

A

l

bu

m

s

S

ongs

Ge

nr

es

Pla

y

lists

A B C

D

E

GH

I

J

F

2

67

07

P

LAYING A TRACK

(

1/2

)

Pr

ess

Ex

p

lanation R

esu

lt

Pr

ess

th

e

M

O

DE

bu

tt

o

n th

e

n

o

n

US

B

/

iP

od

.

USB PLAYER

Press on a track to play it.

In iPod mode:

y

ou can displa

y

/

sort b

y

cate

g

or

y

at an

y

time.

In USB or AUX mode:

y

ou can press the next folder up at an

y

time, to

g

o up one level/

o

r

selec

t

a

le

v

el

.

Press [



Track] to select the previous track or return to the be

g

innin

g

o

f

the track

c

urrentl

y

bein

g

pla

y

ed.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

f

o

r f

as

t

bac

kw

a

r

ds

.

Selectin

g

a previous / next track

Press

[

Track



]

to select the next track.

Pr

ess

a

n

d

h

o

l

d

f

o

r f

as

t f

o

rw

a

r

ds

.

2

68

07

P

LAYING A TRACK

(

2/2

)

Chan

g

in

g

the pla

y

in

g

mode

(

in USB, AUX or iPod mode

)

Press [Repeat] to play the track selected in a loop

(

repetition

)

.

Press [Repeat] a

g

ain to pla

y

all o

f

the tracks in the selected

f

older in a loop.

Press a

g

ain to stop.

Press [

S

can] to pla

y

the be

g

innin

g

o

f

each track in each

f

older

f

or approximatel

y

10 seconds

(

scanning

)

.

Press [

S

can] a

g

ain the pla

y

the be

g

innin

g

o

f

each track in the selected

f

older in a loop.

Press a

g

ain to stop or press on the current track

(

durin

g

the 10 seconds

)

and pla

y

be

g

ins.

Press [Random] to pla

y

all of the tracks in the selected folder in random order.

Press [Random] a

g

ain to pla

y

all of the tracks on the pla

y

er in random order.

P

ress a

g

a

i

n to stop.

Press [

^

] to access the secondary menu.

P

r

ess

E

xp

l

anat

i

on

Resul

t

USB PLAYER

Selectin

g

a folder

(

in USB or AUX mode

)

P

ress

[



Folder] to select the previous folder.

Press

[

Folder 

]

to select the next folder.

Press on [Database] to displa

y

the Gracenote

®

version

(

Compact Disc Database:

database of music CDs

)

.

2

69

08

MATCHING A TELEPHONE, PLAYING A TRACK

P

r

ess

o

n

E

xp

l

anat

i

on

Resul

t

s

Press the M

O

DE button then Bluetooth Audio.

BLUETOOTH

®

STREAMING - TELEPHONE

®

Press on [Matchin

g

] to start matchin

g

.

Press on [New device] to detect a telephone.

Enter the PIN in the audio s

y

stem.

Refer to the instructions for

y

our telephone to authorise the matchin

g

.

Enter the PIN in the telephone then a

f

ter a short time it appears in the list.

Select the telephone in the list, then choose [Hands free] for telephone and/or [Audio

B

luetooth] for streamin

g

(

an iPhone is reco

g

nised automaticall

y)

.

Then con

ﬁ

rm with [Yes].

O

nce the telephone is matched, select a track then press [



] to pla

y

it.

27

0

08

BLUETOOTH

®

STREAMING - TELEPHONE

®

Enter the number using the keypad.

A.

Erasing a number one at a time.

B.

Return to the previous screen.

C.

To display the list of contacts (in the

D.

Bluetooth telephone or the vehicle

)

.

Select a contact in the list.

To start [Dial] or start again [Redial] a

E.

telephone call

To display the secondary menu:

F.

Is displayed if the personal identiﬁ cation

F1.

nu

m

be

r h

as

n

o

t

bee

n

deﬁ

n

ed

.

Press to enter it.

Is displayed if the personal identiﬁ cation

F2.

nu

m

be

r h

as

bee

n

de

ﬁ n

ed

.

To display the list of matched telephones.

F3.

To display the list of voice commands.

F4.

To reset all settings.

F5.

INFORMATION DISPLAYED IN TELEPHONE MODE

Re

f

er to the section "matchin

g

a

telephone" to connect

y

our telephone

b

y

Bluetooth

®

.

A B

F

C

DE F1 F2 F4F3 F5

271

09

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

S

PEAK

Press this button to activate voice recognition

(

"

L

istenin

g

" is displayed

)

.

Durin

g

a voice reco

g

nition, press this button brie

ﬂ

y

to put this voice reco

g

nition on hold.

Make a lon

g

press on this button to deactivate voice reco

g

nition.

Press this button brieﬂ

y

to activate voice reco

g

nition, even durin

g

a call.

A

udio s

y

stem on/off.

AN

S

WER A

C

AL

L

Press this button to accept an incoming

ca

ll.

In th

e

v

e

nt

of

a

2 n

d

incomin

g

call, press

to

p

ut the 1

st

call on hold and s

p

eak to the

seco

n

d

ca

ll

e

r.

In this case, press brieﬂ

y

to switch from

o

n

e

call

t

o

t

he

o

t

he

r.

T

o esta

bli

s

h

a t

h

ree-wa

y

conversat

i

on,

p

ress on

S

PEAK to change

f

rom voice

reco

g

nition and sa

y

" Incor

p

orate the cal

l

".

END

C

AL

L

Press this button to re

j

ect an incomin

g

call.

D

ur

i

n

g

a conversat

i

on, press t

hi

s

b

utton to

e

n

d

t

he

call

.

In

c

r

ease

th

e

aud

i

o

v

o

l

u

m

e

.

D

ec

r

ease

th

e

aud

i

o

v

o

l

u

m

e

.

272

1

2

3

09

4

5

6

7

8

CHANGING THE VOICE COMMAND LANGUAGE

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

B

y

de

f

ault, the voice reco

g

nition s

y

stem is in En

g

lish.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

Sa

y

"Setu

p

"

.

S

a

y

"

L

an

g

ua

ge

".

S

a

y

the lan

g

ua

g

e o

f

y

our choice in En

g

lish, example: sa

y

"

French "

fo

r Fr

e

n

c

h.

Say "

Y

es" to start the chan

g

e of lan

g

ua

g

e process

S

a

y

"

No

"

to return to steps

4

to 7.

Th

e s

y

stem sa

y

s

"

Select a lan

g

ua

g

e: En

g

lish, Spanish, French,

German or Italian

"

.

The system then says " French selected. Is this correct? "

The system repeats the language chosen and completes the

c

han

g

e o

f

lan

g

ua

g

e process.

I

f

y

ou do not start the trainin

g

procedure within around 3 minutes o

f

p

ressing

S

PEAK, the process is cancelled.

I

f

y

ou press

S

PEAK within 5 seconds

f

ollowin

g

the pla

y

o

f

a voice

c

ommand, this command is saved a

g

ain.

What is the Bluetooth

®

hands-free telephone with voice

®

r

eco

g

nition

?

The s

y

stem uses wireless communication technolo

gy

known as

Blue

t

oo

t

h

®

which allows you to make hands-free telephone calls in

®

y

our ve

hi

c

l

e v

i

a

y

our

Bl

uetoot

h

®

compat

ibl

e mo

bil

e te

l

ep

h

one.

Y

ou can ma

k

e te

l

ep

h

one ca

ll

s us

i

n

g

a m

i

crop

h

one

l

ocate

d

i

n t

h

e

c

ourtesy lamp, making use o

f

the simple steering mounted controls

o

r b

y

the voice reco

g

nition

f

unction with voice commands. Five

lan

g

ua

g

es are available: En

g

lish

(

the de

f

ault

)

,

S

panish, French,

G

erman and Italian.

27

3

09

2

3

1

4

5

6

7

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

TRAINING THE USER'S VOICE

You can use the user voice trainin

g

function to create a voice model

for one person per lan

g

ua

g

e.

The characteristics o

f

y

our voice and

y

our pronunciation are saved

i

n t

hi

s mo

d

e

l

to prov

id

e t

h

e

b

est vo

i

ce recogn

i

t

i

on.

The vehicle must be stationar

y

with the parkin

g

brake applied.

S

witch o

ff

y

our telephone durin

g

the operation to avoid an

y

interru

p

tion.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

The s

y

stem sa

y

s the

ﬁ

rst o

f

45 standard phrases.

Sa

y

" Word trainin

g

"

.

When you are ready to start, press and

ho

l

d

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

Repeat each o

f

the phrases in the table on the

f

ollowin

g

page

.

The s

y

stem saves

y

our voice and moves on to the next

co

mm

a

n

d

.

Continue the process until all of the phrases have been

sa

v

ed

.

An explanation messa

g

e is

g

iven.

After pla

y

in

g

all the voice commands, the s

y

stem sa

y

s "

T

he word

e

nrolment is complet

e

" and ends the

p

rocess.

I

f

y

ou do not start the pro

g

rammin

g

process within approximatel

y

3

minutes a

f

ter pressin

g

the

S

PEAK button, the process is

ca

n

ce

ll

ed

.

I

f

y

ou press the

S

PEAK button within 5 seconds o

f

the pla

y

o

f

a

voice command, this command is saved a

g

ain.

274

09

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

VOICE TRAINING COMMANDS

1

#

790

(f

or

#

= "Hash"

)

2

* 671

(

for * = "Star"

)

3

212 - 4

903

4

235

-

3

4

9

4

5

3

15- 5 657

6

4

56

- 7

930

7

93

-

5

4

6

2

8

7

9

4 -

1

826

9 826 -

3

145

1

0

96

2 - 7

305

11

(

531

)

742 - 9 860

12

(

632

)

807 - 4 591

13

(

800

)

222 - 5 015

14

(

888

)

555 - 1 212

1

5

0

12

3

4

56

7

89

16 55 66 77 88 99

17

44

33

22 11

00

1

8

C

all 2

93

-

580

4

19

Ca

ll

*

350

20

C

all 1

(

234

)

567 - 8 901

21

Dial

639

- 1

5

42

22

Dial

#

7

80

23

Dial

(

987

)

654 - 3210

24 1058

#

3

794

#

S

end

2

5

27

6

4

3#

4

3

21

#

S

end

2

6

C

ancel

2

7

Co

ntin

ue

28

Emergency number

29

C

lear all

30

Hel

p

3

1

H

ome,

W

or

k

,

M

o

bil

e,

P

a

g

er

3

2 Li

s

t

o

f n

a

m

es

33

N

o

3

4 Ph

o

n

e

boo

k: D

e

l

e

t

e

3

5

Ph

one

b

oo

k

:

N

ew entr

y

36

P

r

e

v

ious

3

7 Phone book:

C

lear all

38

R

ed

i

a

l

3

9

R

epeat t

h

e tra

i

n

i

n

g

4

0

Conﬁ

g

ure the conﬁ rmation requests

41

Conﬁ

g

ure the lan

g

ua

g

e

4

2

C

on

ﬁ

g

ure the matchin

g

options

4

3

Match a telephone

44

Tr

a

n

sfe

r th

e

ca

ll

4

5

Y

es

27

5

09

1

3

6

8

2

5

7

4

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

For reasons o

f

sa

f

et

y

and because the sustained attention o

f

the

driver is needed, operations o

f

matchin

g

a Bluetooth

®

mobile phone

with the audio s

y

stem's hands-free function must be done with the

v

ehicle stationar

y

.

The s

y

stems sa

y

s "

P

lease sa

y

the 4 di

g

its of a matchin

g

cod

e

"

.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

The s

y

stem con

ﬁ

rms the validit

y

o

f

the number spoken,

answer "

Yes

".

S

a

y

" No" to return to step 7.

S

a

y

"

M

atchin

g

option

s

".

MATCHING A BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

FIRST CONNECTION

S

a

y

"

M

atc

h

a te

l

e

ph

on

e

"

.

S

ay "Conﬁ gur

e

".

The system can register up to 7 Bluetooth

®

compatible mobile

telephones.

The telephone which has the hi

g

hest level o

f

priorit

y

is connected

a

utomaticall

y

.

The s

y

stem sa

y

s "

D

o

y

ou wish to match a telephone, delete a

t

ele

p

hone or obtain the list of matched tele

p

hones? ".

Sa

y

a 4-di

g

it number which will be recorded as the

matc

hi

n

g

co

d

e.

R

emem

b

er t

hi

s matc

hi

n

g

co

d

e as

y

ou must enter

i

t

i

n t

h

e te

l

ep

h

one

in one o

f

the

f

ollowing steps o

f

the matching procedure.

27

6

10

09

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Consult

y

our mobile telephone's user manual and enter

t

h

e matc

hi

n

g

co

d

e recor

d

e

d

i

n step 7

i

n t

h

e te

l

ep

h

one.

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

Th

e s

y

stem sa

y

s

"

Start the matchin

g

procedure on the

tele

p

hone. Consult the instructions in the tele

p

hone manual

"

.

If the code is incorrect, the s

y

stem locks. To clear the code:

- check that the telephone's voice reco

g

nition is not activated,

- w

i

t

h

t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on on an

d

t

h

e au

di

o s

y

stem act

i

ve, press t

h

e

END

C

ALL button

f

or 2 seconds, 3 times in succession.

Wh

e

n it

de

t

ec

t

s

a

Bl

ue

t

oo

th

®

compatible mobile telephone,

the s

y

stem sa

y

s "

P

lease sa

y

the name of the telephone after

the beep"

.

Af

ter the audible si

g

nal, allocate a name to the telephone

b

y

sa

y

in

g

the name o

f

y

our choice.

The s

y

stem sa

y

s "Allocate an order of priorit

y

between 1 and 7.

One is the hi

g

hest level of priorit

y

".

G

iv

e

a

n

u

m

be

r

be

tw

ee

n 1

a

n

d

7 t

o

es

t

ab

li

s

h th

e

l

e

v

e

l

of

priorit

y

of the mobile telephone.

The system says and con

ﬁ

rms the " name of the tele

p

hon

e

"

a

n

d

th

e

" numbe

r

" of its priority.

r

Answer "

Yes

"

S

a

y

"

N

o" to return to step 13.

Th

e s

y

stems sa

y

s

"

M

atc

hi

n

g

comp

l

et

e

"

t

he

n

e

m

i

t

s

a

n

audible

sig

na

l

an

d

eact

i

vates t

h

e vo

i

ce reco

g

n

i

t

i

on.

The services available depend on the network, the

S

IM card and the compatibilit

y

o

f

the Bluetooth

®

telephone used.

C

heck in

y

our telephone user

manual and with

y

our service provider

f

or the services

y

ou have access to.

I

f

the system does not detect the Bluetooth

®

compatible mobile

®

telephone, the matchin

g

process stops ands is accompanied b

y

an

a

udible si

g

nal.

If

y

ou select a level of priorit

y

which has alread

y

been allocated to

a

nother telephone, the s

y

stem asks

y

ou if

y

ou wish to replace this

level of priorit

y

.

277

09

2

3

1

4

5

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

S

a

y

"

Di

a

l

"

.

The system says "Number

p

leas

e

".

USING A TELEPHONE NUMBER

Call out the telephone number.

P

r

ess

t

his

bu

tt

o

n.

The system asks you to conﬁ rm this number, answer "

Y

e

s

".

S

a

y

"

No

"

to return to t

h

e prev

i

ous step.

Y

ou

m

us

t h

a

v

e

ﬁ

r

s

t m

a

t

c

h

ed

a

Bl

ue

t

oo

th

®

compatible mobile

telephone with the s

y

stem.

27

8

09

3

4

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

5

6

12

14

13

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

The system has its own phone book, independent o

f

that o

f

the

m

obile telephone.

It can contain up to 32 names for each lan

g

ua

g

e.

Each name in the

p

hone book is associated with 4 locations:

HO

ME, W

O

RK, M

O

BILE and PAGER.

The s

y

stem sa

y

s " Select one of the followin

g

items: New Entr

y

,

Chan

g

e, List of names, Delete or Clear all, or sa

y

Cancel to

r

eturn to t

h

e ma

i

n menu

".

Sa

y

"

N

ew entr

y

".

Th

e s

y

stem sa

y

s

"

HOME

,

WORK

,

MOBILE OR PAGER

".

G

ive the location which corresponds to the number that

y

ou wish to record.

The s

y

stem asks

y

ou to con

ﬁ

rm the location.

Answer "

Yes

"

.

S

ay " No" to return to step 7.

If a telephone number has alread

y

been recorded for this location, the

sy

stem sa

y

s "

T

he current number is -number-, number pleas

e

"

.

SAVING A NAME IN THE SYSTEM PHONE BOOK

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

Sa

y

"

P

hone book"

.

The system says " Name

p

leas

e

".

G

ive the name o

f

your choice.

If

y

ou do not wish to chan

g

e the telephone number, repeat the

or

igi

na

l

num

b

er to reta

i

n

i

t, ot

h

erw

i

se sa

y

t

h

e new num

b

er.

Answer "

Yes

"

S

a

y

"

N

o" to return to step 11.

The s

y

stem asks

y

ou to con

ﬁ

rm the number.

27

9

09

2

3

1

4

6

5

7

8

9

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

S

a

y

"Ca

l

".

The s

y

stem sa

y

s "Name

p

leas

e

".

USING A NAME IN THE PHONE BOOK

Give the name of the person that

y

ou wish to call.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

G

ive the location corresponding to the number that you

wi

s

h t

o

ca

ll.

You must have ﬁ rst matched a com

p

atible Bluetooth

®

m

ob

il

e

telephone with the s

y

stem.

If several telephone numbers have been recorded for this person,

t

h

e s

y

stem sa

y

s

"

D

o

y

ou wish to call <name>

{

home

}

,

{

work

}

,

{

mobile

}

or

{

pa

g

er

}

?

"

The s

y

stem request con

ﬁ

rmation o

f

the name.

Answer "

Yes

".

S

a

y

"N

o

" to return to step 4.

The s

y

stem sa

y

s "Call to <name> at <location

>

"

a

n

d

m

a

k

es

th

e

ca

ll.

2

80

09

1

2

1

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

The telephone rin

g

is sent to the speaker b

y

the front passen

g

er's

sea

t.

I

f

an audio source

(C

D, radio, ...

)

is in operation when the call is

r

eceived, it is placed on MUTE and only the incoming call is heard.

When the i

g

nition switch is in the A

CC

or

O

N position, the audio

sy

stem is activated automaticall

y

i

f

an incomin

g

call is received,

e

ven if it was ori

g

inall

y

off.

At the end o

f

the call, the audio s

y

stem returns to its previous state.

REDIAL THE LAST NUMBER CALLED

P

r

ess

t

his

bu

tt

o

n.

Sa

y

"

R

e

di

a

l

".

RECEIVING A CALL

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n.

2

81

09

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

VOICE COMMANDS (1/2)

C

on

ﬁ

g

ure

Ph

o

n

e

boo

k

Dial

C

all

R

ed

i

a

l

Emer

g

enc

y

number

Matchin

g

options

M

atc

h

a te

l

ep

h

one

Delete a telephone

List o

f

matched telephones

Select a telephone

P

r

e

v

ious

Press this button to start the voice recognition.

When the s

y

stem is waitin

g

for a voice command, sa

y

"Help" t

o

ob

t

a

in

a

li

s

t

o

f

co

mm

a

n

ds

whi

c

h

ca

n

be

used

in th

e

cu

rr

e

nt

s

it

ua

ti

o

n.

Div

e

rt th

e

ca

ll

A

dd

a

l

oca

ti

o

n

Conﬁ

g

ure the conﬁ rmation requests

L

an

g

ua

g

e

New entr

y

D

e

l

e

t

e

Chan

g

e

C

all this number

C

hange another entry

Tr

y

a

g

ain

C

lear all

Li

s

t

of

n

a

m

es

Home, at home

Work, at work

Mobile, on mobile

P

a

g

er, on pa

g

er

Help

C

ontinue

All

C

ancel

M

u

t

e

D

eac

tiv

a

t

e

m

u

t

e

Y

es

No

2

82

09

BLUETOOTH

®

TELEPHONE

®

VOICE COMMANDS (2/2)

Press this button to start the voice recognition.

When the s

y

stem is waitin

g

f

or a voice command, sa

y

"

H

e

lp

" t

o

ob

t

a

in

a

li

s

t

of

co

mm

a

n

ds

whi

c

h

ca

n

be

used

in th

e

cu

rr

e

nt

s

it

ua

ti

o

n.

Z

e

r

o

O

ne

T

w

o

Th

r

ee

F

ou

r

Fiv

e

S

ix

S

even

Eight

Nin

e

Star

(

*

)

Hash

(#)

Word trainin

g

R

epeat tra

i

n

i

n

g

Ac

t

i

v

a

t

e

D

eac

tiv

a

t

e

Incor

p

orate the call

<di

g

its> Send

En

g

lish

Phone book New entr

y

Phone book Chan

g

e

Pho

n

e

book

Dele

t

e

Ph

o

n

e

boo

k

C

l

ea

r All

Ph

o

n

e

boo

k Li

s

t

o

f n

a

m

es

Conﬁ

g

ure the conﬁ rmation requests

C

on

ﬁ

g

ure

S

elect a telephone

C

on

ﬁ

gure the matching options

D

e

l

e

t

e

a

n

a

m

e

Conﬁ

g

ure the lan

g

ua

g

e

C

on

ﬁ

g

ure the PIN

2

83

A

UDIO-CD s

y

stem

The s

y

stem is protected in such a wa

y

that it will onl

y

operate in

y

our vehicle.

01 First steps - Control panel

For safet

y

reasons, the driver must carr

y

out operations

which require prolon

g

ed attention while the vehicle is

s

tationar

y

.

When the en

g

ine is switched off and to prevent

dischar

g

in

g

o

f

the batter

y

, the s

y

stem switches o

ff

f

ollowin

g

the activation o

f

the ener

gy

econom

y

mode.

CONTENTS

02 Steering mounted controls

03 General operation

04 Radio

05 Music media players

06 USB player

07 BLUETOOTH

®

streaming

08 BLUETOOTH

®

telephone

Error messages

p.

284

286

287

291

297

305

307

309

320

2

8

4

01

FIRST STEPS

Displa

y

the track.

S

croll through tracks.

S

y

mbols:

i

:

iPod

®

.

U: U

S

B.

B: Bl

ue

t

oo

th

®

.

R

an

d

om p

l

a

y

i

n t

h

e current

fo

l

de

r.

Press and hold

(

audible

beep

)

: random play in all

fo

l

de

r

s

.

Loadin

g

one or more

C

Ds.

S

witch audio mode:

->

C

D ->

portable pla

y

er

(

U

S

B

)

/

iPod

®

-> Bl

ue

t

oo

th * ->

R

epeat t

h

e current trac

k

.

Press and hold

(

audible beep

)

:

r

epeat all o

f

the tracks in the

cu

rr

e

nt

fo

l

de

r.

*

Available accordin

g

to version.

A

udio s

y

stem on

/

o

ff

.

S

elect radio source.

S

elect waveband

(

FW, MW, LW

)

.

Automatic presettin

g

o

f

radio stations

(

autostore

)

.

2

85

01

FIRST STEPS

Fast back

/

forwards.

PTY

O

n

/

Off

.

Pla

y

the start of each track in the current folder.

Press and hold

(

audible beep

)

: pla

y

the start o

f

eac

h tr

ac

k in

a

ll f

o

l

de

r

s

.

Pr

e

vi

ous

/

n

e

xt tr

ac

k.

Successive presses: pla

y

re

t

u

rn

s

t

o

th

e

s

t

a

rt

o

f th

e

cu

rr

e

nt tr

ac

k.

S

elect previous

/

older

(

or track

)

.

Ad

j

ust audio settin

g

s

(

BASS, TREBLE, ...

)

.

Manual search u

p

and down for a radio station / PTY.

Function settin

g

mode

(

AF, REG, TP, SCV, ...

)

.

E

j

ect one or more

C

Ds.

Press: select folder

(

or track

)

.

Sea

r

c

h

fo

r TP tr

afﬁ

c

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n.

Select previous / next CD.

Pause / stop and restart pla

y

.

2

86

02

STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

S

PEAK

Press this button to activate voice reco

g

nition

(

"

L

istenin

g

" is displa

y

ed

)

.

Durin

g

voice reco

g

nition, press this button brie

ﬂ

y

to pause voice reco

g

nition.

Make a lon

g

press on this button to end voice reco

g

nition.

Press this button brieﬂ

y

to activate voice reco

g

nition, even durin

g

a call.

I

ncrease

/

reduce audio volume.

S

TART

C

AL

L

Press this button to answer an incomin

g

ca

ll.

If th

e

r

e

i

s

a

2n

d

incomin

g

call, press to put

th

e

1

st

call on hold and speak to the 2

t

nd

ca

ll

e

r.

In this case, press brie

ﬂ

y

to switch

f

rom one

calle

r t

o

t

he

o

t

he

r.

To start a three-way conversation, press

S

PEAK to chan

g

e to voice reco

g

nition

m

ode and sa

y

" Incor

p

orate the cal

l

".

END

C

AL

L

Press this button to re

j

ect an incomin

g

call.

D

ur

i

n

g

a conversat

i

on, press t

hi

s

b

utton to

e

n

d

a

call

.

S

earch

f

or a hi

g

her

/

lower radio

f

requenc

y

.

Next /

p

revious CD track.

C

D fast forwards

/

backwards.

Lon

g

press: audio s

y

stem on / off.

S

hort press: selection o

f

the source in the

f

ollowin

g

order: FM1

/

FM2

/

FM3

/

MW

/

LW

/

C

D.

2

87

1

03 GENERAL OPERATION

Pr

ess

th

e

"PWR"

bu

tt

o

n.

Th

e

l

as

t

sou

r

ce

se

l

ec

t

ed

be

f

o

r

e

s

witchin

g

off resumes operation.

The audio equipment functions can be

u

se

d

w

h

en t

h

e

ig

n

i

t

i

on sw

i

tc

h

i

s

i

n t

h

e

"O

N" or "A

CC

" position.

To switch o

ff

, press the "PWR" button

again.

ADJU

S

TING THE VOLUME

SETTING THE AUDIO MODES

Press the "

SOU

ND" button several

t

i

mes; t

h

e au

di

o mo

d

es c

h

an

g

e

i

n t

h

e

f

ollowin

g

order:

S

UB PUN

C

H

/

TYPE

/

FIELD

/

BA

SS

/

MID

/

TREBLE

/

FADER

/

BALAN

C

E

/

O

FF.

Turn the "V

O

L" dial respectivel

y

to the

l

e

ft t

o

dec

r

ease

th

e

v

o

l

u

m

e

o

r t

o

th

e

righ

t to

i

ncrease

i

t.

To access the personalised sound

functions quickl

y

, press and hold

t

hi

s

b

utton, t

h

en turn

i

t to reac

h

t

h

e

personalised sound settin

g

o

f

y

our

c

h

o

i

ce

.

Re

l

ease

th

e

bu

tt

o

n t

o

s

t

o

r

e

th

e

settin

g

.

QUICK ACCESS MODE SWITCHING ON / OFF

The audio settin

g

mode is deactivated when the radio is operated

o

r a

C

D is pla

y

ed or a

f

ter approximatel

y

10 seconds without an

y

ac

ti

o

n.

I

f

you press this button

f

or more than

2

seconds in the audio settin

g

mode,

the s

y

stem switches to "Hold" mode.

Th

e

aud

i

o

m

ode

se

l

ec

t

ed

will

be

retained until

y

ou press this button

ag

ain for more than 2 seconds.

"HOLD" MODE

2

88

03

1

GENERAL OPERATION

Turn the "S

O

UND" dial; the musical

ambiences chan

g

e in the followin

g

o

r

de

r:

C

LA

SS

I

C

/

JAZZ

/

P

O

P

/

R

OC

K

/

H

IP-H

O

P.

O

n

ce

th

e

a

m

b

i

e

n

ce

h

as

bee

n

s

elected, press the "

SO

UND" button

t

o

co

nﬁ rm.

"CLASSIC": o

p

timises the acoustics

to obtain perfect equalisation of the

sou

n

d

f

o

r

c

l

ass

i

ca

l m

us

i

c

.

"JAZZ"

: opt

i

m

i

ses t

h

e acoust

i

cs to

obtain an ambient sound with speci

ﬁ

c

m

odulations in the bass, mid tone and

treble

f

or

j

azz.

"P

O

P": o

p

timises the acoustics to

ob

t

a

in

c

l

ea

r v

oca

l

s

a

n

d

m

odu

l

a

ti

o

n

of

the bass and treble for pop music.

"R

O

CK": optimises the acoustics to

o

b

ta

i

n a soun

d

i

n

h

armon

y

w

i

t

h

t

h

e

rhy

t

h

m w

hi

c

h

p

l

aces t

h

e emp

h

as

i

s on

th

e

mi

d

t

o

n

e

fo

r r

oc

k m

us

i

c

.

"HIP-H

O

P": optimises the acoustics

to obtain a power

f

ul sound and

accentuation of the bass for hi

p

-ho

p

mus

i

c

.

SELECTING THE "TYPE" MUSICAL AMBIENCE

If the "TYPE" is chan

g

ed, the sound cuts out brieﬂ

y

.

SELECTING "FIELD" SURROUND EFFECT

Turn the "

SO

UND" dial; the surround

e

ffects chan

g

e in the followin

g

order:

N

O

RMAL

/

S

TA

G

E

/

LIVE

/

HALL.

O

nce the surround effect has been

s

elected, press the "S

O

UND" button

t

o

co

n

ﬁ

rm.

"N

O

RMAL": produces a sound in

whi

c

h th

e

v

o

i

ces

a

r

e

a

t th

e

f

r

o

nt

a

n

d

th

e

in

s

tr

u

m

e

nt

s

su

rr

ou

n

d

th

e

li

s

t

e

n

e

r.

"STAGE":

p

roduces a sound in which

the voices are immediatel

y

facin

g

the

l

istener, as on a sta

g

e.

"LIVE"

: pro

d

uces a soun

d

s

i

m

il

ar to

that o

f

a live show, in which the sound

reac

h

es

th

e

li

s

t

e

n

e

r

f

r

o

m

a

ll

d

ir

ec

ti

o

n

s

.

"HALL": produces a sound similar to

th

a

t

of

a

co

n

ce

rt h

a

ll with

deﬂ

ec

ti

o

n

of

th

e

sou

n

d

.

I

f

the "FIELD" is chan

g

ed, the sound cuts out brie

ﬂ

y

.

2

89

1

03

1

"BA

SS

"

S

ETTING

T

u

rn th

e

"

SOU

ND"

d

i

a

l t

o

se

t th

e

r

e

q

uired bass value.

GENERAL OPERATION

Turn the "

SO

UND" dial to set the

r

equ

i

re

d

m

id

tone va

l

ue.

"TREBLE" SETTING

"FADER" FRONT/REAR SOUND DISTRIBUTION SETTING

Turn the "

SOU

ND" dial to set the

ba

l

a

n

ce

o

f th

e

v

o

l

u

m

e

o

f th

e

fr

o

nt

a

n

d

r

ear speakers.

Turn the "

SOU

ND" dial to set the

r

equ

i

re

d

tre

bl

e va

l

ue.

Turn the "

SOU

ND" dial to set the

balance of the volume of the ri

g

ht and

l

eft speakers.

"BALANCE" LEFT/RIGHT SOUND DISTRIBUTION SETTING

"MID" MID-RANGE

S

ETTING

If the value "0" is set, an audible si

g

nal will be heard.

2

90

03

1

GENERAL OPERATION

This permits automatic ad

j

ustment of the "V

O

LUME", "BASS",

"MID"

an

d

"TREBLE"

sett

i

n

g

s

i

n re

l

at

i

on to t

h

e ve

hi

c

l

e spee

d

.

"

S

CV" AUTOMATIC VOLUME ADJU

S

TMENT

Turn the "

SOU

ND" dial to set the

v

o

l

u

m

e

o

f th

e

bass

u

nit.

O

nl

y

vehicles ﬁ tted with the "Premium

S

ound" s

y

stem can o

ff

er the "

S

UB

PUN

C

H" settin

g

.

"SUB PUNCH" BASE UNIT VOLUME SETTING

If the "SUB PUNCH" is chan

g

ed, the sound cuts out brieﬂ

y

.

Pr

ess

th

e

"

SOU

ND"

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

than two seconds to

g

ain access to

the functions settin

g

mode.

Then,

p

ress this same button several

times; the functions settin

g

mode

c

han

g

es in the followin

g

order:

AF

/

C

T

/

RE

G

/

TP-

S

/

PTY

(

languages

)

/

SC

V

/

PH

O

NE

/

O

FF.

Turn the "

SO

UND" dial respectivel

y

to

th

e

l

ef

t t

o

deac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

o

r t

o

the ri

g

ht to activate it.

2

91

04

1

RADIO

SELECTING RADIO SOURCE

Press the "PWR" button or the "AM

/

FM"

bu

tt

o

n t

o

s

w

i

t

ch

o

n t

he

r

adio

.

Pr

ess

th

e

"AM

/

FM"

bu

tt

o

n

se

v

e

r

a

l

tim

es

in

success

i

o

n t

o

se

l

ec

t th

e

waveband; it chan

g

es in the followin

g

order: FM1

/

FM2

/

FM

3

/

MW

/

LW

/

FM1...

A

UTOMATIC STATION SEARCH

MANUAL STATION SEARCH

Turn the "TUNE" dial respectivel

y

to

the left to search the lower frequencies

or to t

h

e r

igh

t to searc

h

t

h

e

high

er

f

requencies.

Press the "

S

EEK



" or "

S

EEK



"

button to search the lower frequencies

or the hi

g

her

f

requencies respectivel

y

.

Th

e searc

h

b

e

gi

ns automat

i

ca

lly

an

d

s

tops at the

ﬁ

rst station

f

ound.

SELECTING THE WAVEBAND

SELECTION / PRESETTING

2

92

1

04

1

Press one of the six buttons "1" to "

6

" until an

a

u

dibl

e s

ig

na

l

i

s

h

ear

d

.

Th

e soun

d

cuts out t

h

en

b

ecomes au

dibl

e a

g

a

i

n

when the station has been preset.

Th

e

n

u

m

be

r

of

th

e

bu

tt

o

n

a

n

d

th

e

assoc

i

a

t

ed

r

ad

i

o

f

requenc

y

appear on the screen.

MANUAL STATION PRESETTING

To recall the pre-set stored settin

g

, press the button and release it

within tw

o

seco

n

ds

.

RADIO

Y

ou can preset up to s

i

x stat

i

ons on eac

h

wave

b

an

d

.

Presetting a new station replaces the previous station.

AUTOMATIC STATION PRESETTING

Di

sconnect

i

n

g

t

h

e

b

atter

y

term

i

na

l

s c

l

ears t

h

e preset ra

di

o stat

i

ons.

S

tations can onl

y

be preset automaticall

y

on wavebands FM3, MW

a

n

d

LW.

Presettin

g

new stations replaces the previous stations.

This presettin

g

can be activated automaticall

y

irrespective of the

w

a

v

eba

n

d

selec

t

ed

.

Pr

ess

th

e

"AM

/

FM"

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n tw

o

seco

n

ds

.

The six stations offerin

g

the best

reception are preset and classiﬁ ed

f

rom the weakest to the stron

g

est on

t

h

e s

i

x correspon

di

n

g

b

uttons.

RECALLING PRESET STATIONS

Press one o

f

the six buttons "1" to "6". The station

c

orresponding to the waveband selected appears on

th

e

sc

r

ee

n.

2

93

04

1

RADIO

The "Radio Data

Sy

stem"

(

RD

S)

f

unction on the FM waveband

p

ermits:

- access to the displa

y

of information, such as the name of the

s

tation, ...

- listenin

g

to the same station while travellin

g

throu

g

h different

r

e

gi

ons,

- temporar

y

tunin

g

to tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation announcements.

Most FM stations use RD

S

. These stations transmit non-audible

data in addition to their pro

g

rammes.

The data transmitted in this wa

y

allows

y

ou access to various

functions, mainl

y

displa

y

in

g

of the name of the station, automatic

retunin

g

to alternative frequencies or temporar

y

retunin

g

to trafﬁ c

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n

a

nn

ou

n

ce

m

e

nt

s

.

RD

S

allows

y

ou to continue listenin

g

to the same station b

y

means

of

alternative

f

requencies that carr

y

the same station. However,

in certain conditions, RD

S

alternative

f

requencies may not be

p

rovided throu

g

hout the countr

y

. Radio stations do not cover the

w

hole countr

y

, which explains the loss o

f

reception o

f

the station

durin

g

a

j

ourne

y

.

"AF" ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES

Your radio automaticall

y

checks and selects the best

f

requenc

y

f

or

the radio station to which it is tuned

(

i

f

the station broadcasts on

s

everal transmitters or

f

requencies

)

.

The frequenc

y

of a radio station covers approximatel

y

30 miles

(

50 km

)

. The chan

g

e from one frequenc

y

to another explains the

temporar

y

loss of reception durin

g

a

j

ourne

y

.

If the station to which

y

ou are listenin

g

does not have several

f

requencies in the re

g

ion in which

y

ou are currentl

y

located,

y

ou can

deactivate alternative

f

requencies.

Some stations are or

g

anised in a network.

In different re

g

ions, the

y

broadcast different or shared pro

g

rammes

dependin

g

on the time o

f

da

y

.

Y

ou

ca

n

fo

ll

o

w:

- a regional station only,

- the entire network, with the possibilit

y

that

y

ou will be listenin

g

to a di

ff

erent pro

g

ramme.

REG REGIONAL MODE

O

n lon

g

distance

j

ourne

y

s, when the stored station becomes weak,

the radio searches

ﬁ

rst

f

or another

f

requency

f

or the same station

(

AF

)

. Then, i

f

this

f

ails, it searches

f

or a

f

requenc

y

broadcastin

g

the

r

e

g

ional pro

g

ramme

(

RE

G)

. I

f

this also

f

ails, the radio returns to the

s

t

o

r

ed

s

t

a

ti

o

n.

The "AF", "REG" and "TP" functions

ca

n

be

deac

tiv

a

t

ed

o

r

ac

tiv

a

t

ed

vi

a

th

e

"TUNE" button functions settin

g

mode.

RDS

2

9

4

04

1

RADIO

"TP" TRAFFIC INFORMATION

The "Trafﬁ c Pro

g

ramme"

(

TP

)

function permits automatic

and temporar

y

switchin

g

to an FM station broadcastin

g

trafﬁ c

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n.

Th

e ra

di

o stat

i

on or t

h

e source t

h

at

y

ou are

li

sten

i

n

g

to at t

hi

s po

i

nt

i

s pause

d

.

O

nce the tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation has ended, the system switches back to

the radio station or the source that

y

ou were listenin

g

to initiall

y

.

P

r

ess

t

he

"TP"

bu

tt

o

n.

"TP" appears in the screen. I

f

the

s

tation is compatible, "RD

S

" also

appears

.

If the radio detects trafﬁ c information, "TRAF INF" a

pp

ears on the

displa

y

, followed b

y

the frequenc

y

of the broadcastin

g

station, then

i

t

s

n

a

m

e

.

The volume is di

ff

erent

f

rom that o

f

the previous source.

Following the broadcasting o

f

the tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation, the volume

returns to that o

f

the source prior to the interruption.

When "TP" appears in the screen, the radio stops onl

y

at RD

S

s

tations broadcastin

g

tra

fﬁ

c in

f

ormation.

"ALERT" EMERGENCY BROADCA

S

T

S

A

n emer

g

enc

y

b

roa

d

cast automat

i

ca

lly

an

d

temporar

ily

i

nterrupts

the FM station or the source that you are listening to.

The messa

g

e "ALERT" appears in the screen and the volume is

different from that of the

p

revious source.

Followin

g

the emer

g

enc

y

broadcast, the messa

g

e disappears and

the volume returns to that of the source prior to the interruption.

"PTY" THEMED TYPE OF PROGRAMME

S

ome stations o

ff

er the option o

f

listenin

g

to a themed t

y

pe o

f

programme as a priority, selected

f

rom the list available below:

NEW

S

, AFFAIR

S

, INF

O

,

S

P

O

RT, EDU

C

ATE, DRAMA,

C

ULTURE,

SC

IEN

C

E, VARIED, P

O

P M, R

OC

K M, EA

S

Y M, LI

G

HT M,

C

LASSICS,

O

THER M, WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN,

SO

CIAL, RELIGI

O

N, PH

O

NE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ,

CO

UNTRY, NATI

O

N M,

O

LDIES, F

O

LK M, D

O

CUMENT.

2

95

04

1

2

RADIO

SEARCH FOR A "PTY" BROADCAST

Pr

ess

th

e

"PTY"

bu

tt

o

n.

Turn the "TUNE" dial to select the t

y

pe

o

f

pro

g

ramme required.

Two seconds later, the radio searches

for a broadcast which corres

p

onds

to

y

our selection; the t

y

pe of PTY

se

l

ec

t

ed

ﬂ

as

h

es

in th

e

sc

r

ee

n.

O

nce the station has been

f

ound, its

name appears

i

n t

h

e screen.

You can press the "

S

EEK



"

o

r

"

S

EEK



"

bu

tt

o

n

s

t

o

ﬁ

n

d

a

n

o

th

er

s

t

a

ti

o

n.

I

f

no station is

f

ound correspondin

g

to

y

our selected t

y

pe o

f

pro

g

ramme, "N

O

NE" appears in the screen

f

or

ﬁ

ve seconds and the

radio returns to the

p

revious station.

T

u

rn th

e

"T

U

NE"

d

i

a

l t

o

se

t th

e

PTY

pro

g

ramme to be stored.

Pr

ess

o

n

e

of

th

e

s

ix

bu

tt

o

n

s

"1" t

o

"

6

"

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

tw

o

seco

n

ds

.

The sound cuts out then becomes audible a

g

ain

when the pro

g

ramme has been stored.

Th

e

n

u

m

be

r

o

f th

e

bu

tt

o

n

a

n

d

th

e

assoc

i

a

t

ed

PTY

p

ro

g

ramme appear

i

n t

h

e screen.

To recall the preset memor

y

settin

g

, press the button and release it

within tw

o

seco

n

ds

.

PRESETTING A "PTY" PROGRAMME

You can preset up to six PTY programmes.

Each new pro

g

ramme stored replaces the previous one.

2

96

04

1

RADIO

CHANGING THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE OF THE "PTY"

P

ROGRAMME

Press the "TUNE" button

f

or more than

tw

o

seco

n

ds

t

o

access

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

s

ettin

g

mode.

Then,

p

ress this button several times

in succession; the functions settin

g

mode chan

g

es in the followin

g

order:

AF

/

C

T

/

RE

G

/

TP-

S

/

PTY

(

lan

g

ua

g

es

)

/

SC

V

/

PH

O

NE

/

O

FF.

Turn the "TUNE" dial to the le

f

t or

to the ri

g

ht to select the lan

g

ua

g

e

(

EN

G

LI

S

H, FRAN

C

AI

S

, DEUT

SC

H,

S

VENSK, ESPAGN

O

L, ITALIAN

O)

.

FUNCTIONS SETTING MODE

This

p

ermits activation or deactivation

o

f th

e

f

u

n

c

ti

o

n

s

be

l

o

w.

Press the "T

U

NE" button for more than

tw

o

seco

n

ds

t

o

access

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

s

ett

i

n

g

mo

d

e.

Then, press this button several times

in succession; the

f

unctions settin

g

mode chan

g

es in the

f

ollowin

g

order:

AF

/

C

T

/

RE

G

/

T

O

-

S

/

PTY

(

lan

g

ua

g

es

)

/ SCV / PH

O

NE /

O

FF.

T

urn t

h

e

"TUNE"

di

a

l

respect

i

ve

ly

t

o

th

e

l

ef

t t

o

deac

tiv

a

t

e

th

e

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

(

"

O

FF"

)

or to the ri

g

ht to activate it

(

"

O

N"

)

.

The "PH

O

NE" is not operational at present.

The

f

unctions settin

g

mode is deactivated a

f

ter approximatel

y

10 seconds without an

y

action.

2

97

05

1

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

This can pla

y

audio CDs

(

CD-DA, CD-Text, CD-R/RW

)

or MP3 CDs.

EJECTING A DISC

CD PLAYER

SELECTING CD MODE

I

f

the pla

y

er alread

y

contains a disc,

press the "

C

D" button.

"

C

D", the track number and the pla

y

in

g

time a

pp

ear in the screen.

Insert circular compact discs onl

y

.

8 cm compact discs must be inserted in the centre of the pla

y

er slot.

Af

ter inserting a disc, printed

f

ace upwards, the player starts

automaticall

y

.

Pr

ess

thi

s

bu

tt

o

n t

o

r

e

m

o

v

e

th

e

disc from the pla

y

er. The s

y

stem

automat

i

ca

lly

sw

i

tc

h

es to ra

di

o mo

d

e.

O

nce e

j

ected, i

f

the compact disc is not removed within

ﬁ

f

teen

s

econds, it is reloaded into the pla

y

er.

2

98

05

1

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

Random pla

y

in

g

of a disc

Pr

ess

th

e

"RDM"

bu

tt

o

n t

o

s

t

a

rt

r

andom pla

y

of the tracks on the disc.

"

RDM" appears in the screen.

T

o ex

i

t t

hi

s mo

d

e, press t

hi

s

b

utton

a

g

a

i

n.

AUDIO CD

P

r

ess

a

n

d

hold

bu

tt

o

n

"



"

o

r

"



"

t

o

c

arr

y

out a

f

ast backwards or

f

orwards

s

earch respectivel

y

.

Pla

y

be

g

ins when the button is

r

e

l

eased

.

Fast search

P

r

ess

bu

tt

o

n

"



"

o

r

"



"

t

o

selec

t t

he

previous or next track respectively.

Selectin

g

a track

P

ress t

h

e

"RPT"

b

utton to repeat

the play o

f

the current track. "RPT"

a

ppears in the screen.

To exit this mode, press this button

ag

ain.

Repeatin

g

a track

Pla

y

in

g

the be

g

innin

g

of each track

Press the "

SC

AN" button to start

p

layback o

f

the

ﬁ

rst ten seconds

of

eac

h tr

ac

k

o

n th

e

d

i

sc

. "

SC

AN"

appears in the screen and the

c

orrespondin

g

track number ﬂ ashes.

To exit this mode,

p

ress this button

a

g

ain.

O

n CD-R/RWs, the qualit

y

of the pla

y

back sound depends on the

e

ncodin

g

software, the burnin

g

device and the burnin

g

speed used.

2

99

1

2

1

05

CD-TEXT DISPLAY

Press the "DI

S

P" button several times

in succession; the

C

D-Text in

f

ormation

a

ppears in the

f

ollowin

g

order:

DI

SC

NAME

/

TRA

C

K NAME

/

N

O

RMAL DI

S

PLAY M

O

DE.

The CD pla

y

er and the CD chan

g

er are compatible with the displa

y

of

C

D-Text information.

In the case o

f

compact discs containin

g

both

C

D-DA and MP3

ﬁ

les,

p

la

y

automaticall

y

be

g

ins with the

C

D-DA

ﬁ

les.

To switch play between the two types o

f

ﬁ

le, press the "

C

D" button

f

or more than two seconds until an audible si

g

nal is heard.

While usin

g

these compact discs, the "Repeat", Random pla

y

" and

"Pla

y

in

g

of the be

g

innin

g

of the tracks" functions are onl

y

applied to

ﬁ l

es

o

f th

e

sa

m

e

f

o

rm

a

t.

I

f

th

e

in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n

e

x

ceeds

12 characters, press the "PA

G

E"

bu

tt

o

n t

o

see

th

e

r

es

t.

In th

e

abse

n

ce

of

C

D-T

e

xt in

fo

rm

a

ti

o

n

to be displa

y

ed, "N

O

TITLE" appears

o

n th

e

sc

r

ee

n.

MP3 / ID3 TAG CD

SELECTING AN MP3 FOLDER

Turn the "F

O

LDER" dial respectivel

y

to

the right to select a

f

older in ascending

o

r

de

r

o

r t

o

th

e

l

ef

t t

o

se

l

ec

t

a

fo

l

de

r in

descendin

g

order.

The

C

D pla

y

er and the

C

D chan

g

er are compatible with the pla

y

in

g

of

MP

3

ﬁ

les.

These must be recorded in I

SO

9660 Level 1

/

Level 2, Joliet or

R

omeo

f

ormat on

C

D R

O

Ms,

C

D-Rs or

C

D-RWs. The

C

Ds can

co

nt

a

in

a

m

a

xim

u

m

of

2

55

ﬁ

l

es

a

n

d

1

00

fo

l

de

r

s

o

n 1

6

l

e

v

e

l

s

.

The ID3 version 1 Ta

g

can be displa

y

ed while pla

y

in

g

MP3 ﬁ les.

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

300

05

1

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

REPEATING THE TRACKS IN A FOLDER

Pr

ess

th

e

"RPT"

bu

tt

o

n f

o

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

two seconds to repeat the pla

y

in

g

o

f

t

he

tr

acks

co

nt

ai

n

ed

i

n t

he

cu

rr

e

nt

f

older. "D-RPT" appears in the screen.

To exit this mode, press this button

a

g

ain.

Pr

ess

th

e

"RDM"

bu

tt

o

n t

o

s

t

a

rt

r

andom pla

y

in

g

of the tracks in the

c

urrent folder. "RDM" a

pp

ears in the

screen

.

T

o ex

i

t t

hi

s mo

d

e, press t

hi

s

b

utton

a

g

a

i

n.

PLAYING THE BEGINNING OF EACH TRACK

MP3 / ID3 TAG DISPLAY

Press the "DI

S

P" button several times

in succession; the MP3 information

appears in the followin

g

order:

F

O

LDER NAME

/

TRA

C

K NAME

/

NO

RMAL DI

S

PLAY M

O

DE.

Press the "

SC

AN" button to start

p

la

y

in

g

the

ﬁ

rst ten seconds o

f

each

tr

ac

k in

a

ll

of

th

e

fo

l

de

r

s

. "

SC

AN"

a

pp

ears in the screen and the

c

orrespondin

g

track number ﬂ ashes.

To exit this mode, press this button

a

g

a

i

n.

RANDOM PLAYING OF A FOLDER

RANDOM PLAYING OF A DI

S

C

Pr

ess

th

e

"RDM"

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

two seconds to start random pla

y

in

g

o

f

th

e

tr

ac

k

s

in

a

ll

of

th

e

fo

l

de

r

s

. "D-RDM"

a

pp

ears in the screen.

To exit this mode,

p

ress this button

a

g

ain.

When pla

y

be

g

ins, "READIN

G

" appears in the screen then

disappears to make wa

y

f

or the

f

older number, the track number,

the playing time and "MP3".

301

05

3

1

Pr

ess

th

e

"DI

S

P"

bu

tt

o

n

fo

r m

o

r

e

th

a

n

two seconds to activate the ID

3

Ta

g

information. "TAG" a

pp

ears in the

sc

r

ee

n.

Press the "DI

S

P" button several times

in succession; the Ta

g

ID3 information

appears in the

f

ollowin

g

order:

A

LBUM NAME

/

TRA

C

K NAME

/

A

RTI

S

T NAME

/

N

O

RMAL DI

S

PLAY

MO

DE.

To deactivate this information,

p

ress

the "DISP" button a

g

ain for more than

tw

o

seco

n

ds

.

If th

e

inf

o

rm

a

ti

o

n

e

x

ceeds

12 characters, press the "PAGE"

bu

tt

o

n t

o

see

t

he

r

es

t.

In the absence o

f

MP3 or ID3 Ta

g

in

f

ormation to be displayed,

"N

O

TITLE" appears in the screen.

O

n

C

D-R

/

RWs, the qualit

y

o

f

the pla

y

in

g

sound depends on the

e

ncodin

g

software, the burnin

g

device and the burnin

g

speed used.

Dependin

g

on the ﬂ ow chart of the MP3 folders and ﬁ les on the

di

sc, p

l

a

y

ma

y

not

b

e

gi

n

i

mme

di

ate

ly

.

CD CHANGER

SELECTING CHANGER MODE

A

fter insertin

g

at least one disc, printed

f

ace upwards, the chan

g

er starts

automat

i

ca

lly

.

I

f

the changer already contains a disc,

p

ress the "

C

D" button.

"CD", the disc and track numbers and

the pla

y

in

g

time appear in the screen.

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

Citroen 2012 C4 Aircross

Product's Documents

Owner's handbook

Specifications

Citroen 2012 C4 AIRCROSS Questions and Answers

Related Products

Sealey VS2005 Diesel Injector Puller for Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat

Sealey VSE4785 Front Pivot Arm Bush Tool for Peugeot 407/508, Citroen C5/C6

DRAPER 27211 Engine Timing Kit (Fiat, Citroen, Peugeot)

DRAPER 27171 Engine Timing Kit (Citroen, Land Rover, Peugeot)

DRAPER 26913 Engine Timing Kit (Citroen, Fiat, Peugeot)

DRAPER 27118 Engine Timing/Overhaul Kit (Citroen, Peugeot)